Home

GPD 515/G5 Drive Technical Manual

1. Chart 6 5 PUF DC Bus Fuse Open m Chart 6 6 oC Overcurrent 2 11 40 0 24 1 se esse essen nena 6 7 oL1 Motor Overload 1 2 6 6 8 eer cL eanan a a i aa Chart 6 9 oH Heatsink Overtemp MT m Chart 6 10 CPFXX Control Function Error 1 1 6 11 EFX External Fault tricot ettet reti irc iege Chart 6 12 OS OVe SD660 e T Chart 6 13 OUt OMG OOM EUNT Chart 6 14 Oscilloscope chassis may be at voltages potentially hazardous to life if not properly grounded If oscilloscope is used to measure high voltage waveforms use only a dual channel oscilloscope in the differential mode with X100 probes Always connect oscilloscope chassis to earth ground Voltages dangerous to life exist when equipment is open and energized Do not work alone CAUTION To prevent equipment damage always remove incoming three phase power before test equipment is connected or removed Never disconnect or connect the wiring while the power is applied TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6 1 MOTOR DOES NOT ROTATE CHARGE LAMP NO ON MAIN PC BOA
2. C3 03 Slip Compensation Limit Factory setting 200 Range 0 to 250 C3 04 Slip Compensation Selection Factory setting 0 During Regeneration Data 0 Disabled 1 Enabled C3 05 Flux Select Factory setting 0 Range 0 or 1 Setting Description 0 Slip Included Flux is calculated after slip compensation is applied 1 Slip Excluded Flux is calculated after slip compensation is applied This parameter is only available in the open loop vector control method A 1 02 2 When C 3 05 is set to 0 the motor will enter the constant horsepower range when motor speed exceeds motor rated synchronous speed When C3 05 1 the motor will enter the constant horsepower range when output frequency is equal to the motor rated frequency C3 06 Output Voltage Limit Factory setting 0 Range Oor 1 Setting Description 0 Disabled Output voltage limit and slip compensation are disabled above base speed 1 Enabled Output voltage limit and slip compensation are enabled above base speed When the control method is set to open loop vector A 1 02 2 this parameter enables and disables slip compensation when operating in the constant horsepower region output frequency is equal to or greater than motor rated frequency In order to achieve proper slip compensation output voltage is reduced slightly starting at 9096 of motor rated frequency When the control method i
3. 2 i 0 00 B 1 0 00 B 0 00 B 6 00 B 0 0 110 0 0 0 109 0 0 0 400 0 0 0 400 0 0 0 400 0 A1 10 Table A1 4 Drive dX XX Parameters Continued INCRE MENT PARAMETER NUMBER FUNCTION NAME DESCRIPTION d5 01 Torque Control x Speed Control Selection Torque Control Torque Reference Delay Time Speed Limit Selection Analog input term 18 amp 14 2 d5 04 setting SETTING RANGE FACTORY ACCESS LEVEL para Qe Note SETTING ex es Trim Control 1 96 100 A 5 32 H Level Speed Limit 1 0 120 10 Bias Speed Torque Control Switching Timer NOTES 1 Capability to view and set specific parameters is dependent upon the Access Level A1 01 and Control Method A1 02 0 V f 1 V f w PG 2 Open Loop Vector 3 Flux Vector the drive is programmed for Each column represents the Access Level for a given Control Method Q Quick start B Basic A Advanced not available A1 11 PARAMETER NUMBER FUNCTION NAME Input Voltage Setting DESCRIPTION SETTING RANGE 155 255 230V ratings 310 510 460V ratings 445 733 600V ratings Table A1 5 Drive EX XX Parameters FACTORY SETTING 230V ratings 460 460V ratings 575 600V ratings ACCESS LEVEL See Note 1 Motor Selection 0 General Purpose motor TEFC 1 Blower Cool
4. 5 6 Accessubevel pred S ps uapa ss 5 7 A to restart 5 7 Automatic Frequency Regulator AFR Gain 5 8 Automatic Speed Regulator ASR 5 9 Carrier Frequency exeo ere Hee br dee 5 12 Critical Frequency Rejection 5 13 DG Injection Braking 5 14 Digital Operator Display Selection 5 17 Display Monitor at Power up Selection 5 19 eda QUI Da esci uM ha va i upina ua ass 5 19 E E E io pU Dora arua null 5 20 Encoder PG Parameters oes 5 21 Energy Saving Operation acto kesh ede ok iT PUE 5 26 External 5 28 Frequency Reference Command Bias Gain 5 29 Frequency Reference Input Signals Auto Manual 5 31 Frequency Reference Loss Detection 5 33 Frequency Reference Retention ar 5 33 Frequency Reference Upper amp Lower Limits 5 34 Hunting Prevention oo tru man RI 5 35 Reference ERE 5 36 Local Remote and Reference Selection 5 39 Loc
5. Set the control method of the Press then Main Menu drive to Open Loop Vector ME Initialize Set A1 02 to 2 J NOTE The drive leaves Press DATA _ then twice Control Method h the factory set for ENTER V F Control Open Loop Vector control this step may not be required Press _DATA _ then set drive to Open Loop A1 02 2 h ENTER Vector using Open Loop Vector Write value to memory by pressing N DATA Entry Accepted ENTER A briefly then Control Method B Open Loop Vector A 1 N Set parameter access level to Press then Main Menu Advanced This allows all MEN Initialize parameters to be viewed and S modified x Press DATA then Access Level ENTER A Quick Start A Press _DATA then set drive to Advanced 1 01 4 h ENTER Using Advanced Level Ne A Write value to memory by pressing DATA ENTER E Entry Accepted briefly then Access Level Advanced Level 2 2a continued DESCRIPTION Check the motor rotation using the JOG function NOTE The frequency reference for this operation comes from d1 09 and is factory set to 6 Hz WARNING THE NEXT KEY PRESS WILL CAUSE THE MOTOR TO MOVE TAKE APPRO PRIATE PRECAUTIONS KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR Frequency Ref U1 01 0 00 HZ Press then DATA MEN ENTER If either or both of the SEQ and
6. x x _ ACCEL ROTATION amp FREQUENCY REVERSE AT 15HZ SETTING RUN REV ROTATION AT 60HZ Figure 2 3 Example of Simple Operation Table 2 5 Test Run With Digital Operator DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY Power ON Press ENS then DATA Frequency Ref ENTER U1 01 0 00 HZ If either the SEQ or REF lights Press SEQ and REF lights are off are on they should be turned _LOCAL _ DRIVE and FWD lights are on REMOTE off by pressing the LOCAL REMOTE key This will set the Frequency Ref drive so it can be completely U1 01 0 00 HZ controlled by the Digital Operator 2 24 Table 2 5 Test Run With Digital Operator Continued DESCRIPTION Set a run frequency of 15 Hz KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY Press DATA Frequency Ref h ENTER 000 00 HZ Set the frequency to 15 using Frequency Ref A Z 2 015 00 HZ RESET S Write the value to memory by pressing Va DATA CENTER Entry Accepted V briefly then Frequency Ref 015 00 HZ Display the output frequency Press then ESC Output Freq U1 02 0 00 HZ Run the motor in the forward direction Press RUN light comes on and motor ramps up to speed Output Freq U1 02 15 00 HZ NOTE Output frequency may be slightly higher than the frequency reference depending on the control method selected Run t
7. 11 1 6 10 Diode and IGBT Transistor Module Resistance Test 6 27 Checking Encoder Pulses r 6 29 LISTING OF PARAMETERS A1 1 SPECIFICATIONS edet in eas cous i en de ei pe doutes deg A2 1 CAPACITY amp CONTROL METHOD RELATED PARAMETERS r rr A3 1 GPD 515 G5 SPARE PARTS A4 1 GPD 515 G5 DIMENSIONS 5 1 DYNAMIC BRAKING CONNECTIONS 6 1 1 1 xiii QUICK REFERENCE FOR GPD 515 G5 PARAMETERS FACTORY SET PARAMETER FACTORY USER PARAMETER FACTORY USER PARAMETER FACTORY USER NUMBER 7 SETTING SETTING NUMBER 7 SETTING SETTING NUMBER 7 SETTING SETTING 230V 460V or 575v 5 0 F 60 0 230 0V 460 0V or 575 0V 5 60 0 3 0 6 2 6 0 0 5 6 0 2 6 0 0 0 1 00 00 r 0 0 0 0 5 10 5 20 00 6 e 0 500 6 2 20 00 6 5 i 8 A 0 50 5 0 75 5 0 004 0 0 5 0 0 See Note 3 400 2 10 0 5 230 0 10 0 5 i 575 0V 5 1 00 1 00 50 e
8. 5 68 Distances Selection icc 5 95 Upper Limit Freg 5 94 Main Circuit Input Output Simplified Block Diagram 5 97 Up Arrow Key Ls 4 1 4 3 Encoder PG X2 Connections 1 24 Speed Torque Control Selection Timer 5 95 User Parameters 5 106 Speed Limit PE GS Speed Limit Selection 5 96 V Torque Reference Delay Time 5 96 Zero Servo 5 110 Torque Detection aaa 5 98 Vif Pattern Zero Servo Gain 5 111 Overtorque Detection Level 5 98 5 108 Zero Servo Completion Width 5 111 Overtorque Detection Time 5 98 Standard 5 106 Zero Speed Control Selection Voltage Zero Speed Operation 5 112 Torque Limit 4 94249444944 4 5 101 TUER 5 108 A2 1 Min Output Frequency 5 112 Forward Torque Limit 5 101 2222222 Forward Regenerative Torque Limit 5 101 Mid Frequency Reverse Torque Limit 5 101 Motor Reverse Regenerative Torque Limit 5 101 GPD 515 G5 Drive YASKAWA E
9. Input Phase Loss Detection Input Selection Analog Multi function 5 53 Multi function Terminals 5 58 Input Terminal Status Monitor Item A1 27 Input Voltage ssena A2 1 Inputs u m a a nasa Frequency Reference Inspection Receiving 44204 47 1 4 4 Installation PHYSICAL ertet itti iot 14 Electrical c etd Integral Time 1 Integral Value Limit PID Integral Reset ASR PID INDEX Continued Integral Value During Accel Decel Selection PG 5 24 Interconnection 2 wire Control 3 wire Control Internal Dynamic Braking Resistor Protection 5 46 J Jog Frequency Reference 5 35 5 36 Key tee 4 1 4 2 K L Lag Filter Time Output 5 81 Lamps Indicator 8 Limit Integral Value PID Line to Line Resistance Motor 5 Listing of Parameters LOCAL REMOTE Key Selection es Local Remote Reference 5 39 Lower Limit Frequency Reference 5 34 M Main Circuit Block Diagrams
10. gt Control Circuit RCC _ Cooling Fan 7q CIMR G5M40181F to 40451F GPD515C B041 to B096 When using DC input as main circuit power connect 460Vac to control power transformer terminals 44 and 4 s a Control Supply Circuit RCC Internal Cooling Fan Cooling Fan CIMR G5M41850F to 43000F GPD515C B340 to B605 When using DC input as main circuit power connect 460Vac to control power transformer terminals 4 r and 400 s400 Main Circuit Configuration Block Diagrams 600V DCL B1 B2 Option 1 00 1 221 1 2 CIMR G5M51P51F to 50151F GPD515C C003 to C022 When using DC input as main circuit gt S power connect 600Vac to control z power transformer terminals and s J Cooling Fan CIMR G5M50181F to 50221F GPD515C C027 to C032 When using DC input as main circuit power connect 600Vac to control power transformer terminals r and s E Control Circuit RCC Control Supply gt Circuit RCC CIMR G5M50301F to 51600F GPD515C C041 to C200 When using DC input as main circuit power connect 600Vac to pz control power transformer Cooling terminals s 1 4 2 Grounding The drive must be solidly ground
11. o Operator Fora complete listing of parameters see Appendix 1 4 8 4 5 MODES OF OPERATION The procedure for choosing a mode is shown in Table 4 4 Table 4 4 Digital Operator Mode Selection DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY Frequency Ref U1 01 0 00 HZ Top of Main Menu Displays Operation Mode drive changes to Program mode Main Menu Operation Main Menu Initialize Displays Initialize Mode Displays Programming Main Menu Mode A Enu Programming e Displays Auto Tuning Mode displayed only when Vector Control Method is selected Main Menu Auto Tuning e Displays Modified Main Menu Parameter Menu a Snu Modified Constants Top of Main Menu kk i Return to Operation Main Menu Operation Select Operation Mode Displays frequency reference setting changes to Drive mode Frequency Ref U1 01 0 00 HZ 4 9 Parameters are changed by pressing the MENU key to enter the Program mode then advancing through the levels of the menu to access the parameter that is desired to be changed Only the parameters listed in Table A1 11 Appendix 1 may be changed while the drive is running Table 4 5 Example 1A Changing a Parameter in Quick start Access Level DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY Frequency Ref U1 01 0 00
12. Control circuit terminal Output Terminal At time of most recent fault Status 10000111 rg J Control circuit terminals 9 10 Closed Control circuit terminal 25 Closed Control circuit terminal 26 Closed Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Fault contact output active Inverter Status At time of most recent fault C 7 During zero speed uring run During reverse run During reset signal input During speed agree Drive operation ready Minor fault Major fault Mee EMEA usor E EEEE Fault 2nd most recent fault Message 2 A1 30 Table A1 10 Drive UX XX Parameters Continued PARAMETER DISPLAY ANALOG MONITOR ACCESS LEVEL MONITOR ITEM DESCRIPTION See Note 3 NUMBER UNIT OUTPUT LEVEL O q 2 3 Faut message ara recent au Toffe U3 04 Fault Message 4 4th most recent oldest fault lelejojo usas Eensame 1 O mos ecrit maj jejejeje ofan os centi epf Oan ret ae a effie pese tees esie 1 Display unit differs depending on setting of 01 03 2 Display unit 0 01A for models GPD515C A003 thru A033 CIMR G5M20P441F thru 27P51F B001 thru B021 40P41F thru 47P51F and 003 thru C012 51P51F thru 57P51F Display unit 2 0 1A for models GPD515C A049 thru A300 CIMR G5M20111F thru 20750F B001 thru B011 40111F thru 43000F
13. 50371F C052 L1 R L2 S L3 T 6 61 T1 U T2 V W a 42 50451F C062 L1 R L2 S L3 T 6 61 T1 U T2 V W a 42 50551 077 L1 R L2 S T 6 61 T1 U T2 V W a 42 2 0 1 0 4 2 50751 099 L1 R L2 S L3 T 6 61 T1 U T2 V W a 42 14 10 3 0 300 4 2 0 50900 C130 L1 R L2 S L3 T 6 61 T1 U T2 V W a 42 14 10 300 400 150 200 4 2 0 22 60 51100 172 L1 R L2 S T 6 61 T1 U T2 V W A 0 2 2 14 10 350 400 2 5 5 180 200 3 2 0 30 60 51600F C200 L1 R L2 S L3 T 6 61 T1 U T2 V W 42 Consult local electrical codes for wire sizing requirements Indicates terminal uses a pressure lug 1 5 14 10 2 5 5 Table 1 2 Terminal Functions and Voltages of Main Circuit SECTION A 230V FUNCTION New Model No 20P41F 20181F TERMINAL CIMR G5M 27P51F 20221F 207905 Old Model No A080 GPD5isc 003 A033 A049 A064 ped A130 A300 Three phase Main circuit input power supply 200 208 220V at 50 Hz 200 208 220 230V at 60 Hz Three phase AC output to motor OV to max input voltage level DB Resistor terminals B1 amp B2 DC Reactor terminals amp 1 amp 62 DC Bu
14. Indicates customer connection terminal Wire only to terminals shown Note that not all terminals shown are available in all ratings see Tables 1 1 and 1 2 Indicates alternate terminal marking i e R and L1 A Function labels shown for these terminals are determined by factory settings of parameters 1 0 1 through H1 06 1 01 24 1 02 14 1 03 0 1 04 H1 05 4 H1 06 6 See paragraph 5 32 _ Function labels shown for these terminals are determined by factory settings of parameters H2 01 through H2 03 See paragraph 5 33 Function labels shown for these terminals are determined by factory settings of parameters 01 04 05 0 8 amp 09 See paragraphs 5 19 amp 5 30 Bl Function labels and signal levels shown for these terminals are determined by factory settings of parameters H4 01 amp H4 04 See paragraph 5 31 1 If only a remote Manual Speed pot 1RH is used 255 is not needed in that case a jumper must be added between terminals 6 and 11 This jumper will override both the Auto and Digital Operator frequency references regardless of the programming of parameter b1 01 If you are using a remote speed command or the Digital Operator DO NOT install this jumper See paragraph 5 19 2 The Drive Electronic Thermal Overload function parameters L1 01 L1 02 meets standards set by UL and cUL for motor thermal overload protection If local code requires separate mechan
15. N Enter the Maximum frequency Press then twice Main Menu E1 04 For constant torque MENU Programming applications set to motor nameplate frequency For constant horsepower N applications set to maximum Press DATA then A 3 times Group E frequency desired ENTER Motor x P Press DATA twice Input Voltage ENTER 1 01 460 VAC Press twice then DATA Max Frequency B ENTER 0060 0 HZ E Set the maximum frequency using Frequency 0060 0 HZ Write value to memory by pressing DATA ENTER briefly then Max Frequency E1 04 60 0 HZ J J 2 20 2 4 continued DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY Enter the Base frequency Press twice then DATA Base Frequency h E1 06 This value can be A ENTER 0060 0 HZ obtained from the motor M A nameplate rated frequency w Set the base frequency using Base Frequency Lo W gt 0060 0 HZ RESET in Write value to memory by pressing DATA C 7 Entry Accepted Ne briefly then Base Frequency E1 06 60 0 HZ Enter the maximum motor Press then DATA 4 Max Voltage voltage E1 05 This value NV ENTER 400 0 VAC can be obtained from the J motor nameplate rated voltage Set the maximum voltage using Max Voltage QW gt 460 0
16. 4 1 4 2 RUN Key eun tien tre 4 1 4 2 Running Forward sees 2 24 Reverse ssseeeeeeeeennees 2 24 Stall Prevention Level During 5 07 Stall Prevention Selection During 5 87 2560 Sample Hold Function 5 67 Scaling Display Digital Operator 5 17 S Curve Characteristics 5 6 Shock Resistance see S Curve Skip Frequency see Prohibited Frequency Slip Compensation 5 84 Gain Limit Primary Delay Time 5 84 Selection During Regeneration 5 84 Soft Start see S Curve Spare Parts Specifications Speed Detection Output Signal PANGS us upa ga w oe Sean rto Speed Reference Multiple Multi step Speed Operation 5 39 Speed Search 5 64 Stall Prevention Level During Accel Level During Running Limit During Selection During Accel Selection During Decel Selection During Running 5 87 Start up Initial u u u uuu 0 2 1 Start up Procedure Simplified i Station Address Ser Comm MODBUS Control
17. Decel Time 1 0001 0 sec J A Write into memory Press DATA ENTER E Entry Accepted Change reference value Change value by pressing b riefly then Decel Time 1 C1 02 1 0 sec Top of Main Menu 1 Return to Operation Main Menu Operation Select Operation Mode changes to Drive mode Frequency Ref U1 01 0 00 HZ Table 4 7 Example 2 Changing Control Method in Quick start Access Level DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY Frequency Ref U1 01 0 00 HZ Select Initialize Mode Main Menu Initialize Select the Parameter Name Control Method Open Loop Vector 1 02 0 V F Control Write into memory Entry Accepted Change data value briefly then Control Method V F Control Return to Operation Operation Select Operation Mode Frequency Ref changes to Drive mode U1 01 0 00 HZ Top of Main Menu Main Menu Section 5 PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES 5 1 GENERAL This section describes features of the GPD 515 G5 which are defined by programmed settings in the various parameters in memory Since most features use more than one parameter the descriptions appear in alphabetical order by the function name In Table 5 1 the functions are grouped into operational categories To cross re
18. 2 2 Power On and Preliminary Checks Open Loop Control e deas dte 2 3 Power On and Preliminary Checks Flux Vector Control 2 6 Power On and Preliminary Checks V f Control 2 11 Power On and Preliminary Checks V f with PG Feedback Control cette eror EE 2 14 Changing the Language on the Digital Operator 2 19 Calculating Motor Parameters 2 20 Test Run Using Digital Operator Local Control 2 24 Pre operation Considerations r r 2 27 SI rag F n6tli fty asnasan aaa qunqu OG 2 27 OPERATION AT LOAD osos He pO diete 3 1 DIGITAL OPERATOR cod tu En 4 1 General 4 1 Display and er 4 1 Digital Operator Menu Trees 4 4 Basic Programming u nuqapa p rape o e ite qu apaq ae 4 8 Modes of Operation 4 9 Release Date 4 01 2002 xi PARAGRAPH SUBJECT O101010101010101010101010101010101010101010101010101 C1 Cl O10101010101 C1 OQ GQ N CONTENTS Continued PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES 5 1 Cra p ET 5 1 Accel Decel FIO idi Meee 5 3 Accel Decel S Curve Characteristics
19. QUICK REFERENCE FOR GPD 515 G5 PARAMETERS FACTORY SET PARAMETER FACTORY USER PARAMETER FACTORY USER PARAMETER FACTORY USER NUMBER 7 SETTING SETTING NUMBER 7 SETTING SETTING NUMBER 7 SETTING SETTING 24 14 0 3 4 3 3 6 4 3 8 6 3 1 To establish a custom User Access Level refer to paragraph 5 4 2 Initial value is related to V f curve selected by E1 03 setting 3 Settings in parentheses reflect 3 wire control initialization values 4 Monitor displays UX XX are display or output selections rather than parameter setup therefore user setting is not possible 5 Factory setting depends on drive rating See Table A3 1 6G Factory setting depends on Control Method A1 02 7 Not all parameters are accessible in all Access Levels A1 01 and Control Methods A1 02 see Section 5 8 Only effective with PG D2 or PG B2 option card see instruction sheet 2Y25 396 9 Only effective with Al 14B or Al 14U option card see instruction sheet 2Y25 296 or 295 10 Only effective with DI 08 or DI 16H2 option card see instruction sheet 2Y25 294 or 400 11 Only effective with AO 08 AO 12 or AO 12B2 option card see instruction sheet 2Y25 297 or 438 12 Only effective with DO 02C option card see instruct
20. 5 Write value to memory by pressing DATA ENTER Entry Accepted Ne P briefly then Max Voltage h E1 05 460 0 VAC J 2 21 2 4 continued DESCRIPTION Enter the motor rated full load amps E2 01 This value can be obtained from the motor nameplate motor full load amps KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY Press then 4 Function 2 5 5 L Motor Setup J Press DATA twice Motor Rated FLA ENTER 001 00 A J Motor Rated FLA 001 20 A NA Set the FLA using gt Write value to memory by pressing DATA ENTER F Entry Accepted briefly then Motor Rated FLA E2 01 1 20 A Enter the motor rated slip E2 02 This value can be calculated using the following formula 2 02 Ns Nr Ns Nr nameplate rated speed Ns synchronous speed Ns fn x 120 of motor poles x 60 x 0 7 Press then DATA Motor Rated Slip Z ENTER 02 90 HZ Set motor rated slip using Motor Rated Slip ZJ SZ 2 1 08 HZ H Write value to memory by pressing DATA ENTER Entry Accepted briefly then Motor Rated Slip N 2 02 1 08 Hz NL 2 22 2 4 continued DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY Enter the motor no load current Press then DATA E2 03 This value can some A ENTER times be obt
21. Function Stall prevention during acceleration disabled Stall prevention during acceleration enabled Stall prevention during acceleration enabled auto adjust 5 86 5 39 STALL PREVENTION Continued L3 02 Stall Prevention Level During Accel Factory setting 150 Range O to 200 This parameter determines the actual drive output current level during an acceleration condition Set in percent of drive rated output current see Appendix 2 A setting of 200 will disable stall prevention during acceleration During acceleration if the output MOTOR current exceeds the value L3 02 CURRENT acceleration stops and frequency is maintained When the output current L3 02 setting goes below the value set in L3 02 acceleration resumes In the constant horsepower region OUTPUT actual output frequency gt max voltage frequency E1 06 the stall prevention level during acceleration is changed by the following formula Stall prevention level during accel constant horsepower L3 03 Stall Prevention Limit During Accel CHP C L3 05 Stall Prevention Selection During Running Stall prevention during running disabled Stall prevention level v accel CHP x Max voltage frequency Actual output frequency Factory setting 5 0 Range 0 to 100 Factory setting 1 Stall prevention during running enabled uses Decel time 1 C1 02 S
22. Enabled The drive will detect a ground fault condition Factory setting 1 Range O or 3 Setting Description 0 Drive relies on L8 19 protection 1 Lower fc When output current is greater than 10096 and output frequency is less than or equal to 10 Hz the carrier frequency is automatically decreased to between 8 kHz and 2 kHz depending on the drive size The carrier will automatically return to the normal value after the load is reduced Short term OL2 OL2 occurs in 2 seconds when output frequency is 6 Hz or less and in current limit approx 17596 of drive rated current I Limit 150 Current is limited to 15096 of drive rated current Parameter L 8 17 assists in protecting the output transistors IGBTs from overheating when the output current is high and the output frequency is low L8 19 OL2 Selection At Low Speed Factory setting 0 Range Oor 1 Setting Description 0 Disabled Drive Overload OL2 protection is the same at low speed as it is at high speed Enabled Drive Overload OL2 protection responds more quickly when output frequency is 6 Hz or less This parameter allows the selection of normal or quick Drive Overload OL2 protection below 6 Hz It is recommended that this parameter be enabled at all times In some instances quick drive overload protection L8 19 1 may not be desired suc
23. 1 8 1 9 1 10 Terminals Input Output Wiring 1 2 Max Output Frequency 2 20 5 108 Max 2 21 5 108 Mechanical resonance see Critical Frequency Rejection MENU Key te 4 1 4 3 Menu Trees Digital Operator 4 5 Mid Output Frequency 5 108 Mid Output Voltage Min Base Block Time 5 65 Min Output Frequency 5 108 Min Output Voltage 5 108 Miscellaneous Parameters 5 44 Miscellaneous Protective Features 5 46 MODBUS Control 548 Operation Mode Selection 5 48 Reference Selection 5 48 Ser Comm Baud Rate 5 48 5 49 Ser Comm Parity Selection 5 48 5 49 Ser Comm Station Address 5 48 5 49 Stopping Method at Ser Comm Error 1 17 Mode Selection 4 8 Model Numbers Drive xvii A2 1 1 5 1 Momentary Power Loss Ride thru 5 50 Deactivation Time 5 50 PIOLGCHOIT 5 50 Monitor Selection At Power Up 5 19
24. H3 05 0 H3 05 z 1 H3 09 0 H3 09 z 1 100 em ny 100 ese FREQUENCY i FGAIN 10 0 10 0 oV 10V oV 10V E 100 100 MULTI FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT 5 54 MULTI FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT 5 30 MULTI FUNCTION ANALOG INPUTS Term 14 amp 16 Continued H3 05 220r C H3 09 2 or C FBIAS amp FBIAS2 OV 10V 100 MULTI FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT REDUCTION COEFFI CIENT 10V OV 1V 10V MULTI FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT Accel or decel time Actual accel or decel time Coefficient 200 ay OVERTORQUE DETECTION LEVEL 10 0V 10V MULTI FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT Max Output Freq FREQUENCY REFERENCE LOWER LIMIT MULTI FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT 5 55 H3 05 4 H3 09 4 VBIAS 10V OV 10V MULTI FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT H3 05 6 H3 09 6 100 cct DC INJECTION BRAKING CURRENT OV 10V MULTI FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT STA 100 717 A PREVENTION LEVEL DURING RUNNING PERCENT OF 13 06 10 10V SETTING uwasta Meo Output Freq E1 04 SETTING PROHIBITED FREQUENCY 4 MULTI FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT H3 05 10 H3 09 10 FWD 1009577 TORQUE LIMIT 210 OV TOV MULTI FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT H3 05 12 H3 09 12 REGEN 1009577 TORQUE LIMIT 10V OV 10V MULTI FU
25. Reference card Communication option card Communication option card failure self diagnostic error Communication option card Model code error Communication option card DPRAM error Speed deviation Deviation between speed reference and speed feedback exceeded the deviation level F1 10 amp F1 11 Stop mode selection possible F1 04 P SI F G Communications A communications error occurred and b1 01 3 M Error and or b1 02 3 Note2 24 simultaneously operation External fault input from Check communication option card connection and M Communication option card signal Note 2 Both FWD and REV Drive is in temporary Ramp to Stop condition one commands were applied input command must be removed to resume terminal 4 Note 3 External fault signal at A fault condition has occurred in the external M terminal 3 circuit s monitored by the contact providing input to Note 2 j the indicated terminal F Stop mode selection possible H1 01 thru H1 06 External fault signal at See Section 5 17 6 2 Table 6 1 DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY EF5 External Fault 5 EF6 External Fault 6 EF7 External Fault 7 EF8 External Fault 8 E 10 SI F G CPU Down ERR EPROM R W Err FbL Feedback Loss GF Ground Fault LF Output Pha Loss OC Overcurrent OH Heatsnk Overtemp OH1 Heatsnk MA
26. TORQUE COMPENSATION TCMP H3 01 or H3 09 14 Term 14 o TORQUE H3 05 or H3 09 14 TREF Term 16 TORQUE LIMIT I T d5 02 SPEED LIMIT o 55 SPEED SLIM LIMITING Programmed MOTOR SPEED CIRCUIT Value d5 04 d5 05 or Term 13 The figure below shows the relationship between speed speed limit torque and torque limit Reverse Regenerative Torque Limit x Torque Reference lt 05 05 gt lt 05 05 gt Speed Limit i Speed Limit Bias i Bias Speed Slope is proportional to C5 01 Forward Regenerative Torque Limit 5 97 5 44 TORQUE DETECTION Torque detection is used to compare drive rated output current with the overtorque detection level When the output current is equal to or greater than the defined level an overtorque condition exists This will be indicated as an OL3 fault on the Digital Operator This feature can be selected to operate over a wide range of conditions A 16 01 Torque Detection Selection 1 Factory setting each 0 L6 04 Torque Detection Selection 2 These parameters determine whether the torque detection function of the drive is enabled under what conditions it will detect for overtorque and what operation it will perform after detecting an overtorque Torque Operation After Detection Detection Overtorque Detection Condition 0 Disabled Enabled Continues Only at set frequenc
27. amp TROUBLESHOOTING 6 1 GENERAL A failure in the GPD 515 G5 can fall into one of two categories Alarm or Fault A blinking Alarm indication is a warning that a drive trouble condition will soon occur or that a programming error has been made The drive will continue to operate during an Alarm indication A blinking Minor Fault indication is displayed during less serious faults or when a problem exists in the external circuitry The drive will continue to operate and a Minor Fault contact will be closed if a multi function output is programmed for the condition A steady Major Fault indication is displayed when the drive s Fault relay has tripped The motor coasts to a stop and a fault signal output is present at control circuit terminals 18 20 Table 6 1 Fault Indication and Details DIGITAL OPERATOR TYPE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION DETAILS Note 1 BUS Communication Communication error while drive is set for Option Com Err Option Card error Run Command and or Frequency Reference from Serial Communication card CALL SI B communication Control data was not received when power supply Serial Com Call error was turned on A mL e initial communication Motor out of control Drive cannot determine speed of motor Out of ae Open Loop Vector Control Method A1 02 2 only Note 3 CPFOO Control circuit fault 1 Communication between Digital Operator an
28. 400 380V 415V 440V 460V Voltage Selector MULTI FUNCTION OPEN COLLECTOR OUTPUTS CAPACITY 50mA AT 48Vdc MAX 15Vdc 20mA MAX OPEN COLLECTOR CIRCUIT EARTH 10L GROUND SEE NOTE 2 SEE NOTE 5 A AC MOTOR k AC MOTOR BASIC DIAGRAM FOR 3 WIRE CONTROL Figure 1 4 230 460 or 600V Interconnections 3 Wire Control with parameters b1 01 1 b1 02 1 H1 01 24 H1 02 14 H1 03 0 H1 04 3 H1 05 4 and H1 06 6 See Figure 1 5 for Closed loop PG connections 1 23 1 4 7 Encoder Feedback If either the Flux Vector A1 02 3 or Volts Per Hertz with Encoder A1 02 1 control method is desired an encoder feedback board for the drive is required The drive can accept many types of encoder feedback Table 1 4 shows which option board is needed for each type of encoder Table 1 4 Encoder feedback option board types Option Control Electrical Input Required Signals From Encoder Board Method s Scheme ALL Quadrature _ i Dual Input PG W2 Quadrature Line A A B B Z Z optional Driver B2 ALL Quadrature A B amp Common All Except Accepts inputs from two encoders Primarily used with custom software The most common encoder used with the drive is the Quadrature Line Driver style encoder When an encoder of this type is used
29. 5 32 MULTI FUNCTION INPUT TERMINALS Term 3 8 Table 5 2 FUNCTION External fault Continued H1 01 thru H1 06 Data Settings Continued DESCRIPTION Second digit of setting is a hexadecimal value which defines what type of external contact is used and how the drive will react when the signal input is active See paragraph 5 17 AVAILABILITY 0 See Note 1 1 2 3 PID integral reset Closed Set calculated integral time value to 0 See paragraph 5 36F PID Integral Hold Hold integrator at its present level PID Control See paragraph 5 36F Closed DC injection braking command Closed DC injection braking active See paragraph 5 10 D Speed Search 1 Closed Speed Search operation from maximum frequency See Data description following this table Speed Search 2 Closed Speed Search operation from set frequency See Data description following this table Energy saving operation Closed Energy saving See paragraph 5 16 Speed Search 3 Closed Speed Search operation from output frequency See Data description following this table Kinetic energy braking ride thru NC Closed KEB ride thru is disabled Kinetic energy braking ride thru NO Closed KEB ride thru is enabled Speed torque control selection Open Speed control operation Closed Torque control operation See paragraph 5 43 Zero
30. Contact Closure Speed coincidence 2 H2 01 14 L4 03 30Hz L4 04 5Hz Output Freq or Motor Speed 35 Hz L4 03 30 Hz 25 Hz Contact Closure 5 76 5 34 PHASE LOSS DETECTION INPUT L8 05 Input Phase Loss Detection Selection Range O or 1 Factory setting 0 The input phase loss detection circuit monitors the DC bus current ripple and activates when one of the input phases is lost This causes a PF fault to occur and the motor to coast to a stop Description Input phase loss detection disabled Input phase loss detection enabled 5 35 PHASE LOSS DETECTION OUTPUT L8 07 Output Phase Loss Detection Selection Factory setting 1 Range O or 1 The output phase loss detection circuit monitors the DCCT s and activates when one of the output phases is lost This causes a LF fault to occur and the motor to coast to a stop Setting Den 0 Output phase loss detection disabled 1 Output phase loss detection enabled 5 77 5 36 PID CONTROL The Proportional Integral and Derivative control function provides closed loop control or regulation of a system process variable pressure temperature etc This regulation is accomplished by comparing a feedback signal to a setpoint reference which results in an error signal The PID control algorithm then performs calculations based upon the PID parameter settings b5 01 thru b5 14 on this error sign
31. Input Voltage 460 VAC N Write to memory by pressing N Entry Accepted ENTER briefly then Input Voltage 1 01 460 VAC Press twice then DATA g E1 03 F A ENTER User Defined V F NS Then set the drive to desired V F pattern E1 03 1 using IAN QZ 60 HZ Saturation Write to memory by pressing DATA ENTER Entry Accepted i briefly then V F Selection 60 HZ Saturation NA 2 12 2 2c continued DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY Check the motor rotation using Press then DATA Frequency Ref the JOG function MENU ENTER U1 01 0 00 HZ NOTE frequency reference for this operation comes If either or both of the SEQ and REF lights are from 41 09 andis on press factory set to 6 Hz LOCAL REMOTE WARNING THE NEXT KEY PRESS WILL CAUSE THE MOTOR TO MOVE TAKE APPRO PRIATE PRECAUTIONS Press amp hold The motor should ramp up to JOG 2 speed rotation should be T counter clockwise if the FWD light is on Rotation should be RUN light will illuminate clockwise if the REV light is on If rotation is incorrect reverse Release any two motor leads then JOG repeat the motor rotation check Proceed to section 2 5 TEST RUN USING DIGITAL OPERATOR 2 13 2 2d POWER AND PRELIMINARY CHECKS V f WITH PG FEEDBACK Ensure motor is d
32. SECTION A 230V NEW DRIVE OLD DRIVE WIRE SIZE MODEL NO MODELNO TERMINAL SYMBOL TERMINAL CIMR G5M GPD515C SCREW 20P41F A003 L1 R L2 S L3 T 61 2 B1 B2 14 10 20P71F A006 T1 U T2 V W 21P51F A008 L2 S L3 T 61 62 B1 B2 T1 U W 22P21F A011 L2 S L3 T 6 61 62 B1 B2 T1 12 10 3 5 5 5 W 23P71F A017 L1 R L2 S L3 T 61 62 B1 B2 T1 W 25P51F A025 27P51F A033 20111F A049 20151F A064 20181F A080 20221F A096 20300F A130 L1 R L2 S L3 T T1 0 T2 V T3 W 6 03 W 20370F A160 20550F A224 1 0 x 2P 3 20 10 100 x 2P 50 20750F A300 4 0 x 2P 1 20 10 Consult local electrical codes for wire sizing requirements 0 55 5 Table 1 1 Typical Wire Sizing For Main Circuit Continued Section B 460V NEW DRIVE OLD DRIVE WIRE SIZE MODEL NO MODEL NO TERMINAL SYMBOL TERMINAL CIMR G5M GPD515C SCREW 40P71F 41P51F 43P71F R L2 S 44P01F B011 L1 R L2 45P51F B014 T2 V T3 W 47P51F B021 L1 R L2 S L3 T 61 2 B1 B2 T1 U 8 14 V W 40111F B027 L2 S L3 T 1 62 B1 B2 T1 U 8 14 40151F B034 T3 W 40181F B041 2 S 6 61 62 T1 U 40221F B052 O 61 62 U 40301F 065 61 62 63 T1 U 40371F 080 91
33. b1 01 Reference Selection See below or separate Option Instruction Sheet The drive allows selection of one of twelve references Two are analog inputs nine are stored in memory and one can be from an option card either analog or digital In most configurations either the local reference d1 01 or the remote AUTO reference will be utilized NOTE The range and resolution of the d1 XX parameters is dependent on the setting of 01 03 see paragraph 5 11 5 25 A Local Remote Reference Selection b1 01 Reference Selection Data 0 Local Digital Operator frequency reference 1 Remote terminals frequency reference By programming b1 01 1 the external Auto reference input will be used If b1 01 is programmed to 0 the value in d1 01 will be used as a frequency command IMPORTANT d1 01 will change each time the operator enters a new frequency command from the Digital Operator s U1 01 XX XX prompt Another way to think of this is that when the drive is first powered up the Digital Operator displays Frequency Reference U1 01 XX XX HZ The value displayed is the current setting of d1 01 If the operator changes the display then d1 01 will also be changed 5 39 5 25 LOCAL REMOTE AND REFERENCE SELECTION Continued 5 25 B Multiple Speed Reference Configuration Multi step Speed Operation In a multiple reference configuration four modes may be selected NOTE In the descriptions of
34. i WITHIN 0 5 SEC SPEED SEARCH SPEED COINCIDENCE MAX FREQ FREQ 4 REF OR OUTPUT FREQ WHEN SPEED SEARCH IS INPUTTED OUTPUT FREQUENCY MIN SPEED SEARCH BASE OPERATION BLOCK VOLTAGE SPEED SEARCH 7 NORMAL OUTPUT OUTPUT VOLTAGE E1203 NOTE When momentary power loss ride thru function is selected L2 01 1 or 2 the Speed Search command must be enabled Speed Search Operation Timing 5 64 5 32 MULTI FUNCTION INPUT TERMINALS Term 3 8 Continued b3 01 Speed Factory setting 0 Disabled when V f control or Open Search Loop Vector control has been selected Selection 1 Enabled when V f w PG control or Flux Vector control has been selected Range 0 or 1 b3 02 Speed Search Deactivation Current Factory setting 150 Level Range Oto 200 96 b3 03 Speed Search Deceleration Time Factory setting 2 0 Range 0 0 to 10 0 sec After power recovery if the drive output current is larger than the set value of b 3 02 speed search is started using decel rate per the setting of b3 03 When drive output current is lower than the set value of b3 02 speed search is complete and acceleration or deceleration is continued at the normal rate C1 XX to set frequency L2 03 Minimum Baseblock Time Factory setting See Table A3 1 Range 0 1 to 5 0 sec When a momentary power loss is detected the drive o
35. setting Description 0 1 Drive accepts frequency command after ENTER is pressed Drive accepts frequency reference immediately 02 06 Operator Detection Selection Factory setting 1 Range Oor 1 Setting this parameter to 0 allows the drive to continue to run when the Digital Operator is disconnected from the drive Description 0 Disabled operation continues 1 Enabled motor coasts to stop and fault is displayed 02 07 Elapsed Timer Setting Factory setting 0 Range 0 or 65535 This parameter allows the user to preset a starting value for the elapsed timer Elapsed time is accumulated according to the setting of 02 08 5 45 5 26 MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS Continued o2 08 Elapsed Timer Selection Factory setting 0 Range O or 1 This parameter determines whether the timer is active whenever power is applied to the drive or whenever the drive is in run mode 0 Timer active whenever power is applied to the drive 1 Timer active whenever drive is in run mode Factory setting 0 Range 0 or 1 b1 08 Run Command Selection During Program This parameter determines if the drive will accept a run command while in the program mode The drive is in the program mode whenever the drive light is off E Disabled If is commanded while the drive is in the program mode
36. Always Detected Only During Run Ramp to Stop Coast to Stop Fast Stop Alarm Only Disabled Enabled Ramp to Stop Coast to Stop Fast Stop Alarm Only INCRE MENT Table A1 6 Drive FX XX Parameters Continued SETTING RANGE SETTING FACTORY ACCESS LEVEL para aoe Note Factory setting differs depending on the selected Control Method A1 02 see Table A3 2 2 Capability to view and set specific parameters is dependent upon the Access Level A1 01 and Control Method A1 02 0 V f 1 V f w PG 2 Open Loop Vector 3 Flux Vector the drive is programmed for Each column represents the Access Level for a given Control Method Q Quick start B Basic A Advanced not available A1 17 PARAMETER NUMBER Table A1 7 Drive HX XX Parameters FUNCTION DESCRIPTION NAME Multi function Input Terminal 3 Multi function Input Terminal 4 Multi function Input Terminal 5 Multi function Input Terminal 6 Multi function Input Terminal 7 Multi function Input Terminal 8 2 01 1 0 37 o 533 function Output Term 9 amp 10 Multi function Output Term 25 27 Multi function Output Term 26 27 0 to 10 VDC 10 VDC Auto Speed Reference Signal Level Selection Terminal 13 Auto Speed Reference Signal Gain Terminal 13 Auto Speed Reference Signal Bias Terminal 13
37. FACTORY ACCESS LEVEL papa Note 4 SETTING oo 2 Motor Rated 0 01 0 00 20 00 See Note 3 Slip Hz Motor No load 0 01 A 0 00 1500 0 See Note 3 A A Current Number of 1 2 48 4 Motor Poles pole Motor 0 001 Line to line Q Resistance Motor 0 00 0 50 Iron core Saturation Coefficient 1 Motor 0 50 0 75 Iron core Saturation Coefficient 2 Motor Mechanical Loss Torque Compensation Iron Loss 82 Control 0 V f control Method 1 V f with PG feedback Selection 2 Open loop vector Motor 2 3 Flux vector Maximum 0 1 Hz 40 0 400 0 Output Frequency Motor 2 Maximum 0 0 255 0 Voltage 230V ratings Motor 2 0 0 510 0 460V ratings 0 0 733 1 600V ratings 0 0 400 0 Base Frequency Motor 2 Mid Output Frequency Motor 2 0 0 400 0 A1 13 See Note 3 See Note 5 230 0 230V ratings 460 0 460V ratings 575 0 600V ratings See Note 1 REF Table A1 5 Drive EX XX Parameters Continued PARAMETER FUNCTION INCRE SETTING FACTORY ACCESS LEVEL pARA DESCRIPTION See Note 4 NUMBER NAME MENT RANGE SETTING y y REF Mid Output 0 1 Hz See Note 1 5 45 1 Voltage 0 0 255 0 12 6 Motor 2 230V ratings 230V ratings 0 0 510 0 25 3 460 ratings 460 ratings 0 0 733 1 36 3 600V ratings 600V ratings Min Output 0 1 Hz 0 0 400 0 See Note 1 Frequency Motor 2 Min Output 0
38. FREQ 5 20 5 15 ENCODER PG PARAMETERS A F1 01 Encoder PG Constant Factory setting 1024 Range O to 60000 ppr This parameter is set to the Pulses Per Revolution ppr to the encoder used with the motor B F1 02 Operation Selection at PG Factory setting 1 Open Circuit Range 0 Ramp to Stop 1 Coast to Stop 2 Fast stop 3 Alarm Only F1 14 PG Open Circuit Detection Factory setting 2 0 Delay Time Range 0 0 to 10 0 seconds The setting of F1 02 determines the stopping method when a PG Open Circuit PGo is detected A PG open circuit is detected when no pulses are received from the pulse generator within the time specified by F1 14 Note The PG Open fault is disabled when zero speed is commanded NOTE Only available in the V f w PG and the Flux Vector Control Methods 1 02 1 or 3 5 21 5 15 ENCODER PG PARAMETERS Continued C F1 08 Overspeed Detection Level Factory setting 115 Range 0 to 120 F1 09 Overspeed Detection Delay Time Factory setting See Table A3 2 Range 0 0 to 2 0 seconds F1 03 Operation Selection at Factory setting 1 Overspeed Range 0 Ramp to Stop 1 Coast to Stop 2 Fast stop 3 Alarm Only Parameters F1 08 and F1 09 work together to determine when an overspeed oS fault will occur Parameter F1 08 sets the desired overspeed level as a percentage of the maximum output frequency E1 04
39. and F1 09 determines how long the overspeed condition will be allowed to exist before a fault will occur Parameter F1 03 determines the stopping method when an overspeed fault oS occurs EXAMPLE A given application requires that if motor speed were to ever reach 1980 RPM an overspeed fault would occur and the motor should coast to stop The motor has 4 poles and maximum frequency E1 04 60Hz E2 04 F1 08 Desired Overspeed Level x Number of Motor Poles 400 120 x Maximum Frequency E1 04 na 1980 x 4 Z Q y F1 08 150 x gg X 100 110 F1 03 1 Coast to Stop NOTE Only available in the V f w PG and Flux Vector Control Methods A1 02 1 or 3 5 22 5 15 ENCODER PG PARAMETERS Continued D F1 10 Excessive Speed Deviation Factory setting 1 0 Detection Level Range 0 50 96 F1 11 Excessive Speed Deviation Factory setting 0 5 Detection Delay Time Range 0 0 to 10 0 seconds F1 04 Operation Selection at Factory setting 3 Speed Deviation Range 0 Ramp to Stop 1 Coast to Stop 2 Fast stop 3 Alarm Only Parameters F1 10 and F1 11 work together to determine when a Speed Deviation DEV fault will occur Parameter F1 10 determines how far the motor speed has to differ from the speed reference set as a percentage of E1 04 and F1 11 determines how long the speed has to deviate before a fault will occur Use F1 04 to determine stopping method if a spe
40. b4 02 As can be seen the timer function must be programmed as both a multi function input and an output to be effective F Data 1 Sample Hold Command This function applies only to an analog voltage or current input used as a frequency reference at terminals 13 or 14 If the Sample Hold command is present contact is closed for more than 0 1 sec the frequency reference will follow sample the analog signal e g if 5V corresponds to 50 frequency a 5V analog signal will produce 50 frequency reference if the Sample Hold command is present If the Sample Hold command is removed contact is opened while the Drive is still in Run condition the frequency reference is held at the level it was at the time the Sample Hold command was removed e g the frequency reference would remain at 50 even though the analog signal increased to 8V 5 66 5 32 MULTI FUNCTION INPUT TERMINALS Term 3 8 Continued A L_ 100 80 FREQ REF 50 lt SAMPLE Closed HOLD CMD Open ud Imex 3 011 005 0 15 sec sec sec Sample Hold Function Timing G Data 10 Up Function Data 11 Down Function d4 01 Frequency Reference Hold Factory setting 0 Function Selection Data 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Programming data 10 and 11 for two of the six multi function input terminals allows those inputs to be used for Up Down frequency setting by simulating the action of a MOP motor operated potentiom
41. 1 Ga Euljiro Joong Gu Seoul Korea Phone 82 2 776 7844 Fax 82 2 753 2639 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SINGAPORE PTE LTD Head Office 151 Lorong Chuan 04 01 New Tech Park Singapore 556741 Singapore Phone 65 282 3003 Fax 65 289 3003 TAIPEI OFFICE AND YATEC ENGINEERING CORPORATION 10F 146 Sung Chiang Road Taipei Taiwan Phone 886 2 2563 0010 Fax 886 2 2567 4677 YASKAWA JASON HK COMPANY LIMITED Rm 2909 10 Hong Kong Plaza 186 191 Connaught Road West Hong Kong Phone 852 2803 2385 Fax 852 2547 5773 BEIJING OFFICE Room No 301 Office Building of Beijing International Club 21 Jianguomanwai Avenue Beijing 100020 China Phone 86 10 6532 1850 Fax 86 10 6532 1851 SHANGHAI OFFICE 27 Hui He Road Shanghai 200437 China Phone 86 21 6553 6600 Fax 86 21 6531 4242 SHANGHAI YASKAWA TONJI M amp E CO LTD 27 Hui He Road Shanghai 200437 China Phone 86 21 6533 2828 Fax 86 21 6553 6677 BEIJING YASKAWA BEIKE AUTOMATION ENGINEERING CO LTD 30 Xue Yuan Road Haidian Beijing 100083 China Phone 86 10 6232 9943 Fax 86 10 6234 5002 SHOUGANG MOTOMAN ROBOT CO LTD 7 Yongchang North Street Beijing Economic amp Technological Development Area Beijing 100076 China Phone 86 10 6788 0551 Fax 86 10 6788 2878 YEA TAICHUNG OFFICE IN TAIWAIN B1 6F No 51 Section 2 Kung Yi Road Taichung City Taiwan R O C Phone 886 4 2320 2227 886 4 2320 2239 Document Number TM4515 Supercedes YEA TOA S616 10 11 and 10 12 04
42. 1024 Maximum speed 1750 RPM 300 000 Hz gt 1 2 x 1750 60 x 1024 300 000 Hz gt 35 840 Hz Acceptable DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY Apply input power to the drive If the display is not in English go to section 2 3 CHANGING THE LANGUAGE ON THE DIGITAL OPERATOR lt N Set the control method of the Press then Main Menu drive to Flux Vector Set MENU A Initialize 1 02 to 3 AJ d P N ress pATA then twice Control Method ENTER Open Loop Vector Z Press th i g h DATA then set drive to Flux A1 02 3 ENTER Vector using Flux Vector Write value to memory by pressing DATA ENTER Entry Accepted J briefly then Control Method Flux Vector 2 6 2 2b continued DESCRIPTION Set parameter access level to Advanced This allows all parameters to be viewed and modified KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY lt Press then Main Menu MEN A Initialize NC a P N ress DATA then Access Level ENTER JN Quick Start Ner Press DATA _ then set drive to Advanced C 1 01 4 CENTER Sine Advanced Level AJ Write value to memory by pressing DATA ENTER E P Entry Accepted briefly then Access Level Advanced Level N Z Set PG Pulses Rev to the correct value NOTE For a Yaskawa vector m
43. 3 Wire Sequence Reference The frequency reference tells the drive how fast to run the motor There are several source options for the frequency reference First the frequency reference can come from the digital operator local Simply put the motor speed can be entered into the keypad Second the frequency reference can come from an analog signal remote such as 0 to 10 Volts DC When 0 Volts is applied to the drive the drive runs at zero speed When 10V is applied to the drive it will run at full speed Apply anything in between and the drive will run at that corresponding frequency 2 5VDC 25 speed 15 Hz If the drive is commanded to run but doesn t and the RUN LED comes on and the STOP LED flashes the frequency reference is below the minimum frequency Increase the frequency reference to run the drive Local Control is when the sequence and or reference comes from the digital operator If the reference is supposed to come from the digital operator the REF LED will be off If the start stop sequence is supposed to come from the digital operator the SEQ LED will be off Remote Control is when the sequence and or reference comes from the control terminals If the reference source is supposed to come from terminals 13 or 14 the REF LED will be on If the start stop sequence is supposed to come from the terminals 2 wire or 3 wire control the SEQ LED will be on ix PARAGRAPH SUBJECT c c c c kk
44. 5 108 Cartier 5 12 Detection Output Signal 5 73 Max Output Meter Analog Monitor 5 57 Mid Output Min Output Prohibited acres Frequency Detection Multi function Output 447442 Frequency Reference 1 Frequency Reference 2 Frequency Reference 3 Frequency Reference 4 Frequency Reference ode ER 5 29 CC MU n ahua aus ma 5 29 Input Signals Auto Manual 5 32 DOG P Limit LOW 5 34 Limit DDOr scs cien inns 5 94 Loss Detection 5 33 Retention a 5 33 FWD Indicator Lamp wee 4 1 4 2 FWD REV 4 1 4 2 G Gain Analog Monitor aaa aa 5 57 Energy 5 26 Frequency Reference 5 29 Proportional 1 5 80 Torque Compensation 5 93 Zero Servo 2 5 110 1 11 H Hunting Prevention 5 35 Indicator Initial Start up Local Control Initialize Parameters Reset Codes Input and Output Power Option Devices Auxiliary
45. 5 49 STOP Indicator Lamp m STOP Key ss Function During Remote Run 5 45 Stop Method Sel OH Stopping Method Stopping Method at Comm Error MODBUS Control 5 50 Storage Function sss 2 27 Switching Frequency Accel Decel 5 5 T Temperature Ambient 1 1 A24 Storage sse A2 4 Terminals Description u a ss 1 6 1 17 Functions nssr 1 6 1 17 Screw Sizes es 1 3 Test Run Using Digital Operator Local Control 2420 2 4 44 4 2 24 INDEX Continued Thermal Overload Protection 5 90 Torque Reference Internal Monitor Item A1 27 W Motor OL Protection Selection 5 90 Trim Control aaa 5 69 Motor OL Protection Time Constant x Speed Limits Weight cttam acto entia A5 1 Motor Rated Current 5 90 Troubleshooting 6 Wiring Motor Selection 5 91 PIOWCNANS i335 conie tt 2 wire 1 10b 1 20 Torque Compensation 5 93 3 Wire Control 1 10b 1 22 5 93 U Control Circuit a Time Constant a u uu 5 93 Diagrams so tette Torque Control Command 5 95 Up Down Function
46. Control Fuse Part No 5 17 CIMR G5M GPD515C 0057 0058 0059 0061 0050 0062 0051 0504 0505 0488 0483 0484 0500 0501 20P41F 20P71F 21P51F 22P21F 23P71F 25P51F 27P51F 20111F 20151F 20181F 20221F 20300F 20370F 20550F 20750F IMPORTANT Numbers represent total quantity used in one Drive To determine adequate inventory of spare parts Yaskawa suggests using listed value for quantities 2 and below If listed value is greater than 2 factory suggests 1 3 of total listed A4 2 New Drive Old Drive Power Module Model No Part No 5P30 CIMR G5M GPD515C 40P41F Xstr Heatsink Transistor Module Part No 5P30 Assy Diode Module Part No 5 50 Part No 5P30 0162 0166 0181 0152 0153 0288 0290 0483 0484 0485 0486 0491 0492 0487 0488 0496 40P71F No Diode Module in these 41P51F Drive Model No s diodes are 43P71F contained in Power Module 44PO1F 45P51F 47P51F 40111F 40151F 40181F 40221F 40301F 40371F 40451F 40551F 40750F 41100F 41600F 41850F 42200F 43000F New Drive Model No 40P71F 41P51F 43P71F 44P01F 45P51F 47P51F 40111F 40151F 40181F 40221F
47. INCRE MENT A1 18 SETTING RANGE FACTORY SETTING 3 0 See Note 1 4 3 See Note 1 6 4 See Note 1 8 6 See Note 1 ACCESS LEVEL Note 2 PARA REF PARAMETER NUMBER Table A1 7 Drive HX XX Parameters Continued FUNCTION NAME Multi function Analog Input 1 Signal Level Selection Terminal 16 Multi function Analog Input 1 Selection Terminal 16 Multi function Analog Input 1 Gain Terminal 16 Multi function Analog Input 1 Bias Terminal 16 Multi function Analog Input 2 Signal Level Selection Terminal 14 Multi function Analog Input 2 Selection Terminal 14 Multi function Analog Input 2 Gain Terminal 14 Multi function Analog Input 2 Bias Terminal 14 Analog Input Filter Time Constant Multi function Analog Monitor 1 Selection Terminal 21 Multi function Analog Monitor 1 Gain Terminal 21 INCRE MENT DESCRIPTION 0 Oto 10 VDC 1 1 x10 VDC Oto 10 VDC 10 VDC 4 20 mA A1 19 SETTING RANGE 0 1 0 0 1000 0 0 0 1000 0 0 00 2 00 0 00 2 50 FACTORY ACCESS LEVEL para SETTING See Note 2 REF Table A1 7 Drive HX XX Parameters Continued PARAMETER FUNCTION INCRE SETTING FACTORY ACCESS LEVEL para DESCRIPTION See Note 2 NUMBER NAME MENT RANGE g 22 me Multi function Monitor 1 Bias Terminal 21 Multi function Monitor 2 Selection Termina
48. If listed value is greater than 2 factory suggests 1 3 of total listed A4 5 A4 6 Appendix 5 GPD 515 G5 DIMENSIONS Table A5 1 lists dimensions for the drive in its standard enclosure For information on other types of enclosures available consult your Yaskawa representative Table A5 1 Drive Size and Weight NEW DRIVE OLD DRIVE PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS MOUNTING HEAT LOSS MODEL MODEL NOMINAL ENCLOSURE IN DIM IN WEIGHT Watts VOLTS NO HP TYPE EB CIMR G5M GPD515C w H1 Heatsink Internal Total 20P41F 20P71F 21P51F 22P21F 23P71F 25P51F 27P51F 20111F 20151F 20181F 20221F 20300F Protected 20370F Chassis 20550F Protected 20750F Chassis 40P41F 40P71F 41P51F 43P71F 44P01F 7 5 45P51F 10 47P51F 15 40111F 20 40151F 25 40181F 30 40221F 40 NEMA 1 40301F 50 40371F 60 40451F 75 40551 100 40750 125 Protected 41100F 150 Chassis 41600F 200 amp 250 41850F 300 Protected 42200F 350 Chassis 43000F 400 amp 500 5 1 Table A5 1 Drive Size and Weight NEW DRIVE OLD DRIVE PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS MOUNTING HEAT LOSS MODEL MODEL NOMINAL ENCLOSURE IN DIM IN WEIGHT Watts VOUS No NO HP ES IIS CIMR G5M GPD515C w H1 W1 Heatsink Internal Total 51P51F NEMA 1 52P21F NEMA 1 53P71F NEMA 1 55P51F NEMA 1 57P51F NEMA 1 50111F NEMA 1 501
49. Parameter Selection Initialization Reset Codes 5 83 Parameters Factory Reset Initialize 5 03 Listing of ke Quick Reference xiv Programming 45 3 ie ac iet Related to Capacity is Related to Control Method 3 Parity Selection Ser Comm MODBUS Control 5 49 Peripheral devices AC reactor aaa Molded case circuit breaker MCCB Noise fller oce PG Open Circuit Detection Delay Time 5 21 PG Open Circuit Operation Selection at 5 21 PG Rotation se 5 24 PG SEUD a nai t teme 5 21 Phase Loss Detection MPU ua 5 77 q Samanea 5 77 Physical Installation 04440414 1 1 PID Control l l l aa aaa aaa 5 78 5 60 Feedback Amount Monitor Item A1 29 INDEX Continued Feedback Signal Selection 5 79 Integral Value 5 80 Offset s 5 80 Output Filter Lag Time 5 81 PID Limit 25 80 PID Selection a 5 78 PID Settings Derivative Time 5 80 Integral Time 5 80 Proportional Gain 5 80 Potentiometer External Speed vii Power Loss Ride thru Time 5 51 Power On and Prelimi
50. Rated slip not within tolerance Check the input data Check the motor wiring Tune Aborted Accelerate Motor did not accelerate in the specified time Increase acceleration time C1 01 Increase torque limit values L7 01 02 if they are reduced from factory settings Uncouple the motor from the load Tune Aborted PG Direction Encoder phasing opposite that of motor phasing Swap two motor leads OR Swap channels on the input to the PG X2 card on terminal block TA1 swap wires at terminals 4 amp 6 and swap wires at terminals 5 amp 7 Tune Aborted Motor Speed Torque reference exceeded 100 during auto tuning Tune Aborted Over Load J Displayed after completion of tuning Torque reference exceeded 20 during auto tuning Uncouple motor from load Increase acceleration time C1 01 Check input data especially the encoder PPR F1 01 Tune Aborted Minor Fault XXX A minor drive fault occurred Check Table 6 1 for specific minor fault indicated by XXX Tune Aborted PG Circuit PG cable wires are disconnected 6 6 Pulse generator is disconnected from the PG X2 card Terminal TA1 Check PG wiring 6 3 DISPLAYING FAULTS A Displaying Fault Conditions Whenever the fault relay trips drive shutdown the fault that caused the trip except for Illegal Constant or Control Function Hardware is en
51. and C017 thru C200 50111F thru 51600F 3 Capability to view and set specific parameters is dependent upon the Access Level 1 01 and Control Method A1 02 0 1 V f w PG 2 Open Loop Vector 3 Flux Vector the drive is programmed for Each column represents the Access Level for a given Control Method Q Quick start B Basic A Advanced not available 4 Monitor items U1 04 U1 05 and U1 07 through U1 35 can only be viewed from within the U1 Monitor Parameter function i e press down arrow key then DATA ENTER then scroll up or down to view the desired monitor item See paragraph 4 3 Digital Operator Menu Trees for more details A1 31 Table A1 11 Run Operative Parameters PARAMETER NUMBER A1 00 Language Selection 2 3 A1 01 Parameter Access Level Table A1 1 Proportional Gain Integral Time Integral Value Limit Derivative Time PID Limit Offset Output Lag Filter Time FUNCTION NAME PARA REF Acceleration Time 1 Deceleration Time 1 Acceleration Time 2 Deceleration Time 2 Accel Decel Time Setting Unit Slip Compensation Time Torque Compensation Gain ASR Proportional Gain 1 ASR Integral Time 1 ASR Proportional Gain 2 ASR Integral Time 2 Frequency Reference 1 5 23 5 25 B Frequency Reference 2 5 23 5 25 B Frequency Reference 5 23 5 25 B Frequency Reference 4 5 23 5 25 B Frequency Reference 5 5 23 5 25 Frequency Reference 6 5 23 5 25 B Frequency Refere
52. motor stops PID output is allowed to go negative motor runs in reverse 0 Detection is disabled Detection is enabled alarm only Detection is enabled fault Droop Control 0 1 0 0 100 0 0 0 m A 5 13 Level b7 02 b8 01 b8 02 b8 03 Automatic Energy saving Selection Automatic Energy saving Gain Droop Control 0 01 0 03 2 00 0 05 Delay Time sec Energy saving 1 96 100 80 A A Gain Energy saving 0 1 Hz 0 0 400 0 0 0 AJA 5 16A Frequency 0 Disabled 1 Enabled CI ITE B 0 D _ A1 4 Table A1 2 Drive bX XX Parameters Continued PARAMETER FUNCTION INCRE SETTING FACTORY ACCESS LEVEL para DESCRIPTION See Note 3 NUMBER NAME MENT RANGE e REE Automatic Energy saving Time Constant Zero Servo Completion 1 Setting range is only 0 and 1 when control method is set to Flux Vector control A1 02 3 2 Will change with control method See Appendix 3 Table A3 2 3 Capability to view and set specific parameters is dependent upon the Access Level 1 01 and Control Method A1 02 0 V f 1 V f w PG 2 Open Loop Vector 3 Flux Vector the drive is programmed for Each column represents the Access Level for a given Control Method Q Quick start B Basic A Advanced not available Table A1 3 Drive CX XX Parameters PARAMETER FUNCTION INCRE SETTING FACTORY ACCESS LEVEL para DESCRIPTION See Note 3 NUMBER NA
53. the corresponding multi function input terminal 3 thru 8 will hold the integrator s output value When the contact is closed on the Multi Function Input Terminal whatever value the integrator is outputting will remain the same until the contact is opened 5 82 5 37 RESET CODES 2 WIRE 3 WIRE INITIALIZATION A1 03 Parameter Selection Factory setting 0 Initialization Data 0 Initialization 1110 User Default Parameter Initialization 2220 2 Wire Control Initialization 3330 3 Wire Control Initialization By entering either 2220 or 3330 into this parameter a reset to factory configuration parameter initialization is accomplished The parameters which are NOT affected are A1 00 Language Selection E1 03 V f Pattern Selection A1 02 Control Method 02 04 GPD 515 Capacity Selection Factory Configuration for Parameter Terminal 2 Wire Control 3 Wire Control H1 01 3 24 External Fault 24 External Fault H1 02 4 14 Fault Reset 14 Fault Reset H1 03 5 3 Multi step Ref Select 1 0 FWD REV Command H1 04 6 4 Multi step Ref Select2 Multi step Ref Select 1 H1 05 7 6 Jog Freq Ref 4 Multi step Ref Select 2 H1 06 8 8 External Base Block 6 Jog Freq Ref N O contact CAUTION Know your application before using either Initialization function of A1 03 This parameter must be set to 0 for Drive mode operation 1110 User Defa
54. 01 2002 Software Version 01114 Data subject to change without notice
55. 04 E1 08 Mid Output Voltage A 0 0 250 0 17 2 E4 05 0 0 510 0 1 34 5 1 0 0 733 1 2 49 5 2 E1 09 Min Output Frequency 0 1 Hz 0 0 400 0 E4 06 Min Output Voltage 0 0 250 0 10 3 0 0 510 0 1 20 7 1 0 0 733 1 2 29 6 2 Overspeed Detection i 0 0 2 0 Delay Time NOTES 1 Values are for 460V ratings 2 Values are for 600V ratings A3 3 A3 4 Appendix 4 GPD 515 G5 SPARE PARTS PROCEDURE FOR INSTALLING REPLACEMENT CONTROL PCB 1 Record all parameters that have been changed from their factory settings by writing down all settings that appear under the Modified Constants menu 2 Record the Control Method Initialize menu A1 02 3 Record the drive s kVA selection 02 04 This parameter is available only when the Access Level is set to Advanced 1 01 4 4 Remove power remove the old control board and install the new control board 5 Reapply power to the drive An oPEO1 KVA Selection fault may appear if so step 7 will correct it 6 Set the Access Level to Advanced from the Initialize menu 1 01 4 7 Program the new control board for the correct drive size by setting parameter 02 04 to the value that was recorded in step 3 8 Set parameter 02 09 to American Spec to ensure that all parameters are reset to the American values when the initialization is performed in step 10 9 Set the new control board
56. 125 41100F 150 41600F 200 amp 250 41850F 300 42200F 300 amp 350 43000F 400 amp 500 NOTES 2 5 kHz is maximum carrier frequency Table A3 1 Parameters Related to GPD 515 Capacity PARAMETER NEW OLD NOMINAL OUTPUT DRIVE DRIVE E2 01 E2 02 E2 03 E2 05 E2 06 MODEL MODEL HP AMPS amp amp amp amp amp NO NO E5 01 E5 02 5 03 E505 5 06 E2 10 CIMR G5M GPD515C Amps Hz Amps ohms 26 watts 51P51F 52P21F 53P71F 55P51F 57P51F 50111F 50151F 50181F 50221F 50301F 50371F 50451F 50551F 50751F 50900F 51100F 51600F NOTES 2 5 kHz is maximum carrier frequency A3 2 Table A3 2 Parameters Related to Control Method A1 02 FACTORY SETTING PARAMETER INCRE SETTING VIF Open Loop NUMBER FUNCTION NAME MENT RANGE with PG VERTEN Flux Vector A1 02 1 A1 02 2 1 02 Speed Search Deactivation 1 0 200 Current Level b8 04 Automatic 0 1 10 0 Energy Saving Gain Automatic Energy Saving Time Constant Slip Compensation Gain 0 0 2 5 Slip Compensation Primary 0 10000 Delay Time C4 02 Torque Compensation Time 1 ms 10000 Constant C5 02 ASR Integral Time 1 yu 0 000 0 200 0 500 10 000 C5 03 ASR Proportional Gain 2 0 00 300 00 EXE EDEN 20 00 C5 04 ASR Integral Time 2 p 0 000 10 000 1 07 07 Mid Output Frequency 0 1 Hz 0 0 400 0 E4
57. 40301F 40371F 40451F 40551F 40750F 41100F 41600F 41850F 42200F 43000F IMPORTANT Numbers represent total quantity used in one Drive To determine adequate inventory of spare parts Yaskawa suggests using listed value for quantities 2 and below If listed value is greater than 2 factory suggests 1 3 of total listed A4 3 New Drive Model No 40P41F Old Drive Cooling Fan Part No 5 16 DC Bus Fuse Part No 5 17 Control Fuse Part No 5P17 0061 0060 0050 0062 0051 0064 0504 0490 0491 0492 0477 0479 0500 0503 40P71F 41P51F 43P71F 44P01F 45P51F 47P51F 40111F B027 2 40151F B034 2 40181F B041 1 1 40221F B052 1 1 065 40301 40371F 40451F 080 40551 40750 41100 41600 41850 No DC Bus Fuse in these Drive Model No s fuses are contained in Transistor Heatsink Assembly aja aj 2 2 2 2 Numbers represent total quantity used in one Drive To determine adequate inventory of spare parts Yaskawa suggests using listed value for quantities 2 and below If listed value is greater than 2 factory suggests 1 3 of total listed A4 4 New Drive Old Drive Power Module Transistor Module Diode Module Model No Model No Part No 5P30 PartNo STR__ Par
58. 62 T1 U 40451F B096 601 2 63 T1 U 5 40551F B128 L1 R L2 S L3 T T1 U T2 V T3 W 41 42 200 2200 Z2 400 2400 40750F B165 L1 R L2 S L3 T T1 U T2 V T3 W 1 0 x 2P 4 41 2 200 2200 Z2 400 2400 20 10 41100F B224 L1 R L2 S L3 T T1 U T2 V T3 W 1 0 x 2P 3 41 42 200 200 Z2 400 400 20 10 5 5 41600F B302 L1 R L2 S L3 T T1 U T2 V T3 W 100 x 2P 50 41 2 200 4200 Z2 400 2400 0 5 5 5 41850F 1 L1 L2 S L3 T 1 63 T1 U T2 V MCM650 x 2P 325 x 2P 42200F W 43000 1 0 60 41 42 200 2200 2 400 2400 20 10 Consult local electrical codes for wire sizing requirements N N 1 4 Table 1 1 Typical Wire Sizing For Main Circuit Continued Section C 600V NEW DRIVE OLD DRIVE MODEL NO MODEL NO TERMINAL SYMBOL CIMR G5M GPD515C TERMINAL SCREW WIRE SIZE AWG 51P51F C003 L1 R L2 S T 61 62 B1 B2 T1 U 52P21F C004 53P71F C006 55P51F C010 57P51F C012 50111F C017 50151F C022 50181F C027 L1 R L2 S L3 T 1 B1 B2 T1 U 50221F C032 T2 V T3 W 41 2 50301F C044 L1 R L2 S L3 T 6 61 T1 U T2 V W a 42
59. 720 0023 200 20 1 0 1 0 95 960 460V 40 41 001 0 75 1 8 20 10 0 10 0 100 2 90 0 60 38198 182 1 0 0 5 0 3 95 14 40P71F B003 1 amp 2 3 4 21 10 0 10 0 160 2 60 0 80 22459 143 1 0 0 5 0 3 95 26 41P51F B004 3 4 8 22 10 0 10 0 310 250 1 40 10100 18 3 1 0 0 5 0 3 95 53 43P71F B008 5 8 24 10 0 100 7 00 2 70 2 30 3333 193 20 0 5 0 3 95 130 44P01F B011 7 5 11 25 100 10 0 700 2 70 230 3393 193 20 0 7 0 3 95 130 45P51F B014 10 14 26 10 0 10 0 980 1 50 260 1595 182 20 0 7 0 3 95 193 47P51F B021 15 21 27 10 0 10 0 1330 1 30 400 1 152 155 20 0 7 0 3 95 263 40111F B027 20 27 28 100 100 19 9 1 70 56 0 922 196 20 0 7 0 3 95 385 40151F B034 25 34 29 10 0 10 0 265 160 76 0 550 172 20 0 7 0 3 95 440 40181F B041 30 41 2A 10 0 100 32 9 1 67 78 0 403 20 1 2 0 1 0 0 6 95 508 40221F B052 40 52 2b 8 0 80 38 6 1 70 92 0 316 285 20 1 0 0 6 95 586 40301F B065 50 65 2C 8 0 80 523 1 80 109 0 269 207 2 0 1 0 0 6 95 750 table continued on next page 1 Table A3 1 Parameters Related to GPD 515 Capacity PARAMETER NEW OLD NOMINAL OUTPUT DRIVE DRIVE C6 02 2 01 E202 203 E205 2 06 12 02 MODEL MODEL HP AMPS amp amp amp amp amp NO NO E5 01 E5 02 5 03 5 05 5 06 2 10 CIMR G5M GPD515C kHz kHz Amps Hz Amps ohms 95 sec watts 460V Continued 40371F 60 40451F 75 40551F 100 40750F
60. Closed Drive output base block is active motor is coasting Frequency reference mode Open Command by external input Closed Command by Digital Operator Run reference mode Open Closed Run by external input Run by Digital Operator Overtorque detection 1 Closed Overtorque detected Frequency reference missing Closed Frequency reference is missing Braking resistor fault Closed Braking resistor is overheating or has faulted Fault Drive fault has occurred except CPF00 CPF01 Closed Not Used Alarm minor fault Closed Alarm condition is present During fault reset Closed Drive is performing fault reset Timer output function See paragraph 5 32 E 5 71 CONDITION Speed at set frequency 2 SIGNAL LEVEL Closed Freq Ref L4 04 lt output freq lt Freq Ref L4 04 See Data description following this table 5 33 MULTI FUNCTION OUTPUT TERMINALS Term 9 amp 10 25 27 Continued Table 5 3 H2 01 thru H2 03 Data Settings Continued AVAILABILITY See Note 1 0 1 2 3 Speed coincidence 2 Closed Speed at set frequency and L4 03 L4 04 x output freq lt L4 03 L4 04 See Data description following this table Frequency detection 2 low Open Output freq gt L4 03 L4 04 Closed Output frequency lt L4 03 See Data description following this table Frequency detection 2 hig
61. E1 10 5 108 5 48 PATTERN CUSTOM Continued NOTE To establish a V f pattern with a straight line from Fmin to Fbase set FA Fmin FB 0 0 Hz and Vbase 0 0 V The settings of VA VB and Vbase are then disregarded and do not affect the V f pattern IMPORTANT The parameter settings are checked whenever power is applied to the drive or each time the ENTER key is pressed while in the Program mode A parameter set value failure OPES will occur if any part of the following relationship among E1 04 thru E1 13 is not TRUE Fmax gt FB gt Fbase gt FA gt Fmin unless FA or FB 0 0 5 109 5 49 ZERO SERVO CONTROL NOTE This function can only be used in Flux Vector control method A1 02 3 A H1 01thru H1 06 Multi function Input Data 7 2 Zero Servo Command Term 3 thru 8 for Speed control mode only By programming data 72 into one of the multi function input parameters H1 01 thru H1 06 one of the multi GPD 515 G5 function input terminals 3 thru 8 becomes a zero servo control selection input When the input terminal i e external contact is open the zero servo function is disabled and when the contact is closed the zero servo function is enabled The purpose of the zero servo function is to provide position control capability at zero speed When zero servo is enabled and the actual speed is less than the DC Injection Start Frequency 52 01 the shaft position is maintain
62. FUSING AMPS 53P71F 55P51F 57P51F 50111F 50151F 50181F 50221F 50301F 50371F 50451F 50551F 50751F 50900F 51100F 51600F 1 Molded case circuit breaker must be rated for at least 18 000 RMS symmetrical amperes interrupting capacity 2 Fuses should be of the current limiting time delay type offering protection for semi conductor devices A2 2 Table A2 1 Standard Specifications Continued SECTION C ALL drives Control Method Sine coded PWM Digital flux vector Frequency Speed Range 100 1 including at stall 1000 1 possible with PG Control Precision Digital ref 0 01 10 to 40 C 14 to 140 F Analog ref x 0 196 25 x10 C 77 x50 F Frequency Control Range 0 1 to 400 Hz Speed Control Accuracy 0 2 0 02 with PG Frequency Speed Reference Digital Operator reference 0 01 Hz 12 bits Setting Resolution 0 1 Hz 100 Hz and above Analog reference 0 03 Hz 60 Hz 11 bits Control Starting Torque 15096 1 Hz 15096 0 RPM with PG Characteristics Output Frequency Resolution 0 01 Hz Auto Speed Reference Signal 10 VDC 20K Ohms or 4 20mA 250 Ohms Accel Decel Time 0 to 6000 sec resolution 0 1 sec Accel Decel times set independently 4 steps available Torque Limit 4 types available Braking Torque Approximately 20 V F Pattern Selection 15 Standard Patterns 4 for general pur
63. HZ J Select Programming Mode Press then twice MENU A Main Menu Programming Select the Parameter Name Decel Time 1 C1 02 10 0 sec Select the Decel Time 1 parameter setting The first digit of the value to be set blinks Press DATA ENTER Decel Time 1 0010 0 sec Change reference value Change value by pressing Decel Time 1 0001 0 sec J AJ Write into memory Press DATA ENTER Entry Accepted briefly then Decel Time 1 C1 02 1 0 sec Top of Main Menu Return to Operation Press MENU Main Menu Operation Select Operation Mode changes to Drive mode Press DATA ENTER Frequency Ref U1 01 0 00 HZ 4 10 Table 4 6 Example 1B Changing a Parameter in Advanced Access DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY Frequency Ref U1 01 0 00 HZ Select Programming Mode Main Menu Programming Group C Tuning Function C1 Accel Decel lect the P ter N th d Selec rarameter Name DATA en Decel Time 1 ENTER C1 02 10 0 sec Select Tuning Parameter Group 2 Select the Accel Decel Function Select the Decel Time 1 parameter setting The first digit of the value to be set blinks Decel Time 1 0010 0 sec Es Sj Kui Sj Kui
64. MONITOR AT POWER UP SELECTION 01 02 Monitor Selection After Power up Factory setting 1 Range 1 to 4 This parameter determines which monitor display will appear on the Digital Operator when the drive is powered up The number programmed into 01 02 corresponds to the appropriate U1 XX parameter which determines monitor status 01 02 SETTING MONITOR SELECTION Frequency Reference Output Frequency Output Current Monitor parameter selected by 01 01 01 01 Monitor Selection Factory setting 6 Range 4 to 38 This setting allows the user to select an item to be displayed in the monitored parameters list The 01 01 parameter corresponds to the 01 02 setting 4 Selected Monitor For example to display DC bus voltage in the monitored parameters list set parameter 01 01 to 7 for monitor selection U1 07 5 13 DROOP b7 01 Droop Control Gain Factory setting 0 0 Range 0 0 to 100 0 When active the speed decreases or increases in proportion to load torque As the load increases the speed droops according to the percentage set in b7 01 As the load decreases the speed increases Maximum droop is reached at full load Maximum speed is based on the maximum output frequency setting E1 04 Excessive droop which results in a significant difference between the speed reference and the speed feedback may activate a Speed Deviation DEV fault The deviation detection le
65. Mode 1 thru Mode 4 the external terminal listings differ depending on whether the drive is set for 2 wire or 3 wire control For 3 wire control one of these terminals is dedicated to the FWD REV selection therefore multiple reference operation will use fewer of the memory settings and is a more limited function Depending on the control wiring configuration and the multi step mode chosen the motor can be operated at up to nine different speeds Manual Auto Speed Speed Ref ext Ref ext OR Speed OUTPUT Ref 2 SPEED i d1 02 Jog Speed 41 09 Multi step Select 1 Term 5 Multi step Select 2 Term 6 Multi step i Select 3 j Term 7 Multi step CLOSED Select 4 l Jj 4e j j j 1 L _ JOG1 8 Typical Multi step Speed Operation 5 40 5 25 LOCAL REMOTE AND REFERENCE SELECTION Continued Mode 1 Memory Data Only uses only memory locations d1 01 thrud1 09 The input commands at terminals 3 thru 8 are a combination of 1 s and O s which are received as an on or off condition at each terminal Every combination selects a specific speed reference b1 01 local remote operation frequency reference H1 03 frequency reference select 1 at terminal 5 H1 04 frequency reference select 2 at terminal 6 1 05 frequency reference select 3 at terminal 7 H1 06 JOG reference select at terminal 8 H3 05 manual reference at terminal 16 2 WIR
66. Motor Exciting Current Monitor Item Line to Line Resistance Mechanical Loss Overload Protection Selection No Load Current NLA Parameters Calculating Initial Start up 2 2 Rated Current FLA Rated Voltage Secondary Current Iq Monitor A1 28 Selection for OL Protection 5 90 Speed Monitor Item A1 27 Stopping Method Selection 5 14 5 88 Switching see Speed Search a a uu 1 2 1 25 Mounting Clearance 1 1 Dimensions u Sua ss A5 1 LOCallOn ees 1 1 A24 Multi function Analog Inputs Term 14 amp 16 sss 5 53 Multi function Input Terminals 3 8 aes 5 58 Multi function Output Terminals Term 9 amp 10 25 27 5 71 Multi step Speed Operation 5 40 N Number of PG Gear Teeth 1 5 25 Number of PG Gear Teeth 2 5 25 Off delay Timer l sss Offset PID OH Overheat Protection Alarm Level OH Stopping Method Selection On delay Timer sss Operation Method for Frequency Reference Loss Detection 5 33 Operation Mode Selection 5 38
67. REF lights on press LOCAL REMOTE The motor should ramp up to speed and rotation should be counter clockwise if the FWD light is on Rotation should be clockwise if the REV light is on If rotation is incorrect reverse any two motor leads then repeat the motor rotation check U1 01 6 00 HZ Press amp hold JOG Frequency Ref RUN light will illuminate Release JOG Run the Auto Tuning routine WARNING THE MOTOR WILL MOVE WHEN AUTO TUNING IS EXECUTED TAKE PROPER PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Motor should be discon nected from the load before executing the auto tuning routine NOTE If the motor cannot be disconnected from the load or if Auto Tuning fails motor parameters should be entered manually See section 2 4 for the procedure Enter the motor nameplate values needed to perform Auto tuning Main Menu Auto Tuning Press then 3 times MENU 2 4 2 2a continued DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR Press DATA twice ENTER Set the correct Nameplate voltage of the motor Rated Voltage Rated Voltage 400 0 VAC using AJ Z r 460 0 VAC Write the value to memory by pressing DATA ENTER Entry Accepted briefly then Rated Voltage 460 0 VAC Enter the current and the rest of the parameters following a similar procedure to that of the motor nameplate voltage When all of t
68. Tuning Running Open Loop Vector Control 24 in Flux Vector 2 9 Auto Tuning Faults amp Corrective Actions 6 6 Auxiliary Input and Output Power Option Devices 1 1 Base Block External 5 63 Base Block Time Min 5 63 Basic Programming sss 4 8 Baud Rate Ser Comm MODBUS Control 5 49 Bias Frequency Reference 5 29 Braking DC Injection Current aaa Start Frequency 5 15 5 108 Time at Start we 5 14 5 15 Time at Stop aaa 5 15 Braking Dynamic A6 1 Calculating Motor Parameters for Initial Capacity Related Parameters Carrier Frequency Lowel Elit Proportional Gain Upper Changing the Language the Digital 2 19 Checking Encoder Pulses Troubleshooting 6 29 Communication Error Stop Method at MODBUS Control A147 Conformance to European EMC 1 13 Connections Vector Control Motor Blower Motor Encoder Feedback PG Motor W
69. When the Speed Reference input is an analog signal Zero Speed mode operation over long periods of time will cause the output to drift 5 112 5 50 ZERO SPEED CONTROL Continued b1 05 0 Run at Frequency Reference E1 09 Minimum Output Frequency ineffective RUN STOP RUN STOP SPEED REFERENCE INTERNAL SPEED REF ZERO SPEED ZERO SPEED CONTROL gt gt CONTROL ACTUAL SPEED INTERNAL RUN RUN STOP b2 04 DC Injection Braking Time at Stop b1 05 1 STOP E1 09 Minimum Output Frequency effective 5 113 5 114 5 50 ZERO SPEED CONTROL Continued b1 05 2 Run at Minimum Frequency E1 09 Minimum Output Frequency effective RUN STOP RUN STOP E1 09 SPEED REFERENCE E1 09 INTERNAL SPEED REF ZERO SPEED ZERO SPEED CONTROL gt CONTROL ACTUAL SPEED INTERNAL RUN RUN STOP b2 04 DC Injection Braking Time at Stop 5 115 5 50 ZERO SPEED CONTROL Continued b1 05 3 Run at Zero RPM E1 09 Minimum Output Frequency effective RUN STOP SPEED REFERENCE INTERNAL SPEED REF RUN E1 09 STOP INTERNAL RUN RUN STOP b2 04 ZERO SPEED CONTROL ACTUAL SPEED DC Injection Braking Time at Stop 5 116 ZERO SPEED CONTROL Section 6 FAULT INDICATION
70. amp 22 or 23 amp GPD 515 G5 METER 22 proportional to the value of the U1 XX 1MA FULL SCALE parameter identified by the setting of H4 01 or MULTI H4 04 See Appendix 1 for listing of U1 XX i FUNCTION parameters MONITOR OUTPUT 1 Factory setting monitor output 1 H4 01 2 U1 02 Output Frequency Analog MULTI 10V Fmax Monitor 2 FUNCTION 10 VDC MONITOR Factory setting monitor output 2 output OUTPUT 2 H4 04 3 U1 03 Drive output current 5V continuous rated current NOTE This output is suitable for metering but SHOULD NOT be used for external control circuits To produce an output signal for use by external control circuits an Analog Monitor option card AO 08 or AO 12 must be installed in the drive H4 02 Multi function Analog Monitor 1 Gain Factory Setting 1 00 H4 05 Multi function Analog Monitor 2 Gain Factory Setting 0 50 Range each 0 00 to 2 50 The settings of these parameters in increments of 0 01 are used to calibrate the output at terminals 21 amp 22 or 23 amp 22 H4 03 Multi function Analog Monitor 1 Bias Factory Setting each 0 0 H4 06 Multi function Analog Monitor 2 Bias Range each 210 0 to 10 0 96 The settings of these parameters in increments of 0 1 are used to calibrate the output at terminals 21 amp 22 or 23 amp 22 H4 07 Multi function Analog Monitor Signal Factory Setting 0 Level Selection Range
71. be used for this purpose These parameters are factory set for optimum results for most applications and generally don t need to be changed 5 81 5 36 PID CONTROL Continued E Feedback Loss Detection Factory setting 0 b5 12 Feedback Loss Detection Selection Range 0 to 2 Setting Description 0 Feedback loss detection is disabled 1 Feedback loss detection is enabled alarm only drive continues running 2 Feedback loss detection is enabled fault drive coasts to stop b5 13 Feedback Loss Detection Level PID Factory setting 0 Range O to 100 b5 14 Feedback Loss Detection Factory setting 1 0 Delay Time PID Range 0 0 to 25 5 When feedback loss detection is enabled b5 12 data 1 or 2 the drive will detect if the feedback signal falls below the b 5 13 level for more than the b5 14 delay time and respond according to the setting of b5 12 F Multi Function Input Terminals H1 01 thru H1 06 Multi function Inputs Data 3 0 PID Integral Reset Term 3 thru 8 By programming data 30 into one of the multi function parameters H1 01 thru H1 0 6 the corresponding multi function input terminal 3 thru 8 will reset the integrator s value to zero H1 01 thru H1 06 Multi function Inputs Data 3 1 PID Integral Hold Term 3 thru 8 By programming data 31 into one of the multi function parameters H1 01 thru H1 0 6
72. below This function allows the user to select an exclusive list of parameters providing a customized access level When the Access Level A1 01 is set to Advanced the Function A2 User Constants option will appear in the top level of the menu The parameters desired for custom access are entered into A2 XX parameters After any parameters have been programmed the User Program option appears in the choice of Access Levels Choosing this option will allow only those parameters programmed in A2 XX to be accessed in Programming Up to 32 parameters may be programmed To add parameters to or delete parameters from A2 XX change the Access Level back to Advanced 02 03 User Parameter Default Value Factory setting 0 Range O to 2 Sin Demon O Disabled Set Default Clears all This parameter is used to store settings as initialization values Set all parameters to the user defined default values then set 02 03 to 1 each changed parameter value is then accepted and stored as its initialization value Up to 50 parameters may have data stored as their new user defined initialization value User Initialize becomes available in the Initialize Parameter option A1 03 Setting this parameter to 1110 resets all settings to the user defined defaults rather than to factory defaults 5 47 V f PATTERN STANDARD E1 03 V f Pattern Selection This parameter is factory preset to F Table 5
73. changed from the factory settings are set read A Function is a sub menu containing many parameters Use the DATA ENTER key to access these parameters This parameter is user selectable according to the setting of 01 01 Not available for all Control Methods Use the AJ and keys to scroll through the Functions and Parameters Display Function 1 or Parameter Frequency Reference Parameter Output Frequency Parameter U1 03 Output Current Parameter Output Voltage 2 Parameter Fault Trace Function Fault History Function Monitor Function A1 00 Select Language Parameter A1 01 Access Level Parameter A1 02 Control Method Parameter A1 03 Init Parameters Parameter A1 04 Enter Password Parameter b1 Sequence Function b2 DC Braking Function C1 Accel Decel Function Motor Slip Comp 9 Function C4 Torque Comp 3 Function C5 ASR Tuning 9 Function C6 Carrier Freq Function di Preset Reference Function d2 Reference Limits Function d3 Jump Frequencies Function E1 V F Patern Function E2 Motor Setup Function H1 Digital Inputs Function H2 Digital Outputs Function H3 Analog Inputs Function H4 Analog Outputs Function L1 Motor Overload Function L2 PwrLoss Ridethru Function L3 Stall Prevention Function L4 Ref Detection Function L5 Fault Reset Function L6 Torque Detection Function L7 Torque Limit 3 Function L8 Hdwe Protection Function o
74. drive light is off it will not run Enabled If a run is commanded while the drive is in the program mode drive light off it will operate normally 5 27 MISCELLANEOUS PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS L8 01 Internal Dynamic Braking Heatsink Factory setting 0 Resistor Protection Range 0 or 1 Set this parameter to 1 only if a heatsink mount resistor will be used with the drive Set 18 01 to 0 if not using Dynamic Braking or if using a remote DB resistor Setting Description 1 Provided L8 02 OH Overheat Protection Factory setting See Table A3 1 Alarm Level Range 50 to 130 C This parameter sets the temperature at which the heatsink thermostat will indicate an overtemperature condition The corresponding action the drive will take is dependent upon the setting of L8 03 see below L8 03 Operation Selection After OH Factory setting 3 Overheat Pre alarm Range 0 to 3 Setting Description Ramp to Stop using C1 02 Coast to Stop base block Fast stop using C1 09 Alarm Only operation continues 5 46 5 27 MISCELLANEOUS PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS Continued L8 10 Output Ground Fault Detection Selection Factory setting 1 Range Oor 1 Setting Description 0 Disabled The drive will not detect a ground fault condition 1 L8 17 IGBT Protection Selection at Low Frequency
75. each 0 0 to 400 0 Hz H3 01 Auto Speed Reference Signal Factory setting 0 Level Selection Term 13 Range 0 or 1 H3 04 Multi Function Analog Input 1 Factory setting 0 Level Selection Term 16 Range 0 or 1 H3 05 Multi Function Analog Input 1 Factory setting 0 Selection Term 16 Range 0 to 1F H3 08 Multi Function Analog Input 2 Factory setting 2 Level Selection Term 14 Range 0 to 2 H3 09 Multi Function Analog Input 2 Factory setting 1F Selection Term 14 Range to The PID setpoint can come from the frequency reference terminal 13 for 0 10 VDC or the multi step speed parameters d1 01 thru d1 09 or a Multi Function Analog Input PID Setpoint examples External Terminal 13 Set b1 01 to data 1 or Multi step speed parameters Set b1 01 to data O See Multi step Speed Setting paragraph 5 25B or External Terminal 16 Set H3 05 to data C or e External Terminal 14 Set H3 09 to data C C Feedback Signal Selection H3 05 Multi function Analog Input 1 Factory setting 0 Selection Term 16 Range 0 to 1F H3 09 Multi function Analog Input 2 Factory setting 1F Selection Term 14 Range 0 to 1F Select the PID control Feedback Signal from external terminal 14 for a current signal 4 20mA DC or from terminal 16 for a voltage 0 10 VDC or 10 to 10 VDC PID Feedback examples e C
76. fan has failed A multi function input H1 01 to H1 06 is programmed for OH2 Alarm Signal data B and the corresponding input terminal is closed Protects the motor Motor thermal overload protection has tripped L1 02 has been exceeded initial value 15096 for 60 sec Note 3 Table 6 1 Fault Indication and Details Continued DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY Inv Overloaded OL3 Overtorque Det 1 OL4 Overtorque Det 2 OPE01 kVA Selection OPE03 Terminal OPE05 Sequence Select OPE06 PG Opt Missing OPE07 Analog Selection OPE08 Terminal OPE10 V F Ptrn Setting OPE11 CarrFrq ON Delay OPR Oper Disconnect C 7 0 Sp DESCRIPTION Drive overload Overtorque detect 1 Overtorque detect 2 Drive capacity selection fault Parameter set out of range Multi function input setting fault Option card selection error PG X2 card not installed Multi function analog input selection error Selection Parameter error V f data setting fault Carrier frequency parameter s set out of range Operator disconnected TYPE DETAILS Note 1 Protects the drive Drive overload protection has tripped Output current exceeds Overtorque Detection Level 1 L6 02 Output current exceeds Overtorque Detection Level 2 L6 05 02 04 has been changed from the correct factory setting value Refer t
77. in the V f w PG Control Method A1 02 1 5 24 5 15 ENCODER PG PARAMETERS Continued G F1 12 Number of PG Gear Teeth 1 Factory setting 0 Range O to 1000 F1 13 Number of PG Gear Teeth 2 Factory setting 0 Range O to 1000 Parameters F1 12 and F1 13 are used to set the gear ration when there is a gear ratio between the motor and the pulse generator This function is disabled when F1 12 and F1 13 are set to 0 F1 13 _ PG Gear Teeth 2 Motor Speed RPM Load Speed RPM x PG Gear Teeth 1 1 12 EXAMPLE A motor is connected to a load through a toothed timing belt The sheave on the motor has 23 teeth and the sheave on the load had 75 teeth The only mechanically practical place to mount a pulse generator for speed feed back is on the same shaft as the load sheave In order to correctly scale the encoder feedback F1 12 needs to be set to 23 and F1 13 needs to be set to 7 5 Pulse Generator 75 Teeth To GPD515 G5 Pulse Generator Input To GPD515 G5 T1 T2 amp T3 NOTE Only available in the V f w PG Control Method A1 02 1 5 25 5 16 ENERGY SAVING OPERATION A Energy Saving V f Control Methods Factory setting 0 Range O to 100 b8 01 Energy Saving Gain This parameter is only available in the V f or V f w PG Control Methods A1 02 0 or 1 This parameter sets in increments of 1 the level to which the output voltage is
78. operation is enabled Usete JAY J and J keys to Drive status is displayed scroll through the Functions and Parameters Output Frequency Parameter Output Current Parameter Output Voltage 2 Parameter Fault Trace Function Fault History Function Monitor Function Parameter Initialize A1 01 Access Level Parameter LCD language display is selected A1 02 Control Method Parameter Parameter access levels control method selection and initialize A1 03 Init Parameters Parameter passwords are set J A1 04 Enter Password Parameter DATA Programming b1 02 Run Source Parameter Parameters are set read Items to be b1 03 Stopping Method Parameter set read vary depending on the access level setting C1 01 Accel Time 1 Parameter C1 02 DecelTime 1 Parameter d1 01 Reference 1 Parameter Auto tuning d1 03 Reference 3 Parameter Motor parameters are automatically set by entering d1 04 Reference 4 Parameter tuning data motor nameplate values when using Open 91 09 Reference Loop Flux Vector control method A1 02 2 or 3 E1 01 Input Voltage Parameter A J E1 02 Motor Selection Parameter E ion 9 Modified Constants E1 03 V F Selection Parameter Modified Parameters E1 04 Max Frequency Parameter Only parameters that have been E1 05 Max Voltage Parameter changed from the factory settings are
79. or an analog input Term 13 or 14 Sening Speed Limit Source Programming Required Analog Input Reference source needs to be set for terminals b1 01 1 Term 13 or 14 AND the drive needs to be set for Remote reference REF light on the Digital Operator needs to be on and d5 03 Speed Limit Selection must be set to Analog Input Programmed d5 04 is set as a percentage of the maximum frequency Value NOTE this value can be set to a negative value by pressing d5 04 the up arrow or down arrow keys while the left most zero is flashing on the Digital Operator display and d5 03 Speed Limit Selection must be set to Program Setting D Torque compensation can be utilized by programming terminal 14 for Torque Compensation H3 09 14 The analog voltage present on terminal 14 will determine torque compensation value E d5 02 Torque Reference Delay Time Factory setting 0 Range 0 to 1000 ms This function is used to avoid excessive changes in torque which may be caused by abnormal resonance when the torque reference changes rapidly TORQUE REF TORQUE from Term 16 REF F d5 05 Speed Limit Bias Factory setting 1 0 Range O to 120 Sets bias value for speed limit torque control mode only as a percentage of maximum frequency 5 96 5 43 TORQUE CONTROL COMMAND Continued G Simplified block diagram
80. pressed 3 Power is removed from the Drive 5 7 5 5 AUTO RESTART Continued B L5 02 Fault Contact Status During Auto Restart Factory setting 0 Range Oor 1 This digit controls how the fault contact responds to a drive fault during the auto restart operation 0 Fault contact will not actuate during auto restart attempts Fault contact actuates during auto restart attempts FAULT DETECTION 15 01 1 FAULT CONTACT OUTPUT FREQUENCY Time from fault detection to reset attempt or time between reset attempts 7C AUTOMATIC FAULT RESET x MOTOR RPM Auto Restart Operation Timing 5 6 AUTOMATIC FREQUENCY REGULATOR AFR GAIN C8 08 AFR Gain Factory setting 1 00 Range 0 00 to 10 00 C8 09 Time Factory setting 5 0 Range O to 1000 msec Useable only in Open Loop Vector Control Method A1 02 2 these parameters affect the speed response or prevent the motor from hunting To improve the speed response increase C8 08 and or decrease C8 09 To stop the motor from hunting decrease C8 08 and or increase C8 09 5 7 AUTOMATIC SPEED REGULATOR ASR A C5 01 ASR Proportional Gain 1 Factory setting 20 00 ASRP1 Range 0 00 to 300 00 C5 02 ASR Integral Time 1 Factory setting 0 500 ASRI1 Range 0 000 to 10 000 seconds Parameters C5 01 and C5 02 provide adjustments to enable the optimum performance during load
81. shielded cable in a manner that allows it to act as an unbroken shield from the drive panel to the motor casing RF noise filter different from RFI filter part no 05P00325 0023 is a delta wye capacitor network which is wired in parallel with the drive input terminals On the smaller drives with die cast chassis it must be mounted externally On the larger drives with sheet metal chassis it may be mounted inside the area where the input power wiring enters the drive On units equipped with bypass it may be wired to the primary side of the circuit breaker and mounted to the bypass panel or sidewall Connection points Drive Terminals L1 L2 L3 Input Power Output Power T1 T2 T3 PANEL GROUND SEE NOTE 2 RF NOISE FILTER SEE NOTE 5 lt I SEENOTE3 PANEL GROUND SEE NOTE 2 DC REACTOR SEE NOTE 6 OUTPUT PANEL GROUND SEE NOTE 1 OUTPUT RFI FILTER OUTPUT REACTOR A C MOTOR Figure 1 2 Customer Connection Diagram For Isolation Transformers Input Reactors Input RFI Filters DC Reactors Output Reactors and Output RFI Fllters 1 12 1 4 3a Conformance to European EMC Directive In order to conform to EMC standards the following methods are required for line filter application cable shielding and drive installation The following explains the outline of the methods The line filter and the drive must be mounted on the same meta
82. terminal 14 input level program 08 Terminal 14 Input Level Oto 10 V 10 to 10 V 4 to 20 mA IMPORTANT In addition to setting parameter H3 08 O or 1 for a voltage input jumper J1 on the drive s Control PCB must be cut Examples of wiring the drive for frequency references from various sources are shown on the next page NOTE If parameter H3 09 1F terminals 13 and 14 are added and used as the internal frequency reference 5 31 5 19 FREQUENCY REFERENCE INPUT SIGNALS AUTO MANUAL Continued A Speed pot or 0 10VDC signal only B 4 20mA signal only GPD515 G5 15V GPD515 G5 15V AUTO REF L AUTO REF 4 20mA DC FROMA 0 10VDC OV MANUAL Oe 0 10VDC For a bidirectional speed pot set H3 04 1 and connect the low side to terminal 33 instead of terminal 17 D 4 20mA DC signal auto and 0 10VDC signal or speed pot manual GPD515 G5 15V AUTO MAN MANUAL REF COM MANUAL 0 10VDC 4 20mA DC For a 10 to 10V input instead of 0 10V at terminal 13 set 01 1 AUTO REF 5 32 5 20 FREQUENCY REFERENCE LOSS DETECTION L4 05 Frequency Reference Loss Detection Factory setting 0 disabled Range O or 1 The reference loss detection function is either enabled or disabled based on the setting of L4 05 When enabled data 1 the reference loss detection compares the change in reference with res
83. to 1F terminals 13 and 14 are added for the internal frequency reference If the Dynamic Braking DB option is used wire per Appendix 6 instructions An optional DC reactor may be added for harmonic attenuation if needed see separate instruction sheet for wiring If application does not allow reverse operation 51 04 Reverse Run Prohibit should be set to 1 Reverse Run Disabled and the Reverse Run Stop input can be eliminated If supplying the drive with DC voltage instead of AC remove jumpers from terminals 1 2 and connect a separate 10 AC supply to 1 and 2 instead Use 1 R and 2 S for single phase input Note that for drives up through GPD515C A064 B034 C032 CIMR G5M20151F 40151F and 50221F must be derated by 50 Consult factory for derating of larger drives 1 20 10 POWER SUPPLY SEE NOTE 11 3 POWER SUPPLY SEE NAMEPLATE DATA L3 sd 1CB GPD515C A080 CIMR G5M20151F AND ABOVE GPD515C B041 CIMR G5M40151F AND ABOVE GPD515C C027 CIMR G5M50221F AND ABOVE SEE NOTE 10 0 VOLTS v FWD TOR RUN STOP oO Le 2KQ n Rey 155 p SEE 20mA MAX S 0 0 2 RUN STOP ES MAN SPEED COOLING ii MAN REF IN 2597 POWER ea 0 TO 10Vdc EXT FAULT E 2K 2 5KQ Teen GPD 515 05 dil EXT FAULT RESET 8 NOTE 3 AUTO DRIVE FWD REV REMOTE 0 SEQ REF MULTI STEP 3 FREQ S
84. u tnnt A5 1 Diode and IGBT Transistor Module Resistance 6 27 Displaying Faults ss 6 7 Down Arrow Key 4 1 4 3 DRIVE Indicator Lamp 4 1 4 2 5 19 Dwell 5 20 Dynamic Braking A6 1 Dynamic Braking Resistor Protection Internal 5 46 Elapsed Operation Time Monitor Item 1 28 Elapsed Timer SelBctiori ioter rents 5 46 Sell Q ciet 5 45 Encoder PG Constant 2 1 2 15 5 21 Encoder PG Parameters 5 21 Energy Saving Operation 5 27 os ve 5 27 EncloSUIG iun a ead dcm i bs A5 1 Environment see 1 1 A2 3 ESC Key a u 4 1 4 4 European Directive Conformance to a 1 13 Excessive Speed Deviation Detection Delay Time 5 23 Detection Level 5 23 External Fault Inputs 1 2207 44 5 28 F Fast Stop Decel Time 5 3 5 4 Fault Contact Status During Auto 5 8 Fault Indication amp Troubleshooting 6 1 Faults amp Corrective Action Auto Tuning 6 6 FLA Motor s 2 20 5 90 Flash ID No Monitor Item A1 28 Frequency D
85. values set in H5 01 thru H5 03 and enable the new settings it is necessary to turn OFF power to the Drive then turn it ON again H5 05 Serial Communication Error CE Factory setting 1 Range 0 or 1 Detection This parameter determines whether or not the drive will detect a CE condition The corresponding action the drive will take is dependent upon the setting of H5 04 Setting Description 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 5 49 5 28 MODBUS CONTROL Continued 5 04 Stopping Method After Serial Factory setting 3 Communication Error CE Range 0 to 3 Ramp to Stop using C1 02 Coast to Stop base block Fast stop using C1 09 Alarm Only operation continues 5 29 MOMENTARY POWER LOSS RIDE THRU L2 01 Momentary Power Loss Ride thru 0 Disabled Factory setting Protection 1 Enabled 2 sec power loss ride thru 2 Enabled indefinite power loss ride thru provided control power is maintained The setting of this parameter either enables or disables the ride thru feature of the drive If disabled the unit will stop immediately whenever a power loss occurs If enabled the drive will continue to operate during a momentary power loss of up to 80 but if the loss exceeds the identified time period the drive will stop L2 02 Power Loss Ride Thru Factory setting See Table 1 Deactivation Time Range 0 0 to 2 0 seconds I
86. 0 which establishes a deadband of 1 0 Hz EXAMPLE Vibration encountered between 30 0 and 36 0 Hz SOLUTION Set d3 01 33 0 This is the center of the problem frequency band Set 43 04 3 0 This will cause the drive to reject all frequency command values between 30 0 and 36 0 Hz A frequency command in the deadband will be converted to the bottom value of the deadband e g a command of 33 Hz would result in a run frequency of 30 Hz Total Deadband 6 0 Hz FREQ CMD 36 Hz d3 01 33 Hz d3 04 3 0 Hz 30 Hz OUTPUT FREQUENCY Hz 5 10 DC INJECTION BRAKING A b1 03 Motor Stopping Method Selection Factory setting 0 Range 0 to 3 b2 04 DC Injection Time at Stop Factory setting 0 50 Range 0 00 to 10 00 seconds When full range DC injection braking stop is enabled b1 03 2 DC injection braking is used to stop a motor more quickly than normal coast to stop without the need for braking resistors When a STOP command is issued there is a 0 5 second time delay to apply DC to two phases of the motor s stator winding Then DC injection current is applied The duration of DC braking is a time period proportional to b2 04 at 10 output frequency and the level of output frequency at the time the STOP command is issued Braking torque is 50 70 of full load motor torque EXAMPLE b2 04 0 5 sec at 10 output Braking time at Fmax 100 output frequency 10 x 0 5 5 seco
87. 05 1 47 HZ A 2 8 2 2b continued DESCRIPTION Check the motor rotation using the JOG function NOTE The frequency reference for this operation comes from 41 09 and is factory set to 6 Hz WARNING THE NEXT KEY PRESS WILL CAUSE THE MOTOR TO MOVE TAKE APPRO PRIATE PRECAUTIONS KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY Press then DATA Frequency Ref ENTER U1 01 0 00 HZ If either or both of the SEQ and REF lights are on press LOCAL REMOTE The motor should ramp up to speed and rotation should be counter clockwise if the FWD light is on Rotation should be clockwise if the REV light is on If the motor does not accelerate smoothly or oscillates reverse any two motor leads then repeat the motor rotation check Press amp hold ve Frequency Ref U1 01 6 00 HZ RUN light will illuminate Release JOG Run the Auto Tuning routine WARNING THE MOTOR WILL MOVE WHEN AUTO TUNING IS EXECUTED TAKE PROPER PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Motor should be discon nected from the load before executing the auto tuning routine NOTE If the motor cannot be disconnected from the load or if Auto Tuning fails motor parameters should be entered manually See section 2 4 for the procedure Enter the motor nameplate values needed to perform Auto tuning Press then 3 times Main Menu MENU A Auto Tuning 2 2b continued DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUEN
88. 05 08 amp 09 See paragraphs 5 19 amp 5 30 Function labels and signal levels shown for these terminals are determined by factory settings of parameters H4 01 amp H4 04 See paragraph 5 31 If only a remote Manual Speed pot 1RH is used 3SS is not needed in that case a jumper must be added between terminals 5 and 11 This jumper will override both the Auto and Digital Operator frequency references regardless of the programming of parameter b1 01 If you are using a remote speed command or the Digital Operator DO NOT install this jumper See paragraph 5 19 The Drive Electronic Thermal Overload function parameters L1 01 L1 02 meets standards set by UL and cUL for motor thermal overload protection If local code requires separate mechanical overload protection an overload relay should be installed interlocked with the drive as shown It should be the manual reset type to prevent automatic restart following a motor fault and subsequent contact reclosure after cool down Insulated twisted shielded wire is required 2 conductor 18 GA Belden 8760 or equivalent 3 conductor 18 GA Belden 8770 of equivalent Connect shield ONLY AT DRIVE END Stub and isolate other end Digital Operator is standard on every drive Remote operators as shown may not be required Customer to connect terminal to earth ground 100 Q or less 230V 10 Q or less 460V and 600V Wire only one of the inputs as an Auto Reference If H3 09 is set
89. 07 80 7 5 350x 180 x90 40301F B065 0108 100 13 8 420x 200 x 130 40371F 080 0109 150 13 8 480 200 x 160 40451F B096 0110 160 25 480 200 x 160 40551F B128 0111 180 25 480x 200 x 160 40750F B165 41100F B224 0112 300 25 480 x 200 x 160 41600F B302 0113 400 45 588 x 250 x 200 41850F B340 0119 500 42200F B450 0120 600 Consult Factory 43000F B605 0121 900 1 1mm 0 0394 inches 2 D is the distance the filter will extend outward from the surface of the metal plate 1 13 L1 L2 L3 PE Ground Bonds remove any paint M Lamm L1 1213 T1 T2 Cable Length max 40cm 7790900000 Metal Plate Motor Cable max 20m Ground Bonds remove any paint Figure 1 2A Installation of Line Filter and GPD 515 G5 1 14 1 4 4 Control Circuit All basic control circuit signal interconnections are shown in the appropriate diagram nterconnections for external two wire control in combination with the Digital Operator are shown in Figure 1 3 nterconnections for external three wire control in combination with the Digital Operator are shown in Figure 1 4 Make wire connections according to Figures 1 3 1 4 and Table 1 3 observe the following Signal Leads Terminals 1 8 amp 11 12 17 amp 33 and 21 27 Control Leads Terminals 9 amp 10 and 18 20 e Use twisted shielded or twisted pair shielded wire 20 16 AWG 0 5 1 25 2 for control and signal ci
90. 1 02 or for the minimum base block time L2 03 whichever is longer Output Frequency Decel Time 1 lt C1 02 Coasting Accel Time 1 C1 01 Run Command ON ON OFF ON xn N 1 Run Command ignored 5 89 5 41 THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION E2 01 Motor Rated Current Factory setting See Table 1 Range 0 01 to 1500 0 A This parameter should be set according to the rated current value shown on the motor nameplate this value must be within 10 120 percent of the drive rated current refer to Specifications in Appendices 2 amp 3 of this manual L1 01 Motor Overload Protection Selection Factory setting 1 Setting Electronic Thermal Characteristics Electronic thermal overload protection disabled Electronic thermal overload protection enabled L1 02 Motor Overload Protection Time Factory setting 8 0 Constant Range 0 1 to 20 0 min This parameter sets the electronic thermal overload relay protection time Actual overload time can be calculated using the time from the overload characteristics curves then multiplying that time by L1 02 8 The drive protects against motor overload with a UL recognized built in electronic thermal overload relay The electronic thermal overload function monitors motor temperature based on drive output current and time to protect the motor from overheating When the electronic th
91. 1 06 Base Frequency Parameter E1 07 Mid Frequency A 9 Parameter E1 08 Mid Voltage A 3 Parameter E1 09 Min Frequency Parameter A Function is a sub menu containing many parameters E1 10 Min Voltage 9 Parameter Use the DATA ENTER key to access these parameters E1 13 Base Voltage 3 Parameter This parameter is user selectable according to the E2 01 Motor Rated FLA Parameter setting of 01 01 ip 9 Not available for all Control E2 02 Motor Rated Parameter Methods E2 03 No Load Current 3 Parameter E2 04 Number of Poles 3 Parameter 4 3 DIGITAL OPERATOR MENU TREES B Basic Access Level Continued The flowchart tree below illustrates the process of accessing drive parameters when the Access Level is set to Basic A1 01 MENU J 3 NEN NNNM Drive operation is enabled Drive status is displayed DATA ENTER A A Initialize DATA ENTER Initialize LCD language display is selected Parameter access levels control method selection and initialize passwords are set DATA Programming CENTER Programming Parameters are set read Items to be set read vary depending on the access level setting Auto tuning Motor parameters are automatically set by entering tuning data motor nameplate values when using Open Loop or Flux Vector control method A1 02 2 or 3 Modified Constants Modified Parameters Only parameters that have been
92. 1 30Hz 14 02 5 2 Output Freq or Motor Speed 35 Hz L4 01 30 Hz L4 01 30 Hz SoZ i m i a SS P eS Contact Closure Frequency detection 1 high 2 01 5 L4 01 30Hz L4 02 5Hz I Output Freq or Motor Speed 14 01 30 Hz 25 Hz 25 Hz 14 01 30 Hz Contact Closure Frequency detection 2 low 2 01 15 L4 03 30Hz L4 04 5Hz Output Freq or Motor Speed 35 Hz L4 03 30 Hz Contact Closure 5 74 5 33 MULTI FUNCTION OUTPUT TERMINALS Term 9 amp 10 25 27 Continued Frequency detection 2 high 2 01 16 L4 03 30Hz L4 04 5Hz Output Freq or Motor Speed L4 03 30 Hz 25 Hz Contact Closure Speed at set frequency 1 2 01 2 L4 02 10Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz Speed Reference Output Freq or Motor Speed B0HZz h E GO Ze m Closure Speed at set frequency 2 H2 01 13 L4 04 10Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz Speed Reference Output Freq or Motor Speed 50 Hz 60 Hz Contact Closure 5 5 5 33 MULTI FUNCTION OUTPUT TERMINALS Term 9 amp 10 25 27 Continued Speed coincidence 1 H2 0123 L4 01 30Hz 14 02 5 2 Output Freq or Motor Speed 35 Hz L4 01 30 Hz 25 Hz 25 Hz L4 01 30 Hz ES L4 02 E E
93. 1 Monitor Select Function o2 Key Selection Function 4 3 DIGITAL OPERATOR MENU TREES Continued C Advanced Access Level The flowchart tree below illustrates the process of accessing drive parameters when the Access Level is set to Advanced A1 01 4 DATA Lose HER Drive operation is enabled Drive status is displayed DATA H Initialize Use the AJ and keys to scroll through the Functions and Parameters LCD language display is selected Parameter access levels control method selection and initialize passwords are set Programming DATA ENTER m Application Programming Application Parameters are set read Items to be set read vary depending on the access level setting DATA ENTER Auto tuning ni Auto tuning Motor parameters are automatically set by entering tuning data motor nameplate values when using Open Loop or Flux Vector control method A1 02 2 or 3 Tuning DATA ENTER Modified Constants Modified Parameters Only parameters that have been changed from the factory settings are set read d Reference DATA ENTER A Function is a sub menu containing many parameters Use the DATA ENTER key to access these parameters This parameter is user selectable according to the setting of 01 01 Not available for all Control Methods Function 1 or Parameter U1 01 Frequ
94. 1 V See Note 1 0 0 255 0 2 3 230V ratings 230V ratings 0 0 510 0 4 6 460V ratings 460V ratings 0 0 733 1 6 5 600V ratings 600V ratings See 0 00 1500 0 See Note 3 5 45 1 Note 2 See Note 3 0 01 0 00 20 00 See Note 3 5 45 1 Hz See 0 00 1500 0 See Note 3 5 45 1 Note 2 2 2 48 4 5 45 1 poles 0 001 See Note 3 0 1 See Note 3 Voltage Motor 2 Rated Current Motor 2 No load Current Motor 2 gt Number of Motor Poles Motor 2 Line to line Resistance Motor 2 Leakage Inductance Motor 2 NOTES 1 Factory setting differs depending on the selected Control Method A1 02 2 Setting increment is 0 01A for models GPD515C A003 thru A033 CIMR G5M20P41F thru 27P51F B001 thru 021 40P41F thru 47P51F and C003 thru C012 51P51F thru 57P51F Setting increment is 0 1A for models GPD515C A049 thru A300 CIMR G5M20111F thru 20750F B001 thru B011 40111F thru 43000F and 017 thru C200 50111F thru 51600F 3 Factory setting differs depending on drive capacity 4 Capability to view and set specific parameters is dependent upon the Access Level 1 01 and Control Method A1 02 0 V f 1 V f w PG 2 Open Loop Vector 3 Flux Vector the drive is programmed for Each column represents the Access Level for a given Control Method Q Quick start B Basic A Advanced not available 5 Settings of
95. 2 2 CONTROL METHOD SELECTION Determine the proper control method for the application using Figure 2 2 NOTE For a more complete determination of control method consult factory START Is the load Variable Torque Pump or Fan YES Vector Control V F Control Speed Regulation Better than 3 High Starting Torque and or Zero Speed Control NO YES PG Encoder PG Encoder Required Required On Motor On Motor PG X2 PG X2 Option Card Option Card Required Required Use Open Use Flux Use V f Use V f Loop Vector Vector Control w PG Fdbk Control Control Method Control Method Method Method Figure 2 2 Control Method Selection Flowchart f the selected control method requires a PG encoder on the motor verify that a PG X2 card is installed in the drive see separate option installation sheet for details and that all encoder wiring is correct Proceed to the correct Power On and Preliminary Checks procedure POWER ON AND PRELIMINARY CHECKS Control Method Section Open Loop Vector 2 2a Flux Vector 2 2b V f 2 2C V f with PG Feedback 2 2d 2 2 2 2a POWER ON AND PRELIMINARY CHECKS OPEN LOOP VECTOR CONTROL DESCRIPTION Apply input power to the drive If the display is not in English go to section 2 3 CHANGING THE LANGUAGE ON THE DIGITAL OPERATOR KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY
96. 2 setting or VOLTAGE selected accel decel setting E C1 10 Accel Decel Time Setting Unit Factory setting 1 Range 0 0 01 seconds 1 0 1 seconds In addition to determining the setting resolution this parameter controls the range of C1 01 thru 1 09 if the resolution is 0 01 sec the range is 0 000 to 600 00 sec If the resolution is set to 0 1 sec the range is 0 0 to 6000 0 sec F 1 11 Accel Decel Switching Frequency Factory setting 0 0 Range 0 0 to 400 0 Hz By using C1 11 the Accel and Decel times can be automatically switched from Time 1 to Time 4 If the output frequency is greater than or equal to the C 1 11 frequency the C1 01 and C1 02 times are used If the output frequency is below C1 11 C1 07 and C1 08 are used instead NOTE If used in conjunction with a multi function input H1 01 thru H1 06 set to A or 1A the multi function input has priority over the C1 11 switching frequency 5 3 ACCEL DECEL S CURVE CHARACTERISTICS C2 01 S Curve Characteristic Time Factory setting each 0 20 at Accel Start Range each 0 00 to 2 50 C2 02 S Curve Characteristic Time seconds at Accel End C2 03 S Curve Characteristic Time at Decel Start C2 04 S Curve Characteristic Time at Decel End Setting of these parameters determine the S curve starting and ending characteristics of the acceleration and deceleration ramp OUTPUT died
97. 4 Setting 0 Function Stall prevention during deceleration disabled An excessively short deceleration time will generate an overvoltage fault OV and the drive will stop Stall prevention during deceleration enabled General Purpose The DC bus voltage level is monitored and the deceleration rate is automatically extended to prevent an overvoltage condition This deceleration rate may be longer than the set value C1 02 Stall prevention during deceleration enabled auto adjust Intelligent By monitoring DC bus voltage the deceleration rate is automatically adjusted so that deceleration can be completed in the shortest amount of time regardless of the set deceleration time Stall prevention during deceleration enabled with DB resistor This setting lengthens decel ramp time whenever the drive goes into current limit during a deceleration Intended to be used when dynamic braking is installed Note Not available in the flux vector control method A1 02 3 Stall prevention during deceleration Controls the FREQUENCY deceleration automatically adjusts the deceleration rate time needed to while monitoring the DC bus voltage to prevent over voltage fault prevent overvoltage during deceleration When the motor load is large or decel time is short actual decel time may be longer than the set value because of stall prevention L3 01 Stall Prevention Selection During Accel Factory setting 1
98. 4 describes 14 other preset patterns one of which may be better suited for your specific application and load characteristics However if none of these patterns are suitable this parameter can be set to F V f pattern custom The exact pattern is then defined by the settings of E1 04 thru 1 10 described in paragraph 5 48 V f Pattern Custom 5 106 Table 5 4 Standard Preset V f Patterns APPLI V f PATTERN APPLI E1 03 V f PATTERN CATION SPECIFICATION NOTE 3 CATION SPECIFICATION DATA NOTE 3 Starting Torque Low TOSI Starting Torque High 60Hz Satura tion Starting Torque Low G Z 4 Z gt 50Hz Starting Satura Torque tion High 60 9o Hz Z gt C ZOO gt Variable Torque 1 Variable Torque 2 m O oO m umexz ox Variable Torque 1 Variable Torque 2 NOTES Consult Yaskawa for assistance when these settings are desired typically used for blowers centrifugal pumps and fans 1 The following conditions must be considered when selecting a V f pattern Pattern matches the voltage frequency characteristics of the motor Maximum motor speed 2 V f pattern for high starting torque should be selected for Wiring distance Large voltage drop at start AC reactor connected to drive input or output Use of motor rated below drive max output 3 P
99. 45P51F 47P51F 40111F 40151F 40181F 40221F 40301F 40371F 40451F 40551F 40750F 41100F 41600F 41850F 42200F 43000F 41850F Drive New Drive Model No CIMR G5M GPD515C 51P51F 52P21F B380 B506 B675 Old Drive Model No 0090 0090 0090 Part No 46S03331 N oa Alo alo Table A6 4 Dynamic Braking 10 Duty Cycle 600V Braking Transistor Module Minimum Connectable Resistance Each Ohms Dimensions Inches Height Length Depth Remote Mount Resistor Unit Resistance Ohms Each Approx Braking Torque 96 Dimensions Inches Height Length Depth 53P71F 55P51F 57P51F 50111F 50151F 50181F 50221F 50301F 50371F 50451F 50551F 50751F 50900F 51100F 51600F 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 4 A6 2 INSTALLATION This option should only be installed by a TECHNICALLY QUALIFIED INDIVIDUAL who is familiar with this type of equipment and the hazards involved Hazardous voltage can cause severe injury or death Lock all power sources feeding the drive in the OFF position CAUTION Failure to follow these installation steps may cause equipment damage or personnel injury Preliminary Procedures 1 Disconnect all electrical power to the drive 2 Remove d
100. 5 Hz E4 07 Min Output Voltage Motor 2 2 3 V 4 6 V 6 5 V These seven parameters define the V f pattern for motor 2 The illustration below shows how these parameters relate to each other in establishing the V f pattern Vmax Hes T OUTPUT VOLTAGE E V E4 07 Va ee EE aE EE Hh 4 05 min Fmin Fa Fbase E4 06 E4 04 E4 03 OUTPUT FREQUENCY Fmax E4 01 Parameter E3 01 determines which control method the drive will use when motor 2 is selected If E3 01 is set to a 2 or a 3 the second motor needs to be auto tuned First select motor 2 via a multi function input then run the auto tuning routine as described in Section 2 2A or 2 2B Parameters E4 01 thru E4 07 and E5 01 thru E5 06 are set when an auto tune is executed on motor 2 If auto tuning is not possible use section 2 4 and the table below to manually calculate and enter the motor parameters Parameter Description Set by Auto Tune Equivalent Motor 1 Parameter E5 01 Motor Rated Current Motor 2 Yes E2 01 E5 02 Motor Rated Slip Motor 2 Yes E2 02 E5 03 Motor No load Current Motor 2 Yes E2 03 E5 04 Number of Motor Poles Motor 2 Yes E2 04 E5 05 Motor Line to line Resistance Motor 2 Yes E2 05 E5 06 Motor Leakage Inductance Motor 2 Yes E2 06 5 104 5 45 1 TWO MOTOR OPERATION Continued H1 01 thru H1 06 Multi function I
101. 51F NEMA 1 50181F NEMA 1 50221F NEMA 1 50301F NEMA 1 50371F NEMA 1 50451F NEMA 1 50551F NEMA 1 50751F NEMA 1 50900F 51100F Protected 51600F Chassis A5 2 Appendix 6 DYNAMIC BRAKING CONNECTIONS GENERAL Dynamic braking DB enables the motor to be brought to a smooth and rapid stop This is achieved by dissipating the regenerative energy of the AC motor across the resistive components of the Dynamic Braking option For further details on dynamic braking operation see the instruction sheet shipped with dynamic braking components The GPD515C A003 thru A033 CIMR G5M20P41F thru 27P51F B001 thru B034 40P41F thru 40151F and 003 thru C032 51P51F thru 50221F have an integral braking transistor and require the addition of a Remote Mount Resistor Unit or a Heat Sink Mount Resistor All higher rated drives require the use of a Braking Transistor Unit and a Remote Mount Resistor Unit Remote Mount Resistor Units typically mount outside of an electrical enclosure Braking Transistor Units mount inside of an electrical enclosure Heat Sink Mount Resistors mount to the back of the drive attaching directly to the heat sink Available dynamic braking components are listed in Table A6 1 through A6 4 Table A6 1 Dynamic Braking 396 Duty Cycle 230V Heat Sink Mount Resistor Dimensions Inches Rated New Drive Old Drive Resistance Power Approx Model No Model No Ohms wat
102. 8 X No effect FWD REV d1 09 d1 01 Manual Multi func 91 03 91 04 01 09 5 43 5 25 LOCAL REMOTE AND REFERENCE SELECTION Continued Mode 4 The final consideration for multiple frequency command configuration modes is that any combination of reference values may be configured GPD 515 G5 for operation As an example if only three speed references are required then the following example H1 03 will work H1 04 b 1 01 local operation H1 03 frequency select 1 at terminal 5 H1 04 frequency select 2 at terminal 6 H3 05 manual reference at terminal 16 2 WIRE CONTROL b1 01 H1 03 H1 04 H3 05 n n H M Freq External Terminal Ref 8 7 6 5 0 0 0 0 5 26 MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS 02 01 LOCAL REMOTE Key Selection Factory setting 1 Range Oor 1 This parameter determines if the LOCAL REMOTE key is operative 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 5 44 5 26 MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS Continued o2 02 STOP Key Function Factory setting 1 Range Oor 1 This parameter determines if the STOP key is operative during remote run 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 02 05 Digital Motor Operated Pot Factory setting 0 Range Oor 1 Setting this parameter to 1 allows the setting of the frequency reference to imitate a motor operated pot reference
103. A2 32 can each be set by the user to allow a customized Access Level The drive must first be temporarily set to Advanced Access Level A1 04 4 then use the up arrow down arrow and right arrow keys to set A2 01 to the first parameter to which access is desired A2 02 to the next etc Only the parameters entered into A2 01 through A2 32 will be available for monitoring and modifying if A1 01 is then set to 1 5 5 AUTO RESTART A L5 01 Number of Auto Restart Attempts Factory setting 0 Range O to 10 When a fault occurs during operation the drive can be programmed for an auto restart operation to automatically reset the fault Auto restart operation will use the number of reset attempts set in this parameter up to the maximum of 10 When set to 0 no auto restarts will be attempted The following faults can be automatically reset OC Overcurrent GF Ground fault OV Overvoltage UV1 Undervoltage Power UV OL3 Overtorque Detect The following conditions WILL NOT initiate auto restart 1 OL EF PUF or CPF_ fault 2 When OC or UV occurs during deceleration 3 When L2 01 is programmed to stop during momentary power failure data 0 See paragraph 5 29 MOMENTARY POWER LOSS RIDE THRU The number of restart attempts available will be reset to the L5 01 setting when 1 10 minutes has elapsed without a fault occurring 2 The RESET key or external Fault Reset push button is
104. ATE AND SHORTED TO GROUND REMOVE SHORT T1 U T2 V T3 W TO G E NO Y CHECK POWER TRANSISTORS REPLACE SEE PARAGRAPH 6 5 ARE TRANSISTORS DAMAGED POWER DAMAGED TRANSISTORS NO Y DRIVE IS FAULTY CAUTION DO NOT REPLACE DC BUS FUSE WITHOUT FIRST CHECKING OUTPUT TRANSISTORS SEE PARAGRAPH 6 5 ARE TRANSISTORS TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6 7 oC Overcurrent FAULT INDICATION DOES OUTPUT CURRENT EXCEED 200 OF RATING Y DOES OC TRIP OCCUR OR MC NO MACHINE JAMMED ANSWERBACK gt OR MOTOR TRIP WHEN POWER FAILURE IS TURNED ON NO YES y WITH DRIVE IN STOPPED CON DITION INCREASE ACCELERATION TIME BY REPROGRAMMING C1 01 C1 03 C1 05 OR C1 07 IF OC TRIP OCCURS ONLY DURING ACCELERATION OTHERWISE REDUCE LOAD CHECK POWER TRANSISTORS REPLACE DAMAGED POWER DAMAGED TRANSISTORS NO DOES OC TRIP STILL OCCUR NO YES R MOTOR STARTED BY CONTACTS WIRED BETWEEN DRIVE AND MOTOR NO Y Y ERRONEOUS OPERATION DUE TO NOISE YES NO Y CONTROL PCB OR GATE DRIVE PCB IS FAULTY REPLACE FAULTY BOARD CLEAR JAM OR REPLACE MOTOR DISCONNECT WIRING FROM OUTPUT TERMINALS T1 T2 AND T3 AND CHECK LOAD IMPEDANCE Y WITH DRIVE IN STOPPED CONDITION INCREASE ACCELERATION TIME BY REPROGRAMMING C1 01 C1 03 C1 05 OR
105. ATED L NO 2 CHECK THAT NO NOISE SOURCE IS PRESENT REPROGRAM A1 03 USING FACTORY RESET CODES OBSERVE CAUTION ON PAGE vii 4 CHECK 02 04 FOR PROPER VALUE NO IS CPF STILL INDICATED YES 4 SELF DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION HAS DETECTED FAILURE IN THE CPU OR PERIPHERAL COMPONENTS REPLACE THE CONTROL PCB OR APPROPRIATE CONTROL MOUNTED PCB DRIVE IS OK RETURN TO NORMAL OPERATION 6 22 TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6 12 EFX EXTERNAL FAULT INDICATION IS AN EXTERNAL FAULT SIGNAL PRESENT CLOSED CIRCUIT FAULT HAS OCCURRED BETWEEN TERMINAL 3 AND 11 OR OPEN CIRCUIT IN CIRCUITS OUTSIDE BETWEEN TERMINAL 11 THE DRIVE AND WHICHEVER TERMINAL TROUBLESHOOT AND 4 8 HAS BEEN PROGRAMMED CORRECT FOR EXT FAULT INPUT CONTROL PCB IS FAULTY REPLACE 6 23 TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6 13 oS Overspeed FAULT INDICATION CORRECT ENCODER PPR VALUE PROGRAMMED RE PROGRAM IN F1 01 F1 01 SETTING YES Y EXCESSIVE NOISE ON ENCODER CONSULT YASKAWA SIGNAL INPUTS TO ABOUT SPECIFICATIONS OF THE DRIVEY USER SUPPLIED ENCODER See Section 6 6 NO Y FORWARD DIRECTION OK BUT TRACKING PROBLEM ENCODER IN REVERSE DIRECTION PROBLEM CONSULT YASKAWA 6 24 TROUB
106. C1 07 DECREASE LOAD INERTIA REWIRE TO ELIMINATE MOTOR FULL VOLTAGE STARTING REPLACE DRIVE WITH ONE OF LARGER CAPACITY REMOVE NOISE SOURCE e CONNECT SURGE SUPPRESSOR TO RELAY AND MAGNETIC CON TACTOR COILS PROVIDE LINE FILTER TO REMOVE NOISE ON INPUT POWER LINE TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6 8 oL1 Motor Overload FAULT INDICATION LOAD TOO LARGE MOTOR OVERHEATED 2 NO Y IS DRIVE CAPACITY 02 04 FACTORY SET SET ACCORDING TO CORRECTLY APPENDIX 3 TABLE 1 YES Y IS ELECTRONIC THERMAL WITH DRIVE IN OVERLOAD 11 01 amp 11 02 STOPPED CONDITION REPROGRAM 11 01 amp 11 02 YES Y DISCONNECT WIRING FROM OUTPUT TERMINALS 1 0 CHECK MOTOR T2 V AND T3 W IS OL STILL INDICATED AND LOAD YES Y ERRONEOUS OPERATION YES REMOVE NOISE SOURCE eee 77777 e CONNECT SURGE NO SUPPRESSOR TO RELAY AND MAGNETIC CON TACTOR COILS e PROVIDE LINE FILTER TO REMOVE NOISE ON INPUT POWER LINE PG X2 CONTROL GATE DRIVE IS FAULTY REPLACE FAULTY BOARD TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6 9 UV Undervoltage FAULT INDICATION ISINPUT AC No INCREASE VOLTAGE SUPPLY WITHIN PROPER RANGE CORRECT CHECK WIRING BETWEEN TES MAIN AC CONTACTOR AND DRIVE Y IS THERE AT LEAST 450VDC FOR 460V DRIV
107. CE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY Press DATA twice Rated Voltage ENTER 400 0 VAC Set the correct Nameplate voltage of the motor Rated Voltage using AJ ES 460 0 VAC Write the value to memory by pressing DATA Entry Accepted ENTER Ns briefly then Rated Voltage 460 0 VAC V Enter the current and the rest of the parameters following a similar procedure to that of the motor nameplate voltage When all of the parameters Press A Tuning Ready are entered execute Auto Press RUN key Tuning The drive will first output current to the motor then run the motor at a high speed During tuning the following Tune Proceeding message will appear XX HZ X XX A If no problems are encountered the following message will Tune Successful appear If a problem occurs during Tune Aborted Auto Tuning execution see Reason section 6 2 AUTO TUNING FAULTS amp CORRECTIVE ACTIONS Proceed to section 2 5 TEST RUN USING DIGITAL OPERATOR 2 10 2 2 POWER ON AND PRELIMINARY CHECKS V f CONTROL DESCRIPTION Apply input power to the drive If the display is not in English go to section 2 3 CHANGING THE LANGUAGE ON THE DIGITAL OPERATOR KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY Set the control method of the Press then Main Menu h driv
108. CK SETTINGS REPROGRAM AS REQUIRED CONTROL METHOD V F or Flux Vector or V F w PG T Open Loop Vector Y IS PG OUTPUT SIGNAL NORMAL See Section 6 6 YES 1 i Yy EXCESSIVE MECHANICAL SYSTEM CHATTER NO APPROX 15VDC FROM TERMINAL 15 TO 17 YES DRIVE IS FAULTY CHECK FOR PROBLEM IN MOTOR MECHANICAL SYSTEM OR BRAKE DRIVE S CONTROL POWER CIRCUIT IS FAULTY TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6 4 CHART 6 4 MOTOR HUNTING Open Loop Vector CONTROL METHOD V F Flux Vector or or V F w PG CHECK STALL PREVENTION SETTINGS L3 01 OR L3 06 REFER TO PARA 2 2 AND VERIFY NOISE PROBLEM THEN CORRECT PROPER PHASE SEQUENCE OF CONNECTIONS FROM DRIVE TO MOTOR YES y PROPER CONNECTIONS FROM DRIVE TO PG ENCODER YES ALL PARAMETER SETTINGS RELATED ASR PROPER NO FOR APPLICATION YES Y WITH DRIVE IN STOPPED CONDITION REDUCE APPLICABLE ASR PROPORTIONAL GAIN C5 01 5 03 SETTING NO DOES MOTOR STILL HUNT YES EXCESSIVE MECHANICAL SYSTEM CHATTER NO Y ERRONEOUS OPERATION DUE TO NOISE NO y DRIVE IS FAULTY CHECK CONNECTIONS FOR PROBLEM AND REPAIR CHECK CONNECTIONS FOR PROBLEM AND REPAIR CHECK SETTINGS REPROGRAM AS REQUIRED DETE
109. CONTROL b1 01 1 b1 01 1 H1 03 3 H1 03 0 H1 04 4 H1 04 3 H1 05 5 H1 05 4 H1 06 6 H1 06 6 H3 05 0 H3 05 0 Freq External Terminal Ref 8 7 6 5 Auto Manual Multi func d1 03 di 04 91 05 91 06 91 07 1 Closed 0 Open d1 08 X No effect FWD REV d1 09 Freq External Terminal Re 8 7 6 8 7 Auto Manual Multi func d1 03 d1 04 d1 09 5 42 5 25 LOCAL REMOTE AND REFERENCE SELECTION Continued Mode 3 d1 01 Manual d1 03 thru d1 09 uses d1 01 Manual and d1 03 thru d1 09 The input commands at terminals 3 thru 8 are a combination of 1 s and O s which are received as an on or off condition at each terminal Every GPD 515 G5 combination selects a specific speed reference H1 03 b1 01 local operation H1 04 H1 03 frequency reference select 1 at terminal 5 Auto Manual H1 05 H1 04 frequency reference select 2 at terminal 6 H1 06 H1 05 frequency reference select 3 at terminal 7 H1 06 JOG reference select at terminal 8 H3 05 manual reference at terminal 16 2 WIRE CONTROL 3 WIRE CONTROL b1 01 0 b1 01 0 H1 03 3 H1 03 0 H1 04 4 H1 04 3 H1 05 5 H1 05 4 H1 06 6 H1 06 6 H3 05 0 H3 05 0 Freq External Terminal Ref 8 7 6 5 0 Freq External Terminal Ref 8 7 6 5 d1 01 Manual Multi func d1 03 91 04 91 05 91 06 91 07 1 1 Closed 0 Open d1 0
110. CP 916 Setup Function H1 Digital Inputs Function H Function 2 Digital Outputs L Motor overload Function 1 L2 PwrLoss Ridethru L3 Stall Prevention Function L4 Ref Detection Function Fault Restart Function L6 Torque Detection Function L7 Torque Limit 3 L8 Hdwe Protection o1 o2 Key Functions Function 4 4 BASIC PROGRAMMING All parameters are set by accessing them through a menu tree with multiple access levels The setting of the Access Level in the Initialization Menu determines which parameters appear on the Digital Operator To see Example 1 and 2 in detail refer to Tables 4 5 4 6 and 4 7 Table 4 2 Parameter Menu Menu Level Digital Operator Digital Operator Advanced Reference Name Display Display Access Example 1 Example 2 Digital Operator Mode Programming Initialize Parameter Group C Tuning Parameter Function C1 Accel Decel Parameter Name Decel Time 1 Control Method Parameter Number C1 02 A1 02 Parameter Setting Value 10 0 sec V F Control The parameters are arranged by groups The following table shows which Parameter Group s appear under which Mode Table 4 3 Parameter Groups Digital O t ifi u d Operation Initialize Programming Auto Tuning Monitor A Initialize b Application No Group Name No Group Name C Tuning d Reference Parameter E Motor Groups List F Options H Terminals L Protection
111. E OR 225VDC FOR 230V DRIVE DRIVE ON THE DC BUS IS FAULTY SELECT MONITOR DISPLAY U1 07 TO CHECK VOLTAGE 5 Y REMOVE NOISE SOURCE ERRONE PERATION 2 5 aE e SURGE SUPPRESSOR TO RELAY NO AND MAGNETIC CON TACTOR COILS lt e PROVIDE LINE FILTER TO REMOVE NOISE ON INPUT POWER LINE CONTROL PCB OR GATE DRIVE PCB IS FAULTY REPLACE FAULTY BOARD 6 20 TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6 10 oH Heatsink Overtemp FAULT INDICATION IS AMBIENT TEMPERATURE ypg 45 C 113 F OR GREATER NO IS HEAT SINK NO CLEAN YES Y COOLING FAN STOPPED NO ERRONEOUS OPERATION DUE TO NOISE NO Y YES CONTROL PCB OR GATE DRIVE PCB IS FAULTY REPLACE FAULTY BOARD 6 21 REDUCE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE CLEAN HEAT SINK REPLACE COOLING FAN REMOVE NOISE SOURCE CONNECT SURGE SUPPRESSOR TO RELAY AND MAGNETIC CON TACTOR COILS e PROVIDE LINE FILTER TO REMOVE NOISE ON INPUT POWER LINE TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6 11 CHART 6 11 CPFXX CONTROL FUNCTION ERROR FAULT INDICATION TURN OFF POWER AFTER CHARGE LAMP ON MAIN PC BOARD GOES OUT TURN POWER BACK ON 1 CHECK THAT ALL DRIVE HARNESS CONNECTORS IS CPF STILL YES AND CONTROL BOARD INDICATED 777 MOUNTED PCB s ARE FIRMLY SE
112. E CONTROL b1 01 H1 03 H1 04 H1 05 0 3 4 5 6 Freq Frea ExemalTemina Terminal Ref r GPD 515 H1 03 H1 04 H1 05 H1 06 3 WIRE CONTROL b1 01 H1 03 H1 04 H1 05 0 0 3 4 6 Freq External Terminal Ref O O O 0 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 then H3 05 MUST NOT be set to 0 Analog Input terminal 16 is not being used 5 41 1 1 Closed 0 Open X No effect FWD REV H3 05 selects the function of the multi function analog input If data value 0 is entered the analog input represents manual reference If d1 02 is to be utilized Set H3 05 to 1F when Multi function 5 25 LOCAL REMOTE AND REFERENCE SELECTION Continued Mode 2 Memory Auto Manual uses Auto Manual and d1 03thru 41 09 The input commands at terminals 3 thru 8 are a combination of 1 s and O s which are received as an on or off condition at each terminal Every GPD 515 G5 combination selects a specific speed reference H1 03 b1 01 remote operation H1 04 H1 03 frequency reference select 1 at terminal 5 Auto Manual H1 05 H1 04 frequency reference select 2 at terminal 6 H1 06 1 05 frequency reference select 3 at terminal 7 H1 06 JOG reference select at terminal 8 H3 05 manual reference at terminal 16 2 WIRE CONTROL 3 WIRE
113. ECIAL INERTIA YES Y Y CONTROL METHOD V F Flux Vector or or V F w PG Open Loop Vector Y SELECTION YES APPROPRIATE 777777777 lt lt 1 WITH DRIVE Y STOPPED USE LARGER WIRE BETWEEN DRIVE AND MOTOR CONDITION SET 67 MOTOR OPTIMUM V f TERMINAL PATTERN BY VOLTAGE DROP REPROGRAMMING i SHORTEN WIRING E1 03 DISTANCE BETWEEN DRIVE AND MOTOR DECREASE LOAD DECREASE LOAD INERTIA TORQUE EXTEND ACCEL REPLACE DRIVE ERATION TIME BY WITH ONE OF REPROGRAMMING LARGER C1 01 C1 03 C1 05 CAPACITY OR C1 07 TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6 3 CHART 6 3 MOTOR DOES NOT ROTATE AT SET SPEED YES CORRECT MOTOR FOR NO CONSULT YASKAWA USE WITH DRIVE CONTROL METHOD V F Flux Vector or Or Open Loop Vector V F w PG ABOUT MOTOR SELECTION CONNECTIONS FROM DRIVE TO MOTOR YES CHECK CON NECTIONS FOR PROBLEM AND REPAIR IS PG POWER SUPPLY NORMAL CONSULT YASKAWA PROPER CONNECTIONS FROM DRIVE TO MOTOR AND PG CHECK CONNECTIONS FOR PROBLEM AND REPAIR YES PROPER FREQUENCY REFERENCE INPUT TERMINAL 17 TO 13 U1 15 14 01 16 OR 16 01 17 YES CHECK EXTERNAL CIRCUITS FOR PROBLEM AND REPAIR ALL GROUP b PARAMETER SETTINGS PROPER FOR APPLICATION CHE
114. ELECT m 4 20mA ISOLATED AUTO SPEED REFERENCE SEE NOTE 6 DIGITAL OPERATOR Weise BASE BLOCK 0 TO 10Vdc 20KQ LOCAL MENU ESC REMOTE TERMINALS 1 8 IF INPUT FROM RELAY CONTACTS RATED 30Vdc OR MORE 100mA OR MORE IF OPEN COLLECTOR INPUT FOR OPTIONAL DC REACTOR JoG J A J RATED 35Vdc OR MORE SEE NOTE 8 100mA OR MORE FWD x Vv r RY CONTACTS CAPACITY 1A AT 30Vdc FOR WIRING DYNAMIC ERANG MULTI FUNCTION ANALOG MONITOR OUTPUT O to 10V or GPD515C B041 thru B096 10 to 10V FACTORY SET FOR 460V 2mA MAX OUTPUT m 400 380V 415V 440V 460V MULTI r2 FUNCTION Voltage Selector her e OPEN COLLECTOR 15Vdc OUTPUTS 20mA MAX COLLECTOR CAPACITY EARTH GROUND SEE NOTE 5 AC MOTOR k 50mA AT 48Vdc MAX CIRCUIT lere a ALTERNATE MOTOR CONNECTION 1OL SEE NOTE2 3 BASIC INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM FOR 2 WIRE CONTROL Figure 1 3 230 460 or 600V Interconnections 2 Wire Control with parameters b1 01 1 b1 02 1 H1 01 24 H1 02 14 H1 03 3 H1 04 4 H1 05 6 and H1 06 8 See Figure 1 5 for Closed loop PG connections 1 21 1 4 6 Interconnection 3 Wire Control Operation Figure 1 4 Notes referred to in figure 1 4 Indicates components not supplied Branch circuit protection circuit breaker or input fuses must be supplied by customer
115. Flux Vector the drive is programmed for Each column represents the Access Level for a given Control Method Q Quick start B Basic A Advanced not available A1 26 Table A1 10 Drive UX XX Parameters PARAMETER NUMBER DISPLAY UNIT MONITOR ITEM DESCRIPTION V f control V f with PG feedback Open loop vector Flux vector Frequency Reference See Sus 1 Output S Frequency Output Current Control Method Motor Speed ee o 1 See A 2 U1 04 pes ET U1 T 0 01 Hz U1 x U1 i 0 1 kW 01 09 Torque 4 Reference internal 0 1 U1 10 Input Terminal Status pm T 11111111 Control circuit terminal Control circuit terminal Control circuit terminal Control circuit terminal Control circuit terminal Control circuit terminal Control circuit terminal Control circuit terminal Output Terminal Status 10000111 ontrol circuit terminals 9 10 Closed Control circuit terminal 25 Closed Control circuit terminal 26 Closed Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Fault contact output active ACCESS LEVEL ANALOG MONITOR See Note 3 OUTPUT LEVEL 10V max output freq 10V max output freq 10V EM drive EM current 10V max output freq E1 04 or E4 01 10V 230V or 10V 460V or 10V 575V 10V 400V or 10V 800V or 10V 1150V 10V drive capacity KW 10V
116. Frequency OL2 Selection at Low Speed Ramp to stop Coast to stop Fast stop Alarm only Disabled Enabled 0 Disabled Enabled 0 Disabled Enabled 0 Conventional Lower carrier frequency Short Term OL2 Limit current to 15096 Low frequency OL2 Low frequency OL2 INCRE MENT SETTING DESCRIPTION RANGE when gt 100 and Fout lt 10 0 Hz 2 seconds if Fout lt 6 0 Hz and 1 gt 175 disabled enabled Factory setting differs depending on drive capacity be set FACTORY ACCESS LEVEL papa SETTING See Note 4 0 2 3 When Vector control A1 02 2 or 3 is selected set value 2 Intelligent cannot Factory setting differs depending on the Control Method selected by A1 02 Capability to view and set specific parameters is dependent upon the Access Level A1 01 and Control Method A1 02 0 V f 1 V f w PG 2 Open Loop Vector 3 Flux Vector the drive is programmed for Each column represents the Access Level for a given Control Method Q Quick start B Basic A Advanced not available A1 24 REF Table A1 9 Drive oX XX Parameters ACCESS LEVEL See Note 2 PARAMETER NUMBER SETTING RANGE FACTORY SETTING PARA REF FUNCTION INCRE DESCRIPTION NAME Se Monitor Selection o1 01 4 38 Monitor Selection After Power up Digital Operator Display Selection Digital Operator D
117. IONS FROM DRIVE TO PG ENCODER Y 4 PROPER rs CONNECTIONS 900404 FROM DRIVE TORQUE LIMIT TO PG od ENCODER CORRECT Noi iYEs i IYES ED MES rn a C a Y y TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6 1 Continued FROM PRECEDING PAGE VOLTAGE PRESENT ACROSS OUTPUT TERMINALS T1 U T2 V AND T3 W YES PROPER CONNECTIONS FROM DRIVE TO MOTOR YES Y CONTROL METHOD V F w PG Flux Vector V F Open Loop Vector DRIVE IS FAULTY VOLTAGE PRESENT AT MOTOR TERMINALS T1 U T2 V AND T3 W YES LOADTORQUE YES SETTING TOO LARGE NO R VOLTAGE BALANCED WITHIN 2 BETWEEN PHASES AT T1 U T2 V AND T3 W YES Y MOTOR IS FAULTY SET TORQUE LIMIT ANALOG INPUT OR L7 01 amp L7 02 TO PROPER VALUE CHECK FOR PROBLEM IN MOTOR MECHANICAL SYSTEM OR BRAKE REDUCE LOAD TORQUE DISCON NECT LOAD REPLACE DRIVE WITH ONE OF LARGER CAPACITY DRIVE IS FAULTY TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6 2 CHART 6 2 MOTOR STALLS DURING ACCELERATION ACCELERATION TIME YES WITH DRIVE IN TOO SHORT 777777777777 STOPPED CONDITION EXTEND ACCELER NO ATION TIME BY REPROGRAMMING LOAD TORQUE C1 01 C1 03 C1 05 TOO HIGH OR C1 07 NO YES LOAD CHECK IF SP
118. Input Instr Selection Sheet DI 16 Digital BCD 1 5 BCD 0 01 Hz Separate Input Option BCD 0 1 6 BCD 5DG Option BCD 0 01 0 01 Hz Instr BCD1Hz 7 Sheet BCD 0 1 Hz AO 08 AO 12 Separate Channel 1 Option Monitor Instr Selection Sheet AO 08 AO 12 0 00 2 50 Separate Channel 1 Option Gain Instr Sheet AO 08 AO 12 Separate Channel 2 Option Monitor Instr Selection Sheet AO 08 AO 12 3 0 00 2 50 Separate Channel 2 Option Gain Instr AO 08 AO 12 10 0 10 0 Channel 1 Bias AO 08 AO 12 10 0 10 0 Channel 2 DO 02 Separate Channel 1 Option Output Instr Selection Sheet DO 02 Separate Channel 2 Option Output Instr Selection Sheet DO 08 Output 8 channel individual Separate Mode Binary output Option Selection Instr Sheet PO 36F 1 x Output frequency Separate Frequency 6 x Output frequency Option Multiple 10 x Output frequency Instr Selection 12 x Output frequency Sheet 36 x Output frequency A1 16 NOTES PARAMETER NUMBER FUNCTION NAME Communication Error E 15 Detection Selection Option External Fault EFO Selection Option External Fault EFO Detection Option External Fault EFO Action Torque Reference Limit Selection DP RAM Communication BUS Fault Selection DESCRIPTION Rampt to Stop Coast to Stop Fast Stop Alarm Only Normally Open Normally Closed
119. LECTRIC AMERICA INC Drives Division 16555 W Ryerson Rd New Berlin WI 53151 U S A Phone 800 YASKAWA 800 927 5292 Fax 262 782 3418 Internet http www drives com YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA INC Chicago Corporate Headquarters 2121 Norman Drive South Waukegan IL 60085 U S A Phone 800 YASKAWA 800 927 5292 Fax 847 887 7310 Internet http www yaskawa com MOTOMAN INC 805 Liberty Lane West Carrollton OH 45449 U S A Phone 937 847 6200 Fax 937 847 6277 Internet http www motoman com YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION New Pier Takeshiba South Tower 1 16 1 Kaigan Minatoku Tokyo 105 0022 Japan Phone 81 3 5402 4511 Fax 81 3 5402 4580 Internet http www yaskawa co jp YASKAWA ELETRICO DO BRASIL COMERCIO LTDA Avenida Fagundes Filho 620 Bairro Saude Sao Paolo SP Brasil CEP 04304 000 Phone 55 11 5071 2552 Fax 55 11 5581 8795 Internet http www yaskawa com br YASKAWA ELECTRIC EUROPE GmbH Am Kronberger Hang 2 65824 Schwalbach Germany Phone 49 6196 569 300 Fax 49 6196 888 301 MOTOMAN ROBOTICS AB Box 504 S38525 Torsas Sweden Phone 46 486 48800 Fax 46 486 41410 MOTOMAN ROBOTEC GmbH Kammerfeldstrabe 1 85391 Allershausen Germany Phone 49 8166 900 Fax 49 8166 9039 YASKAWA ELECTRIC UK LTD 1 Hunt Hill Orchardton Woods Cumbernauld G68 9LF Scotland United Kingdom Phone 44 12 3673 5000 Fax 44 12 3645 8182 YASKAWA YASKAWA ELECTRIC KOREA CORPORATION Paik Nam Bldg 901 188 3
120. LESHOOTING CHART 6 14 CF Out of Control FAULT INDICATION ARE REGENERATIVE TORQUE LIMITS SET INCREASE L7 03 AND HIGH ENOUGH L7 04 YES Y CAN DECELERATION INCREASE C1 02 OR Torr TE C1 04 C1 06 OR C1 08 NO Y INCREASE 1 09 1 TYPICALLY TO 1 5 Hz NO Y IS MOTOR RATED SLIP REPROGRAM E2 02 Ser PRAPER TO PROPER SETTING CONSULT YASKAWA 6 25 TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6 15 NO DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY NO DISPLAY y 230 460 ON NO APPLY LI L2 L3 27777777 POWER YES lt Y DAMAGED PRECHARGE x RESISTOR INPUT ON DIODES OR OUTPUT TRANSISTORS YES Y IS VOLTAGE NO IS VOLTAGE REPLACE BETWEEN BETWEEN TERM 1 amp 11 77777 gt OR TERM 15 17 GATE DRIVE 24 VDC 15 VDC BOARD YES Y oe EITHER CONTROL CARD Te r OR GATE DRIVE IS 15 VDC FAULTY YES y CHECK ALL CONNECTORS EXCHANGE OPERATOR CABLE 6 26 6 5 DIODE AND IGBT TRANSISTOR MODULE RESISTANCE TEST A DIODE MODULE Measure the resistance across the module terminals with a volt ohm meter Set the meter at the X1 range The measured resistance should be within the values listed in Table 6 4 NOTE If the DC bus fuse is blown PUF the values shown below may not be accurate Power should be removed from L1 L2 amp L3 and the CHARGE light should be out prior to conducting these t
121. ME MENT RANGE SETTING e REE Acceleration 0 00 600 00 Time 1 1 02 Deceleration 0 0 6000 0 Time 1 C1 03 Acceleration Dependent Dependent Time 2 upon C1 10 upon C1 10 setting setting C1 04 Deceleration Time 2 C1 05 Acceleration Time 3 C1 06 Deceleration Time 3 C1 07 Acceleration Time 4 C1 08 Deceleration Time 4 C1 09 Fast Stop Decel Time Accel Decel 0 0 01 seconds Time Setting 1 0 1 seconds Unit Accel Decel 0 0 400 0 Time Switching Frequency S Curve Characteristic at Accel Start S Curve Characteristic at Accel End S Curve Characteristic at Decel Start S Curve Characteristic at Decel End A1 6 PARAMETER NUMBER Table A1 3 Drive CX XX Parameters Continued FUNCTION NAME Slip Compensation Gain Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time Slip Compensation Limit Slip Compensation Selection During Regeneration Flux Select INCRE MENT SETTING RANGE DESCRIPTION 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Slip Included Flux is calculated after slip compensation is applied Slip Excluded Flux is calculated before slip compensation is applied Output Voltage 0 Disabled Output voltage limit and slip compensation are disabled above base speed Enabled Output voltage limit and slip compensation are enabled above base Torque Compensation Gain Torque Compensation Time Constant Forward Torque Compensation At Start Reve
122. MMAND LL yj L LL a RAMP TO STOP DC INJ BRK START gt OUTPUT FREQUENCY FREQUENCY b2 01 gt DC INJECTION TIME AT DC INJECTION TIME AT START b2 03 STOP b2 04 DC Braking Sequence b2 08 Field Compensation Factory setting 0 At Start Range 0 to 500 This parameter adjusts the amount of motor current during DC Injection at start A setting of 0 disables this feature A setting of 100 equals motor no load current E 2 03 This current level will be applied until the DC Injection Time at Start 62 03 expires This parameter is useful when starting motors that are relatively higher in horsepower than the drive due to the requirement for increased magnetizing current This parameter may also compensate for reduced starting torque due to motor circuit inefficiencies 5 15 5 10 DC INJECTION BRAKING Continued C H3 05 Multi function Analog Input Data 6 DC Injection Braking Current Term 16 Adjust The multi function analog input at terminal 16 may be configured to allow analog control of the amount of DC injection braking current from 0 to 100 of the current level set in 52 02 which directly controls the amount of DC injection voltage applied to the motor BRAKING CURRENT 26 BRAKING 52 02 CURRENT ADJUST 9 10 ANALOG VOLTAGE D H1 01thru H1 06 Multi function Inputs Data 60 DC Injection Braking Term 3 thru 8 Command Any multi functi
123. MR G5M20151F 40151F and 50221F must be derated by 50 Consult factory for derating of larger drives CAUTION Before running parameter A1 03 must be set to 0 Resetting drive constant A1 03 to 2220 may cause the motor to run in the reverse direction WITHOUT A RUN COMMAND and possibly result in damage to the equipment or personal injury 1 22 3e POWER SUPPLY SEE NAMEPLATE DATA 11 L2 L3 1 GPD515C A080 CIMR G5M20151F AND ABOVE A GPD515C B041 CIMR G5M40151F AND ABOVE GPD515C C027 CIMR G5M50221F AND ABOVE gt 1 SEE NOTE 10 15Vdc 15 B 5 0 902 RUN MAN SPEED COOLING 1RH FAN MAN REF IN POWER STOP 0 TO 10Vdc 2 2 5 EXT FAULT GPD 515 G5 FAULT RESET DRIVE FWD REV REMOTE 0 SEQ OREF em me MULTI STEP an FREQ SELECT REFERENCE k SEE NOTE 6 DIGITAL OPERATOR JVOP 130 0 10V 1 TERMINALS 1 8 IF INPUT FROM RELAY CONTACTS RATED 30Vdc OR MORE LOCAL MENU J ree 100mA OR MORE IF OPEN COLLECTOR INPUT FOR OPTIONAL DC REACTOR Joa A J ig RATED 35Vdc OR MORE ENTER SEE NOTE 8 100mA OR MORE FWD RY CONTACTS CAPACITY 1A AT 250Vac 1A AT 30Vdc FOR WIRING DYNAMIC BRAKING OPTION SEE NOTE 7 MULTI FUNCTION MONITOR OUTPUT 0 to 10V or 10 to 10V 2mA MAX GPD515C B041 thru B096 FACTORY SET FOR 460V ANALOG OUTPUT OPEN COLLECTOR CIRCUIT
124. NCTION ANALOG INPUT TORQUE COMPEN SATION 10V E 100 MULTI FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT H3 12 Analog Input Filter Time Constant 5 30 MULTI FUNCTION ANALOG INPUTS Term 14 amp 16 Continued H3 05 11 H3 09 11 REV 1009577 TORQUE LIMIT 210 OV 10V MULTI FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT H3 05 13 H3 09 13 TORQUE REFERENCE 100 777774 10V OV 10V 100 MULTI FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT H3 05 15 H3 09 15 100 TORQUE LIMIT 0 10V 10096 s i MULTI FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT Factory setting 0 00 Range 0 00 to 2 00 seconds This parameter adjusts the time it takes to process the analog input signal The signal that comes into the drive on terminals 13 14 and 16 goes through an analog to digital converter and then to the control circuit This filter time constant determines the time between converting and processing For cases when there is noise on the analog signal this time constant may be increased Extending the processing time can help prevent erratic performance of the drive 5 56 5 31 MULTI FUNCTION ANALOG MONITOR OUTPUT Term 21 23 H4 01 Multi function Analog Monitor Factory setting 2 Output 1 Selection Range 1 to 38 H4 04 Multi function Analog Monitor Factory setting 3 Output 2 Selection Range 1 to 38 The analog monitor outputs provides a 0 to 10 FREQUENCY CURRENT Vdc signal between terminals 21
125. Not Inverted increase in feedback level 1 The output of the PID controller will increase when there is an Inverted increase in the feedback level b5 10 PID Output Selection Factory setting 1 0 Range 0 0 to 25 0 This parameter is a multiplier in the output of the PID controller Increasing this parameter will make the PID controller more responsive Be careful not to increase this parameter too much or the drive system will become unstable b5 11 PID Output Reverse Selection Factory setting 0 Range Oor 1 Setting Description 0 If the PID controller calls for a negative speed reverse the drive motor will stop 1 If the PID controller calls for a negative speed reverse the drive motor will run in reverse All of these parameters are interactive and will need to be adjusted until the control loop is properly tuned i e stable with minimal steady state error A general procedure for tuning these parameters is as follows 1 Adjust Proportional Gain until continuous oscillations in the Controlled Variable are at a minimum 2 The addition of Integral Time will cause the steady state error to approach zero The time should be adjusted so that this minimal error is attained as fast as possible without making the system oscillate 3 If necessary adjust derivative time to reduce overshoot during startup The drive s accel and decel rate times can also
126. OTE To decode the input terminal status output terminal status and operation status displays refer to Appendix 1 Table A1 10 U1 10 to U1 12 NOTES 1 Actual displays will differ depending on the recorded fault and the operating conditions If the FWD REV SEQ amp REF lights are flashing enter a RESET command from the Digital Operator or external signal to prepare the drive for restart of operation IMPORTANT In 2 wire control any RUN STOP command must be removed before the RESET will be accepted B Displaying Fault History Whenever the fault relay trips drive shutdown the fault that caused the trip except for Illegal Constant or Control Function Hardware is entered into non volatile RAM The drive retains the last four faults and the operating conditions when the last fault occurred NOTE Time is in operating hours These faults can only be displayed when the drive is in the Drive mode DRIVE light is on The drive can be stopped or running Table 6 3 Displaying Fault History DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE See Note 1 Display the fault history function menu Function U3 Fault History Display the last fault that Last Fault occurred most recent in time External Fault 3 Display the second from the Fault Message 2 last fault that occurred Motor Overloaded Table 6 3 Displaying Fault History Continued DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE Di
127. Oor 1 This function allows the analog monitor output s to have a unipolar output signal 0 10V or a bipolar output signal 0 to x10V O Analog output is voltage only absolute value 1 Analog output is voltage according to sign direction 5 57 5 32 MULTI FUNCTION INPUT TERMINALS Term 3 8 H1 01 Terminal 3 Function Factory settings 2 Wire control 3 Wire control H1 02 Terminal 4 Function H1 01 24 24 H1 03 Terminal 5 Function H1 02 14 14 H1 04 Terminal 6 Function H1 03 3 0 H1 05 Terminal 7 Function H1 04 4 3 H1 06 Terminal 8 Function H1 05 6 4 H1 06 8 6 EXTERNAL GPD 515 G5 These six parameters select the input signal CONTACTS functions for terminals 3 thru 8 and can be H1 01 independently set MULTI 4 1 02 gt FUNCTION H1 03 INPUT Parameter settings are checked whenever power is applied to the drive or upon exiting Program mode A parameter set value failure oPE3 will occur if any of the following conditions are detected among these six parameters 1 Two or more of the parameters contain the same value except for External Fault data 2X 2 Two or three Speed Search functions data 61 62 or 64 have been selected 3 Any Speed Search function data 61 62 or 64 has been entered into any parameter other than H1 06 4 Both the Sample Hold data A and Up Down data 10 amp 11 functions have been selec
128. Operation Selection at Overspeed 5 22 at PG Open Circuit sss 5 22 at Speed Deviation PG 5 23 Operation Status Monitor Item A1 28 Operator Detection Selection 5 45 Operator Display 4 1 Options see Peripheral Devices Output Analog 5 57 Output Current Monitor Item A1 27 Output Frequency semen attesa fas 5 108 A1 12 Mid 5 108 A1 12 248 108 A1 12 Min Monitor A1 27 Output Lag Filter Time PID 5 81 Output Phase Loss Detection 5 77 Output Power Monitor Item 1 27 Output Selection Analog Monitor 5 57 Output Terminal Status Monitor Item A1 27 Output Voltage Monitor Item A1 27 Output Voltage Ref Vd Monitor Item 1 29 Output Voltage Ref Vq Monitor Item A1 29 Outputs Analog Monitor ss 5 57 Contact Open Collector 5 70 Overload Prot Selection Motor 5 90 Overspeed Detection Level PG 5 22 Overtorque Detection Function Selection 5 98 P
129. RD JJ 1 LIT YES Y RATED VOLTAGE CIRCUIT ACROSS TERMINALS BREAKER MAGNETIC L1 R 12 5 AND L3 T CONTACTOR AND INPUT POWER YES FAULT mls amal SHOWN ON GO TO APPROPRIATE 6 5 6 13 Y DISPLAY RUN YES amp NO _ ___ gt DISPLAY U1 10 ON CONTROL BY INPUT STATUS EXT INPUTS 1 1 1 i I 3 WIRE CONTROL Y 2WIRECONTROL NO FWD RUN STOP CONTROL STOP COMMAND CLOSE amp REV RUN STOP BY DIGITAL STILL ON STOP BOTH OFF INPUT A OPERATOR OPEN CIRCUIT COMMAND OPEN CIRCUITS FROM 3 gt 1 RUN STOP BETWEEN TERMINAL 11 TO COMMAND _ TERMINALS 11 AND 2 INPUT TERMINALS 1 AND 2 DIGITAL NO INO OPERATOR FWD RELEASE ASSEMBLY RUN LIS FAULTY COMMAND ON NO INPUT RUN onions REPLACE MOMENTARY INPUT COMMAND CLOSED CIRCUITS FROM COMMAND TERMINALS 11 AND 1 TERMINALS LAND 2 PUL YES 0 APPROX FROM DRIVE S TERMINAL 15 TO 17 CONTROL POWER CIRCUIT IS FAULTY YES Y PROPER FREQUENCY CHECK EXTERNAL REFERENCE INPUT CIRCUITS FOR TERMINAL 17 TO 13 01 15 14 01 16 OR 16 01 17 Pise AND i YE Y TO NEXT PAGE 6 11 CHECK CON NECTIONS FOR PROBLEM AND REPAIR PROPER CONNECT
130. RMINE THE OPTIMUM SETTING FOR WHICH THE MOTOR WILL NOT HUNT CHECK FOR PROBLEM IN MOTOR MECHANICAL SYSTEM OR BRAKE REDUCE ASR OUTPUT LAG TIME C5 06 BY SMALL AMOUNTS UNTIL AMOUNT OF CHATTER IS ACCEPTABLE TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6 5 CHART 6 5 oV Overvoltage FAULT INDICATION IS INPUT AC SUPPLY NO VOLTAGE CORRECT V DECREASE TO PROPER VOLTAGE YES RANGE WITH DRIVE IN 2 OS STOPPED CONDITION INCREASE DECELER DURING DECEL ATION TIME BY ERATION REPROGRAMMING C1 02 C1 04 C1 06 NO OR C1 08 REMOVE NOISE SOURCE Y CONNECT SURGE ERRONEOUS SUPPRESSOR TO RELAY OPERATION DUE AND MAGNETIC CON Y TO NOISE TACTOR COILS DOES OV TRIP i STILL OCCUR NO e PROVIDE LINE FILTER DURING TO REMOVE NOISE ON ERATION INPUT POWER LINE ves x CONTROL SIGNALS TO m SE GATE DRIVE PCB ARE eee NO _ OPTION FAULTY REPLACE INSTALLED CONTROL PCB ives ADD BRAKING OPTION CHECK LOAD OR REPLACE DRIVE INERTIA WITH ONE OF LARGER REQUIREMENTS CAPACITY TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6 6 CHART 6 6 PUF DC Bus Fuse Open FAULT INDICATION DISCONNECT LEADS FROM OUTPUT TERMINALS T1 U T2 V AND T3 W y ARE MOTOR WINDINGS SHORTED T1 TO T2 MOTOR T2 TO T3 OR T3 TO T1 IS FAULTY NO Y ARE DRIVE OUTPUT PHASES LOC
131. SISTOR UNIT PART OF USER SUPPLIED EXTERNAL CIRCUIT lt 2 120 gt THRX POWER THRX OFF N 1M FAULT Figure A6 4 Wiring Single Braking Transistor Unit Remote Mount Resistor Unit to Drive GPD515C A049 thru A080 CIMR G5M20111F thru 20181F B041 thru B080 40181F thru 40371F and C041 C052 50301F and 50371F 5 The Braking Transistor Unit and Remote Mount Resistor Unit MUST BE GROUNDED Observe the following precautions Use grounding leads conforming to National Electrical Code e lf the installation requires the Remote Mount Resistor Unit to be used without its enclosure with grounding terminal ground it by attaching a ground lead at one of the mounting screws e Grounding resistance of the Braking Transistor Unit should be 100 ohms or less For 600V Units use terminal 1 Fuse required only if UL CUL certification is needed See separate instruction sheet 02Y00025 0393 for details A6 6 REMOTE MOUNT RESISTOR REMOTE MOUNT RESISTOR P BRAKING TRANSISTOR UNIT 2 REMOTE MOUNT RESISTOR UNIT B REMOTE PART OF USER SUPPLIED EXTERNAL CIRCUIT POWER THRX OFF MOUNT RESISTOR UNIT REMOTE MOUNT RESISTOR UNIT NOTE Connect only the number of braking transistor units and remote mount resistor units required for the application Figure A6 5 Wiring Multiple Braking Transistor Units and Remot
132. STOP LEDs will be illuminated V Example 4 Remote Sequence 2 Wire amp Remote Reference 4 20 mA m Forward Run External 4 20mA Source GPD 515 G5 mod Control Wiring Schematic K2 Reverse Run Analog TEA mn Common Frequency Ref U1 01 0 00 uz 4 20 Freq Ref Shield Drain Wire i a To Terminal 12 This configuration is used when the start amp stop signals and the frequency reference come from a remote source such as a PLC It can also be used with a maintained switch when it is desirable to have the drive restart on restoration of power It should not be used where safety of attending personnel might be threatened by a restart OPERATION e Close K1 to Run Forward e Close K2 to Run Reverse f both K1 amp K2 are closed the drive stops and displays the error message EF External Fault e Frequency reference is proportional to the signal level at Terminal 14 4mA 0 Hz 12mA 30 Hz amp 20mA 60 Hz e ifthe LOCAL REMOTE key is pressed the drive will behave the same as illustrated in Example 1 Table 5 Programming Required For Remote 2 wire Sequence amp Remote 4 20 mA Reference Description This parameter can be found under the Initialize menu A1 03 Init Parameters 2220 CAUTION Setting this value will reset all parameters to their original factory settings all previous adjustments will be lost When th
133. Servo command Open Zero Servo OFF Closed Zero Servo ON See paragraph 5 49 A NOTES 1 ASR gain selection Closed ASR proportional gain is set according to C 5 03 All contact closures must be maintained except for speed search Data 61 62 amp 64 which may be momentary see paragraph 5 32 D Column headings refer to set value of 1 02 Control Method 0 V f 1 V f w PG 2 Open loop vector 3 Flux vector 5 61 5 32 MULTI FUNCTION INPUT TERMINALS Term 3 8 Continued A Data 1 Local Remote Set b1 01andb1 02 to data 1 to select external inputs as the source for frequency reference and operation commands The use of a Local Remote command input allows switching between Digital Operator control and the external terminal input signals without the need to re program b1 01 and b1 02 If the status of the Local Remote command input is changed while the drive is running the Local Remote operation selection is not completed until the next time the drive is stopped Closed Controlled locally Digital Operator Open Controlled according to the setting of b1 01 and b1 02 NOTE If manual speed is selected by the external Auto Manual switch 355 2 wire or 28S 3 wire by jumper from terminal 5 to 11 2 wire control or by jumper from terminal 6 to 11 3 wire control the drive speed reference will be controlled by manual speed reference regardl
134. The factory configuration for 2 wire control is H1 05 6 for JOG1 input at terminal 7 e The factory configuration for 3 wire control is H1 06 6 for JOG1 input at terminal 8 To select JOG2 FWD set data 12 into one of these parameters To select JOG2 REV set data 13 into one of these parameters JOG2 does not require an active RUN command to allow Jog operation 2 JOG2 FWD or REV has priority over FWD and REV Run in the 2 wire control configuration and priority over RUN STOP and FWD REV commands in 3 wire control configuration 3 JOG2 FWD and JOG2 REV can be selected independently 4 b1 04 1 Reverse Run disabled will override JOG2 REV Also see descriptions of MULTI FUNCTION INPUT TERMINALS and RESET CODES 5 38 5 25 LOCAL REMOTE AND REFERENCE SELECTION d1 01 Memory 1 d1 06 Memory 6 Factory setting d1 02 Memory 2 d1 07 Memory 7 d1 01thrud1 08 0 00 d1 03 Memory 3 d1 08 Memory 8 d1 09 6 00 d1 04 Memory 4 d1 09 Jog Reference Range all 0 00 to 400 00 Hz d1 05 Memory 5 See paragraph 5 24 H3 05 Multi function Analog Input Term 16 See paragraph 5 30 b1 02 Operation Method Selection H1 03 thru H1 06 1 Multi function Input Terminals data 3 4 5 and e or C respectively for Reference Select 1 2 and Jog EE neler Analog Input at Term 16 See paragraph 5 31 For Local Remote select see paragraph 5 31 data 1 description
135. X Temp OH2 Over Heat 2 OL1 Motor Overloaded DESCRIPTION External fault signal at terminal 5 External fault signal at terminal 6 External fault signal at terminal 7 External fault signal at terminal 8 SI F G Communications Error EPROM write in fault PID Feedback Reference Loss Ground fault Drive output has open phase Overcurrent Cooling fin overheat Drive overheat Drive overheat Pre alarm Motor overload Fault Indication and Details Continued TYPE DETAILS Note 1 A fault condition has occurred in the external circuit s monitored by the contact providing input to the indicated terminal Stop mode selection possible H1 01 thru H1 06 See Section 5 17 Note 3 A communications error occurred and b1 03 3 and or b1 02 3 drive failure Cycle power then attempt to initialize Replace Control card PID feedback reference loss detection is enabled b5 12 1 or 2 and the PID feedback input is less than the PID feedback loss detection level b5 13 for longer than the PID feedback loss detection time b5 14 Drive output ground current exceeded 50 of driverated current Problem in drive to motor wiring Enable disable with L8 07 Drive output current exceeded 200 of drive rated current Note 3 Heatsink fin temperature exceeded the setting of L8 02 Note 3 Heatsink fin temperature exceeded 105 C 221 F Note 3 or internal cooling
136. Y YASKAWA GPD 515 G5 Drive Technical Manual This Manual also available on www drives com 515 G5 Models GPD515C and CIMR G5M Document Number TM 4515 GPD 515 G5 Simplified Startup Procedure This procedure is a simplified step by step guide to installing programming and using the GPD515 G5 drive It highlights several common installation configurations INSTALLATION vip 1 Be certain your input voltage source motor and drive nameplates are all marked either 230V 460V or 575 600V Other voltages can be used but require additional programming Frequency Ref 01 01 0 00 Hz DIGITAL OPERATOR JVOP 130U CAUTION Verify that the input voltage matches the drive s nameplate BEFORE applying power or severe damage will result SAS 3 v 2 J T 2 Mount drive on a vertical surface with adequate space for air circulation 4 7 above and below 1 2 on each side 3 Remove front cover fit conduit to bottom plate and connect power and ground wires as shown CAUTION BE CERTAIN YOU CONNECT INPUT POWER TO TERMINALS L1 L2 AND L3 ONLY OR SERIOUS DAMAGE WILL RESULT CONNECT MOTOR TO TERMINALS T1 T2 AND T3 ONLY POWER WIRING SCHEMATIC CHARGE Note Exact terminal configuration LIGHT 3 PHASE may vary with drive rating INPUT POWER 00 TO 00 GROUND 4 Replace cover and apply input power digital operato
137. a PG X2 option board must be mounted onto the drive The encoder then wires to the PG X2 option board Table 1 5 and Figure 1 5 show connections for the PG X2 and some typical encoders Table 1 5 Encoder PG Connection PG X2 EPC 1 DYNAPAR DYNAPAR LAKESHORE FUNCTION TERMINAL MODEL H 20 2 HS 35 NORTHSTAR TA1 755A Pin 4 SL 56 12V 200mA White D D 6 0V Black F F 1 5V No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection A Red A A A Green H H B Brown B B B Yellow l SHIELD Shield No Connection 1 For PG EPC Model 755A Orange and Blue wires are not used 2 For PG Dynapar H 20 pins C G and J are not used The PG X2 card also has a connector TA2 which provides processed PG signal output for use by an external pulse monitor This connection can be made according to Figure 1 5 1 24 PG input per Table 1 Pulse Monitor Ouptut RS422 Compatible 300kHz 2 ouptut max NOTE Wiring distance from GPD 515 G5 to pulse monitor 100m or less 9 300 KHz 2 input max GPD 515 G5 panel or GPD 515 G5 enclosure E PG X2 Card Factory wiring TB1 to TA1 Isolated Power Supply 12V Optical Isolation Line Receiver 1 P lt L I J Factory Connection to control terminal 12 1 Customer supplied 2 Refer to Section 2 2b or 2 2d PG X2 to calculate frequency 3 Z pu
138. age EXAMPLE To display Line Speed based on 54 32 FPM at 60 Hz 01 03 setting 25432 neffective when in Flux Vector Control mode 5 11 DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY SELECTION Continued Exceptions to the general format are as follows 01 03 DISPLAY 10000 1000 0 20000 100 00 30000 10 000 CAUTION When setting a value in 01 03 the decimal point position selected will automatically affect all of the Frequency Reference Memory Settings 41 01 thru d1 09 see Table A1 4 EXAMPLE 01 03 factory setting 00000 d1 09 Jog factory setting 006 00 6 Hz 01 03 changed to 10600 1 Decimal point at X X X X 91 09 setting becomes 0060 0 Therefore for 10 00 Hz Jog frequency d1 09 must be reprogrammed to 001 00 01 04 Digital Operator Display Units Factory setting 0 Range Oor 1 This parameter sets the frequency units for Flux ECLOG ON Vector mode Hertz The setting of 01 04 affects the following parameters E1 04 Maximum Frequency E1 06 Base Frequency E1 07 Mid Frequency A E1 09 Minimum Frequency E1 11 Mid Frequency B 01 05 Parameter Address Display Selection Factory setting 0 Range Oor 1 This parameter selects whether the parameter Setting Description addresses are displayed on the Digital Operator by parameter number or by its corresponding MODBUS address number 0 Parameter Number 1 MODBUS Address 5 12 DISPLAY
139. ails e Close pushbutton PB1 momentarily while pushbutton PB2 is closed and the drive will run at the frequency setting in U1 01 Pushbutton PB1 does NOT need to be maintained e Open pushbutton PB2 at any time and the drive will stop e If switch SW1 is open the drive will run in the forward direction If switch SW 1 is closed the drive will run in the reverse direction Switch SW 1 can be operated with the drive running at any speed e ifthe LOCAL REMOTE key is pressed the drive will behave the same as illustrated in Example 1 Table 4 Programming Required For Remote 3 wire Sequence amp Local Reference Display Text This parameter can be found under the Initialize menu A1 03 Init Parameters CAUTION Setting this value will reset all parameters to their No Initialize 3330 original factory settings all previous adjustments will be lost When the drive completes the reset this parameter returns to 0 No Initialize pe ee E Sets the frequency reference to come from the digital operator Operator Display will read Reference Source Operator Motor Rated FLA Sets the motor full load amps E2 01 Set U1 01 Frequency Ref User Sets the desired frequency reference Settable by pressing U1 01 XX XX HZ Set MENU DATA ENTER then DATA ENTER again Use the arrow keys to set the desired value then press DATA ENTER NOTE After the above adjustments have been made the DRIVE FWD SEQ and
140. ained from the No Load Current 000 60 A motor nameplate If it is unavailable use the following formula to calculate it 1 5 HP INLA x 0 50 No Load Current 000 32 A 2 5 15 0 40 gt 15 0 30 Write value to memory by pressing DATA ENTER Set motor no load current using Entry Accepted briefly then No Load Current 2 03 0 32A Enter number of motor poles E2 04 Press then DATA Z ENTER Number of Poles 04 Assuming an fg of 50 or 60 Hz Rated Speed Set number of motor poles using RPM of motor poles 2400 3600 2 Number of Poles 04 1300 1800 ia 4 900 1200 6 660 900 8 Write value to memory by pressing DATA ENTER Note Entry Accepted This step is not required for briefly then Open Loop Vector Control method A1 02 0 Number of Poles 2 04 4 Parameters E2 05 to 2 09 Factory set values are acceptable 2 23 2 5 TEST RUN USING DIGITAL OPERATOR LOCAL CONTROL The operation shown in Figure 2 3 and described in Table 2 5 is for a standard 60 Hz motor FWD ROTATION CHANGE FREQ AT 15HZ REFERENCE OUTPUT FREQUENCY DECEL lt M 2 22222022 WM pK ACCEL
141. al The result of the PID algorithm is then used as the new frequency reference or is added to the existing speed reference b5 11 pe Option Card PID Output Reverse Selection Modbus Com Com ol Terminal 13 14 Terminal 13 14 L 2 ol 0 b5 01 PID Control Mode Selection Reverse Allowed PID Setpoint Terminal 16 or 14 b5 10 H3 05 or PID Output H3 09 C U1 37 Gain H3 05 C or H3 09 C PID Disable x 1 x 1 Multi function b5 09 Multi Function Input Terminal Input Terminal PID Output 9 PID Setpoint Integral Hold Data 31 Data 19 Select Modbus Register Integral Reset Data 30 06H Modbus Register B Limit FH 1 PID Feedback b5 08 Terminal 16 or 14 x PID Del H3 05 B or pem E O H3 09 gm x b5 04 A 06 PID Offset B5 07 b5 05 1 3 30 b5 01 PID Selection Factory setting 0 Range O to 4 Using this parameter PID control can be enabled and the type of PID control can be selected PID Disabled PID Enabled D Feedback PID Enabled D Feed forward PID Enabled Reference PID D Feedback PID Enabled Reference PID D Feedback forward 5 78 5 36 PID CONTROL Continued B Setpoint Reference Selection b1 01 Reference Selection Factory setting 1 Range O to 4 d1 01thrud1 09 Multi step Frequency Factory settings d1 09 6 0 Presets all others 0 0 Range
142. al Remote Selection 5 39 Multiple Speed Reference Configuration Multi step Speed Operation I to ie ds 5 40 Miscellaneous Parameters 5 44 Miscellaneous Protective Features 5 46 MODBUS Control u en pr o bae 5 48 Momentary Power Loss Ride thru 5 50 Multi function Analog Inputs Term 14 amp 16 5 53 Multi function Analog Monitor Output Term 21 23 5 57 Multi function Input Terminals Term 3 8 5 58 e Local Remote nm 5 62 e External Base Block Suec te petere teda 5 63 e Speed Search does Suo assecuti uU tese MM E 5 64 5 66 e Sample Hold Command 5 66 e Up Down Frequency Setting 5 67 Trim GOntfol 5 69 xii PARAGRAPH SUBJECT 33 34 35 36 97 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 0000000 QO O O C1 C1 C1 O1 O1 aA C1 O O1 GQ S gt gt gt UO b e App App App Index 45 1 CONTENTS Multi function Output Terminals Term 9 amp 10 25 27 5 70 e Frequency o
143. attern 1 60 HZ Saturation KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY I lt then twice Main Menu MENU Z Programming m Press then 3 times B DATA A Group E ENTER Motor X Z Press DATA ENTER Function E1 V F Pattern Press DATA ENTER nominal input line voltage using lt J ZJ twice then set the drive to the Input Voltage 460 VAC Write to memory by pressing DATA ENTER Entry Accepted briefly then Input Voltage 1 01 460 VAC twice then DATA ENTER E1 03 F User Defined V F Then set the drive to desired V F pattern Write to memory by pressing DATA ENTER E E1 03 1 60 HZ Saturation V F Selection 60 HZ Saturation p NS Entry Accepted briefly then 2 2d continued DESCRIPTION Display motor speed KEY SEQUENCE Press DATA sb Lg then QZ DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY Function F1 Monitor Press pata then 4 times ENTER A Motor Speed U1 05 0 00 HZ Rotate the motor shaft counter clockwise by hand as viewed from the load end of the motor As the shaft is turned counter clockwise a low positive speed should be indicated e As the shaft is turned clockwise a low negative speed should be indicated If the speed doesn t change when the mot
144. atterns shown are for 230V input for other input multiply all V values by Viy 230 i e for 460V input multiply by 460 230 2 For 575V input multiply by 575 2 5 230 5 107 5 48 V f PATTERN CUSTOM Factory Setting 230 4600r575V Range 155 to 255 V 230V ratings 310 to 510 V 460V ratings 445 to 733 V 600V ratings A 1 01 Input Voltage Setting This parameter should be set to match the rated nominal input voltage Initial Voltage Values 230V RATINGS 460V RATINGS 600V RATINGS B 1 04 Maximum Output Frequency E1 05 Maximum Voltage 230 0 V 460 0 V 575 0 V E1 06 Base Frequency E1 07 Mid Output Frequency A E1 08 Mid Output Voltage 12 6 V 25 8 V 36 6 V E1 09 Min Output Frequency E1 10 Min Output 2 3 V 4 6 V 6 5 V E1 11 Mid Output Frequency B E1 12 Mid Output VoltageB 0 0 V 0 0 V 0 0 V E1 13 Base Vollage 0 0 V 0 0 V 0 0 V These ten parameters define the custom V f pattern only if E1 03 is set to F see paragraph 5 47 The illustration below shows how these constants relate to each other in establishing the custom V f pattern Vmax E1 05 VB E1 12 Vbase 1 13 OUTPUT VOLTAGE VA E1 08 Vmin E1 10 Fmin FA Fbase FB Fmax E1 09 E1 07 E1 06 E1 11 E1 04 OUTPUT FREQUENCY V f Characteristics Set by E1 04 thru
145. c kuk P P P P B P P p RONDO S O m gt G N N N 2 20 N N o 2 2d G NMONNNNYD OQ GQ N CONTENTS GPD 515 G5 SIMPLIFIED START UP PROCEDURE QUICK REFERENCE FOR GPD 515 PARAMETERS xiv CURRENT RATINGS amp HORSEPOWER RANGE xvii WARNING CAUTION STATEMENTS xviii WARRANTY REGISTRATION xxi INSTALLATION aaa a usia 1 1 Qeneral ML EE 1 1 R ec eiNing ror 1 1 Physical Installation HR 1 1 Electrical Installattont 2 2 o i ne ede qayaqa sasa 1 2 Main Circuit Input Output i uei emen teen 1 2 Gro nding u ES 1 11 Auxiliary Input and Output Power Option Devices 1 11 Conformance to European EMC Directive 1 13 Control CIEOUIL cce c a up DAL a a Ed 1 15 Interconnection 2 Wire Control Fig 1 3 1 20 Interconnection 3 Wire Control Fig 1 4 1 22 Encoder PG X2 Connections 1 24 INITIAL START UP LOCAL CONTROL 2 1 Pr power Checks 2 1 Control Method Selection
146. c application including Remote 2 wire or 3 wire Control See Section 5 for description of programmable features and also see instruction sheets for any options included with the drive Record all parameter values see Quick Reference sheets at the front of this manual 2 7 STORAGE FUNCTION The drive uses internal NV RAM to store information when power is removed or in the event of a power failure Therefore when power is reapplied operation will begin at the same state as when power was removed The following information is stored Last Main Speed Reference setting and forward reverse selection from Digital Operator The sequence of failure conditions that occurred before power was removed including content of a CPF failure 2 27 2 28 Section 3 OPERATION AT LOAD After completing the start up and programming of parameters turn off the AC main circuit power Make additional wiring connections required for the external control functions selected by the parameter programming Connect the driven machine to the motor Verify that the driven machine is in running condition and that no dangerous conditions exist around the drive system CAUTION When starting and stopping the motor use the operation signals RUN STOP FWD REV NOT the magnetic contactor on the power supply side if present Run the motor under load with control by the Digital Operator using the same procedure as for the Test Run Tabl
147. conds Parameter C 5 03 is used as an additional proportional gain adjustment and parameter C5 04 determines the response time for Proportional Gain 2 C5 03 C H1 01thru H1 06 Multi function Data E ASR Integral Reset IRST Input Terminal Function Selection Term 3 thru 8 By programming data E into one of the ASR multi function input parameters H1 01 thru I RESET GPD 1 06 of the multi function input terminals 3 thru 8 becomes an ASR integral reset When there is a long time lag between the applying of control power and actual run operation output voltage may be produced due to the integrator offset In such cases the integral reset function should be ON until the start of run operation D C5 06 ASR Output Lag Time Factory setting 4 Range 0 to 500 msec This function is used as a filter for mechanical problems such as mechanical backlash play etc which may prevent the ASR proportional gain from being increased as adjusted 5 8 CARRIER FREQUENCY C6 01 Carrier Frequency Upper Limit Factory Setting See Table A3 1 C 6 02 Carrier Frequency Lower Limit Range each 0 4 to 15 0 kHz C 6 03 Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain Factory Setting See Table A1 3 Range 0 to 99 The relationship between output frequency and carrier frequency is determined from the set values of C6 01 to C6 03 a For constant carrier frequency se
148. contact always detected and CONTACT drive to continue operation H1 01 2D 5 28 5 18 FREQUENCY REFERENCE BIAS GAIN H3 02 Frequency Reference Gain Term 13 Factory setting each 100 0 H3 06 Frequency Reference Gain Term 16 Range each 0 0 to 1000 0 H3 10 Frequency Reference Gain Term 14 These parameters can be used to set the frequency command gain in increments of 0 1 for its respective terminal H3 03 Frequency Reference Bias Term 13 Factory setting each 0 0 H3 07 Frequency Reference Bias Term 16 Range each 100 0 to 100 0 H3 11 Frequency Reference Bias Term 14 These parameters can be used to set the frequency command bias in increments of 0 1 for its respective terminal NOTE If H3 09 1F H3 10 and H3 11 have no effect Gain and bias for terminal 14 are set by H3 02 and H3 03 respectively FREQ REF INPUT V INPUT V Jo 100 BIAS ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE A For 0 10 Vdc input term 13 or 16 lie With no input adjust Bias H3 03 or H3 07 setting until an output of 0 0 Hz is obtained 2 With full scale input adjust Gain H3 02 or H3 06 setting until an output of 60 0 Hz or other desired max output frequency is obtained B For 4 20mA input term 14 1 With 4mA input adjust Bias H3 11 setting until an output of 0 0 Hz is obtained 2 With 20mA input adjust Gain H3 10 se
149. ct or two different open collector FUNCTION outputs can be programmed to change states _ OPEN during any of the conditions indicated in Table gt COLLECTOR 5 3 OUTPUTS 48Vdc AT 50mA MAX IMPORTANT If an open collector output is applied to a DC relay the relay MUST be diode protected as shown in the recommended configuration below 48Vdc MAX Recommended Configuration for DC Relays L DC RELAY DECRE Customer supplied 5 70 5 33 MULTI FUNCTION OUTPUT TERMINALS Term 9 amp 10 25 27 Continued H2 01 thru H2 03 Data Settings Table 5 3 CONDITION During Operation SIGNAL LEVEL Closed Drive is operating AVAILABILITY See Note 1 om 2 3 Zero speed Closed Drive is at 0Hz Speed at set frequency 1 Closed Freq Ref L4 02 lt output freq lt Freq Ref L4 02 See Data description following this table Speed coincidence 1 Closed Speed at set frequency and 14 01 14 02 lt output freq lt L4 01 L4 02 See Data description following this table Frequency detection 1 low Closed Output frequency lt L4 01 See Data description following this table Frequency detection 1 high Closed Output frequency gt L4 01 See Data description following this table Operation ready Closed Drive is ready for operation During undervoltage detection Closed Undervoltage detected During base block
150. cted during running and operation continues after detection Detected during speed agree and drive faults Detected during running and drive faults A1 22 Table A1 8 Drive LX XX Parameters Continued PARAMETER FUNCTION INCRE SETTING FACTORY ACCESS LEVEL para DESCRIPTION Senne Note 4 NUMBER NAME MENT RANGE SETTING REF L6 02 Torque 1 0 300 Detection Level 1 Torque Detection Time 1 Torque Disabled Detection Detected during speed Selection 2 agree and operation continues after detection Detected during running and operation continues after detection Detected during speed agree and drive faults Detected during running and drive faults Torque Detection Level 2 Torque Detection Time 2 L7 01 Forward 1 0 300 200 5 45 Torque Limit L7 02 Reverse 1 0 300 200 5 45 Torque Limit Forward 1 0 300 200 5 45 Regenerative Torque Limit Reverse 1 0 300 200 5 45 Regenerative Torque Limit Internal 0 Not provided 0 1 0 BIBIBIB 527 Dynamic 1 Provided Braking Resistor Protection OH Overheat See Note 1 A 527 Protection Alarm Level A1 23 PARAMETER NUMBER L8 03 Table A1 8 Drive LX XX Parameters Continued FUNCTION NAME Operation Selection After OH Overheat Pre alarm Input Open phase Protection Selection Output Open phase Protection Selection Output Ground Fault Detection Selection IGBT Protection at Low
151. ctory setting 1 00 Range 0 00 to 2 50 AUTO TORQUE BOOST V F PATTERN gt PROGRAMMED V F PATTERN NO LOAD Example of Torque Compensation The calculation of compensated torque uses the following formula Vac lace Cos WI Rcable Operation KT Compensated Value Where WI E2 07 E2 08 Reable E2 05 Kr 4 01 Power Factor calculated by the drive Adjusted by Auto tune feature 5 93 Frequency 5 42 TORQUE COMPENSATION Continued C4 03 Forward Torque Compensation At Start Open Loop Vector Only C4 04 Reverse Torque Compensation At Start Open Loop Vector Only C4 05 Torque Compensation At Start Time Constant Open Loop Vector Only Factory setting 0 0 Range 0 0 to 200 0 Factory setting 0 0 Range 200 0 to 0 0 Factory setting 1 0 Range 0 to 200 ms Parameters C4 03 thru C4 05 help to improve the starting breakaway torque response when using the open loop vector control method A 1 02 2 The amount of torque applied at start when a forward run is commanded is set by parameter C 4 03 The amount of torque applied at start when a reverse run is commanded is set by parameter C 4 04 The amount of time that the torque is applied is controlled by parameter C 4 05 5 94 5 43 TORQUE CONTROL COMMAND NOTE This function can only be used in Flux Vector control me
152. cuit Power Charge Indication CHARGE lamp remains lit until bus voltage drops below 50 V Location Indoor protected from corrosive gases and dust Ambient Temperature 10 to 40 C 14 to 104 F for NEMA 1 10 to 45 C 14 to 113 F for protected chassis Environmental Conditions Storage Temperature Note 3 20 to 60 4 to 140 F Humidity 95 RH no condensation Vibration 1 G at less than 20 Hz up to 0 2 G at 20 to 50 Hz Elevation 3300 ft 1000 m or less SECTION D All VCMs Rated speed 1750 rpm 4 poles 60Hz Pulse Generator 1024 ppr Thermistor Standard Load Connection Direct coupling or belt drive Insulation Type Class F Ambient Temperature 20 to 40 C 4 to 104 F Location Indoor NOTES 1 Overload capacity 150 of rated for 60 sec See paragraph 5 29 for detailed information Temperature during shipping Storing in this temperature for a long period may deteriorate main circuit capacitor N 1HP motor VMBOO1C is an inverter duty foot mount with C Face A2 4 Appendix 3 CAPACITY amp CONTROL METHOD RELATED PARAMETERS Parameter o2 04 Drive Capacity Selection is factory preset per the input voltage and output current ratings of the drive although the drive displays the voltage and kW rating This parameter setting determines the factory settings for the parameters listed in the table below If the Control PCB has been r
153. d Overspeed OV Overvoltage DC Bus Overvolt PF drive input phase missing Input Pha Loss PG cable wires are disconnected Fuse blown PUF DC Bus Fuse Open A 70 RH DynBrk Resistor Braking resistor overheat RR Braking transistor failure DynBrk Transistor Short circuit on drive output terminals SC Short Circuit SVE Zero Servo fault Zero Servo Fault UV Momentary power loss DC Bus Undervolt Main circuit undervoltage UV1 9 DC Bus Undervolt Control circuit uya undervoltage CTL PS Undervolt UV3 Main contactor fault MC Answerback NOTES 1 A Alarm m Minor Fault M Major Fault TYPE DETAILS Note 1 M Note 2 Motor speed exceeds overspeed level F1 08 amp F1 09 Stop mode selection possible F1 03 Note 3 Detection level Approx 400VDC for 230V rated unit Approx 800V for 460VDC rated unit approx 1050 VDC for 600V rated unit Note 3 Incoming power supply has an open phase or a large imbalance exists between L1 L2 amp L3 Enable disable with L8 05 Pulse generator is disconnected from the PG X2 card Terminal TA1 DC fuse has cleared Check for short circuit in output circuitry Note 3 Braking resistor unit temperature exceeds the allowable value Heatsink mount resistor only and only if L8 01 1 Braking transistor failure Very low impedance on output o
154. d COM ERR OP amp INV drive was not established within 5 seconds E after power was applied or an internal hardware or software fault was detected on power up Note 3 and drive occurred for over 2 seconds after communication was last established or an internal hardware or software fault occurred after power up Note 3 COM ERR OP amp INV Communication error Control data was not received for 2 seconds after P CPFO01 Control circuit fault 2 Communication errors between the Digital Operator 6 1 Table 6 1 Fault Indication and Details Continued DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY CPF02 BB Circuit Failure CPF03 EPROM Error v 4 Internal A D Err J CPF05 External A D Err y CPF06 Option Error CPF20 Option A D Error CPF21 Option CPU down CPF22 Option Type Err ENBEBa gt CPF23 Option DPRAM Err Speed Deviation SI F G Com Err External Fault EFO Opt External Fit EF3 External Fault 3 EF4 External Fault 4 2 DESCRIPTION DETAILS Note 1 Baseblock circuit fault Drive failure Note 3 Replace Control card EPROM fault Internal A D fault External A D fault Option card Check option card connection connection failure Option card failure Note 3 A D converter fault in Option card Al 14B A D converter malfunction Analog Speed Note 3
155. d will void the warranty xix Technical Training It is important that users of our products have a totally satisfying ownership experience Training is one of the most effective ways to ensure that satisfaction Because of this conviction Yaskawa Electric has operated a full time professional training department since 1965 Our trainers are full time instructors with a wealth of real life product experience gained through field service at customer facilities This experience combined with backgrounds in engineer ing and education has earned national recognition for our technical training programs Courses are conducted at the headquarters training facility in selected cities and at customer sites Courses are available to cover all the issues of concern to product users application theory of operation troubleshooting and repair adjustment and startup operation programming network communication and optimizing the functions of Yaskawa drives We work hard to make all of our products user friendly and our owner manuals easy to use In spite of that the simple fact is that you will learn better and faster in a class environment combined with hands on practice than by self teaching when under the stress of a maintenance or operations problem On Site Training and Customized Courses Training courses are also provided at the user s site Course content can be customized to the specific installation and applica tio
156. d with the torque limit function which means that the lowest value torque limit setting will have priority EXAMPLE Forward Torque Limit L7 01 80 FWD Torque Limit Term 16 100 10V The L7 01 value will have priority over the analog reference value Data 1 1 REV Torque Limit The multi function analog input at terminal 16 may be configured to allow analog control of the torque limit for both FWD amp REV modes However the analog reference controls both REV torque limit amp FWD regen torque limit GPD 515 G5 TORQUE LIMIT 10V uoa MULTI FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT 1R is a calibration pot only NOTE A minimum priority circuit is associated with the torque limit function which means that the lowest value torque limit setting will have priority 5 102 5 85 TORQUELIMIT Continued Data 1 2 Regenerative Torque Limit The multi function analog input at terminal 16 may be configured to allow analog control of the torque limit for both FWD amp REV modes However the analog reference controls both FWD torque limit amp REV regenerative torque limits GPD 515 G5 H3 05 12 TORQUE i LIMIT 10V MULTI FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT 1R is a calibration pot only NOTE A minimum priority circuit is associated with the torque limit function which means that the lowest value torque limit setting will have priority Data 13 FWD amp REV Torque Limit NOTE When H3 05 is set f
157. displayed set value has been changed as desired pressing this key will write the new set value into the drive memory to replace the old value IN DRIVE MODE OR PROGRAM MODE When a changeable data value is being displayed pressing this key moves the blinking i e hangeable position to the next digit to the right If at the right most position this will wrap around to the first position on the left side of the display up arrow IN DRIVE MODE OR PROGRAM MODE Pressing this key will increase the value of the blinking digit in the display by 1 Pressing this key will increase a parameter number by 1 Vv down arrow IN DRIVE MODE OR PROGRAM MODE Pressing this key will decrease the value of the blinking digit in the display by 1 Pressing this key will decrease a parameter number by 1 RUN COMMAND FREQUENCY REFERENCE OUTPUT FREQUENCY LAMP STOP LAMP o o e POWER PRESS PRESS ON RUN KEY STOP KEY 4 40 70 _ Dp _ 0 DLL C Off Blinking O Lighted Steady Figure 4 2 Functioning of RUN and STOP Lamps 4 3 4 3 DIGITAL OPERATOR MENU TREES A Quick start Access Level The flowchart tree below illustrates the process of accessing drive parameters when the Access Level is set to Quick Start 1 01 2 Display Function 1 or Parameter U1 01 Frequency Reference Parameter ti DATA MENU peration CENTER Drive
158. disturbances The proportional gain C5 01 adjusts the amount of instantaneous droop as a function of loss and provides damping from load disturbances such as speed reference change or a change in load The integral time C 5 02 adjusts the response time of the drive to the load disturbances NOTE Speed control response is increased by increasing the proportional gain setting and decreasing the integral time However instability or hunting may occur between the drive and the load if C5 01 ASR Proportional Gain is set too high or C5 02 ASR Integral Time is set too low ASR CIRCUIT OUTPUT SPEED 1 TORQUE REF T REF SPEED C5 01 C5 02 FEEDBACK OUTPUT TORQUE REF INTERNAL LIMITER INPUT ERROR 5 7 AUTOMATIC SPEED REGULATOR ASR Continued EXAMPLES OF C5 01 AND C5 02 ADJUSTMENTS ASR Gain C5 01 Adjustment Only ASR Integral Time C5 02 Adjustment Only Speed Ref 10 of max Speed Ref 10 of max C5 01 30 00 C5 01 30 00 C5 02 0 000 C5 02 10 000 SPEED 10 SPEED 10 6 996 Speed Ref 10 of max Speed Ref 10 of 5 01 60 00 5 01 30 00 5 02 0 000 5 02 1 000 SPEED 10 849 SPEED 10 o 5 7 AUTOMATIC SPEED REGULATOR ASR Continued B 5 03 ASR Proportional Gain 2 Factory setting 20 00 ASRP2 Range 0 00 to 300 00 C5 04 ASR Integral Time 2 Factory setting 0 500 ASRI2 Range 0 000 to 10 000 se
159. e 2 5 If the Digital Operator is used in combination with external commands or external commands only are used the procedure must be altered accordingly For preset starting one touch operation after setting the frequency perform the following 1 Set the speed and press RUN Motor accelerates at the rate corresponding to the preset accel time to the preset speed The accel time C1 01 is set too short relative to the load if the RPM of the accelerating motor does not increase smoothly or if a fault is displayed on the Digital Operator 2 Press STOP Unless coast to stop operation has been selected by programming of b1 03 the motor decelerates at the rate corresponding to the preset decel time C1 02 to a stop 3 2 Section 4 DIGITAL OPERATOR 4 1 GENERAL All functions of the GPD 515 G5 are accessed using the Digital Operator In addition to controlling motor operation the operator can enter information into the drive memory to configure the drive to the application by entering the Program mode 4 2 DISPLAY AND KEYPAD The Digital Operator has a 2 line by 16 character LCD display Both numeric and alpha numeric data can appear on the display Indicator lamps and keys on the Digital Operator are described in Figure 4 1 REMOTE Mode indication LEDs The LEDs light when REMOTE Mode has been selected either for Start Stop SEQ control or Frequency Reference REF Indicates which direction the m
160. e FREQUENCY Each is set in increments of COMMAND lt Accel ramp per 0 01 seconds fA selected Accel Time NOTE Actual accel time C2 01 C2 02 Set accel time p e CN TIME Actual decel time S Curve Characteristic C2 03 C2 04 Time Tsc Set decel time 2 The following figure shows FWD REV switching and amp deceleration to a stop with S curve active FORWARD RUN COMMAND REVERSE RUN COMMAND DC INJECTION TIME AT STOP b2 03 MIN OUTPUT FREQUENCY OUTPUT FREQUENCY 5 4 ACCESS LEVEL A A1 01 Parameter Access Level Factory setting 2 Range O to 4 This setting determines which parameters are Setting Description 4 t accessible which are also dependent upon the SO setting of the Control Method A1 02 Monitor Only User Program The default setting is for Quick start Access Level which 32 parameters Basic Access Quick start Level allows access to 90 additional parameters Basic Advanced Level accesses all parameters available Advanced for a given Control Method setting The User Program Access Level will only be available if one or more parameters are programmed into A2 01 through A2 32 See paragraph 4 3 for menu trees for each of the Access Levels and paragraph 4 5 Examples 1A and 1B for programming examples in different Access Levels B User Program Parameters A2 01 through
161. e Manual Speed Pot R1 all the way up Adjust the trim pot R2 so that the Frequency Reference display is just flickering between 59 99 Hz and 60 00 Hz This completes the trim pot calibration vii Example 6 Remote Sequence 2 Wire amp Remote Reference 0 10 VDC and three digital preset speeds n 1 External Forward Run 0 10 VDC Source GPD515 G5 0 7 Control Wiring Schematic 2 yu Reverse Run Q Frequency Ref Ul 01 0 00 Hz MULTI STEP 1 MUTLI STEP 2 JOG REF i P0 Shield Drain Wire To Terminal 12 This configuration is used when the start amp stop signals and the frequency reference come from a remote source such as a PLC It can also be used with a maintained switch when it is desirable to have the drive restart on restoration of power It should not be used where safety of attending personnel might be threatened by a restart Two digital speeds and a Jog speed can be selected using switches SW 1 thru SW3 OPERATION e Close K1 to Run Forward e Close K2 to Run Reverse e If both K1 amp K2 are closed the drive stops and displays the error message EF External Fault Frequency reference is determined by the status of switches SW 1 SW2 and SW3 e If the LOCAL REMOTE key is pressed the drive will behave the same as illustrated in Example 1 Ope Open Open JAnalogvaleonterm
162. e Mount Resistor Units to Drive GPD515C A130 thru A300 CIMR G5M20300F thru 20750F B096 thru B605 40451F thru 43000F and C062 thru C200 50451F thru 51600F For 600V Units use terminal 1 Fuse required only if UL CUL certification is needed See separate instruction sheet 02Y00025 0393 for details A6 7 6 IMPORTANT After wiring test insulation resistance of each Braking Transistor Unit Remote Mount Resistor Unit with a 900V megger as follows a Disconnect leads between the Braking Transistor Unit and the drive If equipment with semiconductors is connected across terminals 1 amp 2 of the Braking Transistor Unit remove the wiring REMOTE MOUNT b Connect common leads BRAKING f RESISTOR TRANSISTOR jumpers across Braking UNIT O UNIT N Transistor Unit terminals N P Po and B and across 3 amp 4 as shown in Figure A6 6 Measure the insulation resistance at points a b and c in Figure A6 6 with the megger Figure A6 6 Megger Testing Set up ADJUSTMENTS 7 ALL drives Program L 3 04 to 0 to disable stall prevention during deceleration 8 Only with Heat Sink Mount Resistor Program L8 01 to 1 to enable overheat protection for the braking resistor OPERATION CHECK 9 During dynamic braking operation verify that the BRAKE lamp inside the Braking Unit is lit 10 During dynamic braking operations ensure that the required deceleration characteristic is ob
163. e drive completes the reset this parameter returns to 0 No Initialize E2 01 Motor Rated FLA Sets the motor full load amps Set No Initialize E2 01 X XXA NOTE After the above adjustments have been made the DRIVE SEQ REF and STOP LEDs will be illuminated Vi Example 5 Remote Sequence 3 Wire amp Manual Reference Speed Potentiometer PB1 Start GPD 515 G5 Ha Control Wiring Schematic Optional STOP 15 VDC Frequency Ref MANUAL ul 0l 0 00 Hz 6 EREQUENCY REFERENCE 0 10V DC SW1 Forward d ANALOG COMMON Jumper Wire Shield Drain Wire i iE To Terminal 12 This configuration is best when a person rather than an external controller PLC relay etc controls the drive Both potentiometers R1 amp R2 should have a resistance value between 20000 and 30000 and be rated for at least 1 Watt The trim pot is optional but without it the manual speed pot will output 10V 60 Hz at just two thirds of its rotation A short jumper wire needs to be installed between terminals 6 amp 11 This jumper wire forces the frequency reference to come from the analog value on terminal 16 OPERATION Close pushbutton PB1 momentarily while pushbutton PB2 is closed and the drive will start Pushbutton PB1 does NOT need to be maintained e Open pushbutton PB2 at any time and the drive will stop e f switch SW1 is open the d
164. e potential in the resistance mode For these tests the lead refers to the positive potential Make sure you know which polarity you have on your VOM 6 28 6 6 CHECKING ENCODER PULSES In order to check the encoder pulses an oscilloscope is needed The pulses can be checked after they have been processed by the PG X2 card or at the motor The following tests require power to be applied to the drive while the front cover is off Proper precautions should be taken to prevent electric shock and damage to the equipment A Checking Encoder Pulses at Test Points on the PG X2 Card 1 Remove power from L1 L2 amp L3 and wait for the CHARGE light to go out 2 Connect the common of the oscilloscope to the test point labeled GND 3 Connect one channel of the scope to PA If the scope is two channel connect the second channel to PB 4 Set the scope for 2V div 50ms div normal trigger and rising edge trigger 5 Apply power to the GPD 515 but do NOT apply a run command 6 Turn the motor shaft by hand As Figure 6 1 shows there should be pulses on both channels at a 5V level 50 duty cycle and they should be separated by 90 electrical degrees half a pulse 7 If one or both channels do not have the correct pulses present i e missing pulses incorrect duty cycle improper voltage etc go to procedure B B Checking the Pulses at the Input to the PG X2 Card 1 Remove power from L1 L2 amp L3 and wait for the CHARGE l
165. e to V f Control ME Initialize Set A1 02 to 0 M _ Press _DATA _ then twice Control Method b ENTER Z Open Loop Vector Press _ then set drive to V f 4 A1 02 0 ENTER Control using V F Control A Z Write value to memory by pressing Entry Accepted ENTER Z briefly then Control Method B V F Control ES P 1 N Set parameter access level to Press then Main Menu Advanced This allows all MENU Initialize parameters to be viewed and x 22 modified n N Press DATA then Access Level ENTER Z Quick Start then set drive to Advanced 1 01 4 ENTER Using Advanced Level NS A AJ Write value to memory by pressing DATA ENTER E Entry Accepted J briefly then Access Level Advanced Level 2 2c continued DESCRIPTION Select the drive input voltage then select an appropriate V f pattern Refer to section 5 38 V F PATTERN STANDARD or 5 39 V F PATTERN CUSTOM NOTE A standard V f pattern for a 60 HZ motor is pattern 1 60 HZ Saturation KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY Press then twice 6 Main Menu MENU Z Programming Ne P Press DATA then 3 times di Group E h ENTER Motor A Press DATA Function E1 ENTER V F Pattern twice then set the drive to the nominal input line Press DATA ENTER
166. ed by monitoring the PG feedback pulses and correcting the position error However this function doesn t have the same capabilities of a position controller because there is no marker pulse feedback Therefore it will not stop in the same position every time the servo function is enabled CAUTION Applications that require decelerating large inertia loads in very short decel times may cause overshoots and a possible runaway condition causing equipment damage Adjustment of zero servo gain b9 01 may be required Setting b9 01 to 0 may correct a runaway condition b2 01 DC Injection Braking Start Frequency Factory setting 0 5 Range 0 0 to 10 0 Hz The speed level at which the zero servo function is enabled is determined by b2 01 DC Injection Braking Start Frequency and the closure of the multi function input This function also determines operation at zero speed 5 110 5 49 ZERO SERVO CONTROL Continued B b9 01 Zero Servo Gain Factory setting 5 Range 0 to 100 This function provides an adjustment for the position loop gain CAUTION The higher the gain the better the response However too high a gain can cause hunting or overshoot and possible runaway condition DC Injection Braking Start Freq b2 01 Zero Servo Position Error A position loop speed loop lt V zero servo Zero Servo Timing C b9 02 Zero Servo Completion Width Factory se
167. ed deviation fault occurs EXAMPLE F1 10 210 F1 11 0 5 sec 1 04 1 E1 04 Max Frequency 6 0 Hz As can be seen below the motor speed must drop over 10 below the speed reference for 0 5 seconds before a fault occurs 10 speed E1 04 x 0 1 60x 0 1 6Hz DEY Fault NOTE Only available in the V f w PG and Flux Vector Control Methods A1 02 1 or 3 5 23 5 15 ENCODER PG PARAMETERS Continued E F1 05 PG Rotation Factory setting 0 Range 0 Counter clockwise 1 Clockwise The setting of F1 05 determines how the drive interprets the incoming pulses from the pulse generator It can be used to change direction of the motor without having to change encoder wiring EXAMPLE To run a particular machine forward requires the motor shaft to turn in a clockwise direction when viewed from the output shaft end of the motor The motor encoder that is installed is running counter clockwise as forward in order to change the direction of the motor two of the motor leads need to be swapped and F1 05 needs to be changed to a 1 NOTE Only available in the V f w PG and Flux Vector control modes A1 02 1 or 3 F F1 07 Integral Value During Accel Decel Factory setting 0 Selection Range 0 Disabled 1 Enabled The setting of F1 07 determines whether the automatic speed regulator ASR integral operation is performed during accel decel NOTE Only available
168. ed motor TENV or TEBC 2 Vector Motor V f Pattern Selection 0 to E 15 preset V f patterns F Custom pattern using E1 04 thru E1 10 E1 13 Maximum Output Frequency Maximum Voltage Mid Output Frequency A Mid Output Voltage A Min Output Voltage A Mid Output Voltage B Base Voltage Hz 0 1V A1 12 40 0 400 0 0 0 255 0 230V ratings 0 0 510 0 460V ratings 0 0 733 1 600V ratings 0 0 400 0 60 0 0 0 400 0 See Note 1 0 0 255 0 230V ratings 0 0 510 0 460V ratings 0 0 733 1 600V ratings 0 0 400 0 See Note 1 0 0 255 0 230V ratings 0 0 510 0 460V ratings 0 0 733 1 600V ratings 0 0 255 0 230V ratings 0 0 510 0 460V ratings 0 0 733 1 600V ratings 0 0 255 0 230V ratings 0 0 510 0 460V ratings 0 0 733 1 600V ratings 230V ratings 460 0 460V ratings 575 0 600V ratings See Note 1 12 6 460V ratings 25 3 460V ratings 36 3 600V ratings See Note 1 2 3 460V ratings 4 6 460V ratings 6 5 600V ratings 0 0 400 0 0 0 0 0 gt gt 5 48 of 5 48 5 48 N 5 48 T 5 48 5 48 Table A1 5 Drive EX XX Parameters Continued PARAMETER FUNCTION INCRE SETTING DESCRIPTION NUMBER NAME MENT RANGE Motor Rated See 0 00 1500 0 Current Note 2
169. ed using the main circuit ground terminal f Drive is installed in a cabinet with other equipment ground leads for all equipment should be connected to a common low impedance ground point within the cabinet The supply neutral should be connected to the ground point within the cabinet Select appropriate ground wire size from Table 1 1 Make all ground wires as short as practical NEVER ground the drive in common with welding machines or other high power electrical equipment Where several drives are used ground each directly to the ground point see Figure 1 1 DO NOT FORM A LOOP WITH THE GROUND LEADS e When connecting a motor to the drive s output terminals include a separate ground wire Attach ground wire solidly to motor frame and to drive s ground terminal e When using armored or shielded cable for connection between drive and motor solidly connect armor or shield to motor frame and to the drive s ground terminal UM PREFERRED NOT RECOMMENDED NOT ACCEPTABLE A Grounding of Three Drives Ha Ma CORRECT NOT RECOMMENDED B Grounding of Drive amp Vector Control Motor VCM Figure 1 1 Grounding 1 4 3 Auxiliary Input and Output Power Option Devices A disconnect device circuit breaker contactor disconnect switch etc should NOT be used as a means of starting and stopping the drive or motor A disconnect device can be installed for emergency stop purposes but when t
170. eference fault reset drive status and setting and reading of parameters b1 01 Reference Selection Factory setting each 1 b1 02 Operation Method Selection Range each 0 to 4 Select the run command and frequency reference input method in b1 01 and b1 02 To provide a run command and frequency reference by communication set this data 2 Monitoring of run status parameter setting reading fault reset and multi function input command from the PLC are enabled The multi function input command is OR ed with the command input from control circuit terminals 3 8 EXAMPLE b1 01andb1 02 settings are 3 Open Run by frequency reference from control circuit terminal 13 or 14 and run command from control circuit terminal 1 or 2 Closed Run by frequency reference run command from serial communication 5 48 5 28 MODBUS CONTROL Continued H5 01 Serial Communication Station Address Factory setting 1 F Range 1 to 1F Hex 1 to 31 decimal Each slave on the same transmission line must be given a unique address H5 02 Serial Communication Baud Rate Factory setting 3 Range O to 4 Selects the baud rate as indicated by the following table Baud Rate BPS H5 03 Serial Communication Parity Selection Factory setting 0 Range O to 2 Selects the parity as indicated by the following table NOTE To change the
171. en at fault Common 1 17 OV Contact capacity 250 Vac at 1A or less 30 Vdc at 1A or less 5 6 7 008 External baseblock Drive output stops when closed 13 14 15 17 Table 1 3 Terminal Functions and Signals of Control Circuit Continued TERMINAL FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION SIGNAL LEVELS Multi function analog monitor 1 Output current Type of analog signal operation parameter to be or output output is selected by setting of parameters H4 01 frequency is and H4 04 Multi function analog monitor 2 selectable Monitor output 0 to 11V 2 mA maximum Multi function analog monitor Multi function open collector One of 18 functions Photocoupler insulation output 48V 50 mA output 1 available by setting maximum Multi function open collector of parameters H2 02 output 2 and H2 03 Frequency reference power supply 15V Control power supply for frequency setting max 20 mA NOTES 1 When Forward Run and Reverse Run inputs are both closed for more than 500 ms the Digital Operator displays a blinking EF alarm code and the motor if rotating is decelerated by the drive to a stop This stop condition is not stored by the drive on Digital Operator red LED at STOP key does not light IF ONE OF THE INPUTS IS OPENED THE MOTOR WILL IMMEDIATELY START UP AGAIN 2 Terminals 1 8 source 24 Vdc 8mA max and operate a Low True ON configuration when connected to terminal 11 Wh
172. en using relays for input to terminals 1 8 use relays with highly reliable contacts for very small current with a capacity of 30 Vdc or more and rated current of 100mA or higher When using transistor open collector input use transistors with rated voltage of 35 Vdc or more and rated current of 100mA or more 3 These terminals are multi function inputs The indicated functions are their settings based on a 2 Wire reset For 3 Wire reset definitions and other settings see descriptions for Multi Function Input Terminals parameters H1 01thru H1 06 in paragraph 5 32 1 18 1 4 5 Interconnection 2 Wire Control Operation Figure 1 3 Notes referred to in figure 1 3 10 11 Indicates components not supplied Branch circuit protection circuit breaker or input fuses must be supplied by customer Indicates customer connection terminal Wire only to terminals shown Note that not all terminals shown are available in all ratings see Tables 1 1 and 1 2 Indicates alternate terminal marking i e R and L1 Function labels shown for these terminals are determined by factory settings of parameters H1 01 through H1 06 See paragraph 5 32 Function labels shown for these terminals are determined by factory settings of parameters H2 01 through H2 03 See paragraph 5 33 Function labels shown for these terminals are determined by factory settings of parameters H3 01 04
173. ency Reference U1 03 Output Current Output Voltage 2 Display U1 06 Parameter U2 Fault Trace Function U3 Fault History Function U1 Monitor Function A1 01 Access Level Parameter A1 02 Control Method Parameter A1 03 Parameters Parameter A1 04 Enter Password Parameter Function Sequence DC Braking Function Speed Search Function Delay Timers Function Reference Hold Droop Control 3 Function Energy Saving 9 b9 Zero Servo 3 Function C1 Accel Decel Function C2 S Curve Acc Dec Function Function Function C3 Motor Slip Comp 9 C4 Torque Comp 9 ASR Tuning 9 Carrier Freq Function Hunting Prev 3 Function Function Factory Tuning 9 Preset Reference Function Reference Limits Function Jump Frequencies d5 Torque Control 3 4 3 DIGITAL OPERATOR MENU TREES Continued C Advanced Access Level Continued From Motor Parameters Options EET DATA H Control Circuit Terminals ENTER Protection Digital Operator DATA ENTER Display Function 1 or Parameter E2 Motor Setup Function E3 Control Method Motor 2 Function E4 v f Pattern Motor 2 E5 Motor Setup Motor 2 Function F1 PG Speed Setup 3 Function F2 Al 14 Setup Function F6 DO 08 Setup Function F7 PO 36F Setup Function F8 SI F G Setup Function F9
174. ency command signal Each is set in increments of 0 196 as a percentage of maximum frequency Fmax E1 04 as established by either the selected standard V f pattern or custom V f pattern NOTE AII references are affected by the upper and lower limit points EXAMPLE E1 04 60 Hz 100 d2 01 80 0 48Hz Max speed d2 02 10 0 6Hz Min speed 100 42 01 80 0 OUTPUT FREQ 6 42 02 10 0 gt 2 5 5 34 5 23 HUNTING PREVENTION C7 01 Hunt Prevent Selection Factory setting 1 Range Oor 1 Hunting often occurs following a load change but may also occur when the motor is in the process of settling to a steady operating frequency Setting C7 01 1 enables the anti hunt feature which will reduce or suppress oscillation 0 Disabled 1 Enabled C7 02 Hunt Prevent Gain Factory setting 1 00 Range 0 00 to 2 50 This parameter adjusts the hunt prevent gain It should be decreased for a vibrating condition under heavy loads and increased for hunting under light loads NOTE This function is only available in the Volts Hertz Control Method both with and without PG feedback A1 02 0 1 5 35 5 24 JOG REFERENCE d1 09 Jog Reference Factory setting 6 00 Range 0 00 to 400 00 Hz When jog operation is selected either by the Digital Operator JOG key or by external Jog and Run signals the drive output will ramp to the ou
175. eplaced the new board MUST 02 04 programmed to the appropriate set value BEFORE again operating the drive in the Drive mode Table A3 1 Parameters Related to GPD 515 Capacity PARAMETER NEW OLD NOMINAL OUTPUT DRIVE DRIVE E2 01 E2 02 E203 E205 E206 MODEL MODEL HP AMPS amp amp amp amp amp NO NO E5001 502 E503 E505 5 06 E2 10 CIMR G5M GPD515C Amps Hz Amps ohms sec watts 230V 20P41F 0 15 0 15 0 1 90 2 90 120 984 18 2 07 0 5 0 3 95 14 20P71F 1 15 0 15 0 330 2 50 180 5156 138 1 0 0 5 0 3 95 26 21P51F 2 15 0 15 0 620 2 60 280 1997 185 1 0 0 5 0 3 95 53 22P21F 3 15 0 15 0 850 2 90 300 1601 184 1 0 0 5 0 3 95 77 23P71F 4 15 0 15 0 1400 273 4 50 0 771 196 20 0 5 0 3 95 112 25P51F 5 15 0 15 0 19 60 1 50 5 40 0 399 182 20 0 7 0 3 95 172 27P51F 6 15 0 15 0 2660 1 30 800 0 288 155 20 0 7 0 3 95 262 20111F 7 15 0 15 0 397 1 70 112 0 230 195 20 0 7 0 3 95 245 20151F 8 15 0 15 0 53 0 1 60 152 0 138 172 20 0 7 0 3 95 272 20181F 9 15 0 15 0 65 8 167 157 0 101 20 1 2 0 1 0 0 6 95 505 20221F A 10 0 10 0 772 1 70 18 5 0 079 195 20 1 0 0 6 95 538 20300F b 10 0 10 0 105 0 1 80 21 9 0 064 208 20 1 0 0 6 95 699 20370F C 10 0 10 0 1310 1 33 38 2 0039 188 20 1 0 0 6 95 823 20550F E 10 0 10 0 1900 143 456 0 022 205 20 1 0 1 0 95 852 20750F F 10 0 10 0 260 0 139
176. er Voltage 3 Phase 380 400 415 440 460 VAC 10 15 Frequency 50 60 Hz 5 Voltage 0 460V proportional to input voltage Frequency 0 400 Hz V Hz pattern selectable Output Power NEW DRIVE MODEL NO CIMR G5M OLD DRIVE MODEL NO GPD515C 100 CONT OUTPUT AMPS RECOMMENDED MCCB RATING AMPS RECOMMENDED INPUT FUSING AMPS 40P41F 40P71F 41P51F 43P71F 44P01F 45P51F 47P51F 40111F 40151F 40181F 40221F 40301F 40371F 40451F 40551F 40750F 41100F 41600F 200 amp 250 41850F 300 42200F 300 amp 350 43000F 400 amp 500 1 Molded case circuit breaker must be rated for at least 18 000 RMS symmetrical amperes interrupting capacity 2 Fuses should be of the current limiting time delay type offering protection for semi conductor devices 3 Two fuses of this rating are required for each phase table continued on next page A2 1 Input Power Table A2 1 SECTION A Input Voltage Related Standard Specifications Continued 600V Class drive Voltage 3 Phase 500 575 600 10 Frequency 50 60 Hz 5 Output Power NEW DRIVE MODEL NO CIMR G5M 51P51F 52P21F OLD DRIVE MODEL NO GPD515C Voltage 0 575V proportional to input voltage Frequency 0 400 Hz V Hz pattern selectable 100 CONT RECOMMENDED NOMINAL OUTPUT MCCB HP AMPS RATING AMPS RECOMMENDED INPUT
177. ermal overload relay is enabled an OL1 Motor Overloaded fault occurs shutting OFF the drive output and preventing excessive overheating of the motor When operating with one drive connected to only one motor an external thermal relay is not needed When operating several motors with one drive install a thermal overload relay on each motor 5 90 5 41 THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION Continued E1 02 Motor Selection Factory setting 0 Range O to2 Setting Electronic Thermal Characteristics General purpose motor TEFC Blower cooled or totally enclosed non ventilated TEBC or TENV Vector Motor This parameter sets whether a general purpose or a blower cooled motor is used The motor overload detection function operates differently as shown for each of these two motor types Standard Fan Cooled Motor Overload Curve L1 01 0 amp L2 01 8 0 Minutes 100 Time Minutes 0 50 100 150 200 Of Motor Rated Current 5 91 5 41 THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION Continued Standard Blower Cooled Motor Overload Curve L1 01 1 amp L1 02 8 0 Minutes 100 E 25 6 Hz n 0 Hz 5 10 1 0 50 100 150 200 Of Motor Rated Current Vector Motor Overload Curve L1 01 2 amp L1 02 8 0 Minut
178. es 100 All Frequencies Time Minutes 0 50 100 150 200 Of Motor Rated Current NOTE If a TEFC motor is going to be run at or near 100 of rated current at frequencies below 30 Hz for an extended period of time select the blower cooled curve E1 02 1 5 92 5 42 TORQUE COMPENSATION C4 02 Torque Compensation Time Constant Factory setting See Table A3 2 Range O to 10000 ms This parameter adjusts a time delay for the torque compensation gain Increase to add torque stability decrease to improve torque response C4 01 Torque Compensation Gain Kr Sets the torque compensation in increments of 0 1 When the motor has the same capacity as that of the drive the gain is 1 0 When a smaller motor is used the gain should be set to 1 5 typical This parameter in conjunction with E2 05 Motor Line to Line Resistance and E2 07 amp E2 08 Motor Iron Core Saturation Coefficient 1 amp 2 is used by the drive s automatic torque boost function to match the drive s output voltage boost to the motor load Except for the most demanding of high starting torque applications the factory settings of these parameters will be adequate The factory settings are programmed to match the performance characteristics of typical AC motors oo gt 9 E BO 8 wo A a N e Fa
179. ess of the state of the Local Remote input b1 07 Local Remote Run Selection Factory Setting 0 Range 0 to 1 setting Description 0 Cycle External Run Accept External Run When switching from local digital operator back into remote terminals and a remote run command is present parameter b 1 07 determines how the drive will react With a setting of 1 the drive will start running as soon as remote mode is selected A setting of 0 will require the run command to be removed and re applied afterthe remote mode is selected 5 62 5 32 MULTI FUNCTION INPUT TERMINALS Term 3 8 Continued B Data8 External Base Block by N O Contact e When either the Forward Run command or Reverse Run command is present and the EXTERNAL GPD 515 G5 external Base Block command is applied BASE BLOCK i e contact closed coast stop is accom plished after a 20 msec delay while the frequency command is maintained When the Base Block command is removed the drive will recover in a manner similar to that of Speed Search operation except that it searches up from 0 Hz and supersedes a Speed Search command e When both the Forward Run command and Reverse Run command are open and the external Base Block command is applied i e contact closed coast stop is accom plished and after a 20 msec delay the frequency command is changed to OHZ When the Base Block command is removed the drive will remain in stopped co
180. ests Table 6 4 Diode Module Resistances NORMAL ABNORMAL NORMAL ABNORMAL READING READING READING READING OHMS OHMS OHMS OHMS 2 5 to 50 Q 00 INFINITE or or INFINITE 0 25 to 0 7 if using scale MAGNITUDE 0 OF CAP or INFINITE CHARGE TO INFINITE RESISTANCE TEST FOR 30 CONVERTER MODULES BRIDGE RECT VOM RESISTANCE SCALE R x 1 IS THE POSITIVE POLARITY LEAD IS THE NEGATIVE POLARITY LEAD The VOM red lead is not necessarily the positive potential in the resistance mode For these tests the lead refers to the positive potential Make sure you know which polarity you have on your VOM 6 27 B TRANSISTOR MODULE Measure the resistance across the module terminals with a volt ohm meter Set the meter to the X1 range The measured resistance should be within the values listed in Table 6 5 NOTE If the DC bus fuse is blown PUF the values shown below may not be accurate Table 6 5 Transistor Module Resistances NORMAL ABNORMAL READING READING OHMS OHMS B1 3 1 INFINITE 1 3 1 T2 V B1 3 1 T1 U e T2 V e T3 W e T1 U B1 3 1 2 5 to 50 Q or 0 Q or T2 V B1 3 1 0 3 to 0 7 if INFINITE T3 W B1 3 1 using scale T1 T2 T3 RESISTANCE TEST FOR 30 TRANSISTOR MODULES B1 1 or VOM RESISTANCE SCALE R x 1 IS THE POSITIVE POLARITY LEAD IS THE NEGATIVE POLARITY LEAD The VOM red lead is not necessarily the positiv
181. eter NOTES 1 Set parameter b1 02 1 OPES fault will occur if 10 and 11 data settings are not used together 3 OPES fault will occur if 10 and 11 data settings are programmed at the same time as setting A Accel decel ramp hold 4 Jog has priority over Up Down function Up Down has priority over Multi step Speed inputs Up Down is ineffective when operation is from the Digital Operator NOTES continued on next page 5 67 5 32 MULTI FUNCTION INPUT TERMINALS Term 3 8 Continued G Continued NOTES Continued 7 Upper limit speed is set by the formula E1 04 Fmax x d2 01 Freq Ref Upper Limit 8 Lower limit speed is either the reference from external terminals 13 or 14 or from d2 01 Frequency Reference Lower Limit 9 If d4 01 0 Frequency Reference will be reset to 0 Hz if the stop command is given or if input power is removed and reapplied 10 If d4 01 1 the drive will retain the last valid Frequency Reference if a stop command is given or if input power is removed and will accelerate to that reference upon reapplication of a run command GPD 515 G5 EXAMPLE H1 05 Data 10 Up function H1 06 Data 11 Down function INPUT SIGNAL UP DOWN Open Open HOLD Closed Open UP Frequency command approaches frequency FUNCTION command upper limit Open Closed DOWN Frequency command approaches minimum output frequency or frequency command lower limit w
182. f drive Check for correct motor wiring capacity Shaft position changed by more than 500 000 revolutions during zero servo operation Low voltage has been detected but momentary power loss ride thru is enabled L2 01 and momentary power loss ride thru time L2 02 has not yet been exceeded Note 3 Occurs 2 seconds after detection of low voltage Detection level approx 190VDC for 230V rated unit approx 380VDC for 460V rated unit approx 546 VDC for 600V rated unit Note 3 Control circuit voltage is low during operation Main circuit magnetic contactor soft charge contactor does not operate correctly 2 The stop mode and therefore the fault type alarm minor or major is selectable 3 See section 6 4 for flowcharts to use in troubleshooting these fault conditions 6 5 6 2 AUTO TUNING FAULTS amp CORRECTIVE ACTIONS DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY Tune Aborted Data Invalid DESCRIPTION Motor data is not correct CORRECTIVE ACTION Check the input data Check the drive and motor capacities Tune Aborted Resistance Line to line resistance not within tolerance Tune Aborted No Load Current No load current magnetizing current not within tolerance Tune Aborted Sat Coef 1 Iron core saturation coefficient 1 not within tolerance Tune Aborted Sat Coef 2 Iron core saturation coefficient 2 not within tolerance Tune Aborted Rated Slip
183. f the loss exceeds the length of time identified by L2 02 the drive will stop The factory setting of this parameter in 0 1 second increments is related to the drive s capacity rating see Appendix 3 Note that the RUN command must be maintained throughout the ride thru period If L2 01 is set 2 a UV alarm is displayed during power loss and no fault signal is output at any multi function output that is programmed for a fault 5 29 MOMENTARY POWER LOSS RIDE THRU Continued L2 03 Momentary Power Loss Minimum Factory setting See Table 1 Base Block Time Range 0 0 to 5 0 seconds When a power loss is detected the output is baseblocked for the amount of time set in L2 03 During this time residual voltage in the motor is allowed to diminish This guards against faults resulting from the drive output turning on while the motor still has residual voltage If the minimum baseblock time L2 03 is greater than the power loss ride thru time L2 02 drive operation resumes after the minimum baseblock time If the minimum baseblock time is less than the power loss ride thru time drive operation resumes after recovery of input power L2 04 Momentary Power Loss Recovery Factory setting 0 3 Ramp Time Range 0 0 to 2 0 seconds After recovery from a momentary power loss the drive performs a speed search The ramp recovery time L2 04 is the time is takes the output voltage to return to the prese
184. ference a particular parameter to the features to which it applies see the listings in Appendix 1 or the Index Table 5 1 List of Features Defined By Parameters PARAGRAPH REFERENCE FUNCTION SET UP Initialization Reset 2 Wire or 3 Wire Access Level Control Method Selection Input Voltage Setting Encoder PG Parameters Thermal Motor Overload Protection Digital Operator Display Re scaling Input Phase Loss Detection Miscellaneous Parameters STARTING Accel Time S Curve Characteristics Dwell DC Injection Braking at Start STOPPING Stopping Method DC Injection Braking at Stop SPEED CONTROL Frequency Ref Input Signals Auto Manual Term 13 16 Frequency Reference Upper amp Lower Limits Jog Reference Speed Reference Selection Local Remote Multi step Speed Setting 5 1 PARAMETER S E1 01 F1 10 thru F1 14 E1 02 E2 01 L1 01 L1 02 01 03 01 04 L8 05 02 01 02 05 06 07 08 1 01 03 05 07 11 2 01 03 b6 01 thru 04 b2 01 02 03 b2 01 02 04 H3 01 thru 12 d1 01 thru 08 d1 09 b1 01 02 H1 01 thru 06 01 thru 09 H1 01 thru 06 Table 5 1 FUNCTION SPEED CONTROL continued Automatic Frequency Regulator AFR Gain Automatic Speed Regulator RUNNING Critical Frequency Rejection Carrier Frequency Speed Search Slip Compensation RUNNING IMPROVEMENTS Torque Compensation _ Hunting Prevention PROTECTIVE FEATURES Momentary Power L
185. g up the Main Menu and go to Initialize mode Press then AJ then ENTER Display in Wrong Language Change the language AJ Write value to memory Press DATA ENTER Entry Accepted Press DATA _ then select the correct 1 00 0 ENTER language using English briefly then Select Language English Return to operating mode Press then Frequency Ref ENTER U1 01 0 00 HZ 2 19 2 4 CALCULATING MOTOR PARAMETERS This procedure can be used as an alternative to auto motor tuning If the motor being used with the drive did not pass motor auto tuning or if the motor cannot be disconnected from the load the motor parameters need to be calculated and entered manually This procedure only applies to the Open Loop Vector Control method amp the Flux Vector Control method The following information used in the calculation formulas is usually listed on the motor nameplate If no load current is not marked on the nameplate and the motor manufacturer is not able to supply it use the default value of 0 3 x Iria Inca Motor Voltage V Vm Motor Rated Speed RPM Nr Motor Rated Frequency Hz fr Motor Synchronous Speed RPM Ns Ns 120 number of motor poles Full Load Amps FLA IFLA No Load Amps NLA INLA DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY
186. h Open Output freq lt L4 03 L4 04 Closed Output frequency gt L4 03 See Data description following this table Overtorque detection 1 N C Open Overtorque 1 detected according to settings of L6 01thruL6 03 Overtorque detection 2 N O Closed Overtorque 2 detected according to settings of L6 04thruL6 06 Overtorque detection 2 N C Open Overtorque 2 detected according to settings of L6 04thruL6 06 During reverse run Closed Drive operation in reverse During base block 2 Open Drive output base block is active motor is coasting Motor 2 Selected Closed Motor 2 is selected Regenerating Closed Regenerating mode only when A 1 0 2 is set for Flux Vector Control During restart Closed Retry operation after a fault OL1 pre alarm Thermal overload level exceeds 90 of fault detection level Closed OH pre alarm Closed Cooling fin temperature exceeds L8 02 level Not Used During torque limit Closed Torque limit During speed limit Closed Speed limit reached only when A 1 0 2 is set for Flux Vector Control 5 72 5 33 MULTI FUNCTION OUTPUT TERMINALS Term 9 amp 10 25 27 Continued Table 5 3 H2 01 thru H2 03 Data Settings Continued AVAILABILITY CONDITION SIGNAL LEVEL See Note 1 0 1 2 3 Not Used 33 Zero Servo complete Closed Zero Servo is comp
187. h as when operating in flux vector at zero speed If L8 19 is set to 0 disabled L8 17 must be set to 1 2 or 3 Caution When disabling OL2 protection at low speeds L8 1920 set the carrier frequency C6 01 amp C6 02 equal to or less than 2 kHz 5 47 5 28 MODBUS CONTROL The drive can perform serial communication by using a programmable controller PLC and MODBUS protocol MODBUS is composed of one master PLC and 1 to 31 maximum slave units GPD 515 G5 In serial communication between the master and slaves the master always starts transmission and the slaves respond to it The master communicates with one slave at a time Address numbers are assigned to each slave in advance and the master specifies an address to communicate with The slave which receives the command from the master executes the function and then responds to the master A Communication Specifications Interface RS 232C standard RS 485 RS 422 option requires communication interface card CM085 e Synchronization Asynchronous Transmission parameters Baud rate Selectable from 1200 2400 4800 9600 BPS 5 02 Data length Fixed to 8 bits Parity Parity no parity even odd selectable H5 03 Stop bit Fixed to 1 bit Protocol MODBUS e Maximum number to units to be connected 31 units when RS 485 is used Sending Receiving Data Data that can be sent and received are run stop commands frequency r
188. hat disconnect device is opened there may be loss of electrical braking Figure 1 2 is a factory guideline for proper wiring practices and relative locations within the electrical path from the line to the load It does not imply what devices are needed for a particular application nor does it show what devices were shipped with a particular order Therefore disregard those items in the diagram which are not being used in your installation However it is recommended that an input or DC reactor be used with models GPD515C A003 thru A064 CIMR G5M20P41F thru 20151F B001 thru B034 40P41F thru 40151F and C003 thru C062 51P51F thru 51451F when wired to a source of 600 kVA or greater Mount all optional power devices close to the drive and keep electrical connections as short as possible ISOLATION INPUT INPUT TRANSFORMER RFI FILTER REACTOR L3 CUSTOMER S A C LINE L2 POWER SUPPLY L1 NOTES 1 Connect drive ground terminal or panel to earth ground Always use low impedance paths and connections Mount input and output RFI filters physically as close to the drive as possible on the same panel if possible Filters should have a solid connection from filter ground terminal to the cabinet ground point If multiple input or output RFI filters are used they must be wired in parallel Shield individual conductors with metallic conduit or use armored or shielded cable Connect output conduit armored cable or
189. he External Fault input is applied the drive s Fault relay trips shutdown and the motor coasts to a stop The Digital Operator displays failure Fault Reset input external Multi step Speed Reference 1 Fault Reset at closed see NOTES 2 amp 3 The Fault Reset input will reset the Fault relay if the drive is in stopped condition Both Forward Run Stop signal and Reverse Run Stop signal must be OPEN Effective when closed See NOTES 2 amp 3 Multi step Speed Reference 2 Effective when closed See NOTES 2 amp 3 Jog Reference Multi function contact output N O One of 18 functions are available by setting of parameter H2 01 Sequence control input common for terminals 1 8 Connection for shield sheath of signal leads Frequency reference analog input voltage auto input can be changed to manual by setting of parameter H3 01 Run at preset jog frequency when closed Contact capacity 250 Vac at 1A or less 30 Vdc at 1A or less Sequence control input 0 V 0 to 10V 20K ohms 10 to 10V 20K ohms Frequency reference analog input current can be changed to voltage input by setting of parameter H3 08 and cutting jumper J1 4 20mA 250 ohms Frequency reference power supply 15V Control power supply for frequency setting max 20 mA Frequency reference analog input common Multi function contact output Closed at fault N O N C Op
190. he motor in the reverse direction P ress FWD REV RUN light remains on FWD light goes out and REV light comes on The motor ramps down to zero speed then ramps up in the opposite direction Output Freq U1 02 15 00 HZ NOTE output frequency may be slightly higher than the frequency reference depending on the control method selected Table 2 5 Test Run With Digital Operator Continued DESCRIPTION Change the frequency reference from 15 Hz to 60 Hz KEY SEQUENCE Press then twice MENU _DATA ENTER DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY Frequency Ref 015 00 HZ Change the frequency using 2 Frequency Ref 060 00 HZ Write the value to memory by pressing DATA ENTER Entry Accepted briefly then Frequency Ref 060 00 HZ Display the output frequency Press then ESG Output Freq U1 02 60 00 HZ NOTE Output frequency may be slightly higher than the frequency reference depending on the control method selected Stop the motor Press e STOP 2 26 The STOP light turns on and the RUN light blinks during the decel eration of the motor Output Freq U1 02 0 00 HZ 2 6 PRE OPERATION CONSIDERATIONS After completing the Test Run connect the motor to the load Additional control circuit wiring can be added and parameters in the drive can be programmed to configure the drive system to your specifi
191. he parameters Press Tuning Ready are entered execute Auto A Press RUN key Tuning The drive will first output Press current to the motor then run the motor at a high speed During tuning the following Tune Proceeding message will appear XX HZ X XX A the following message will Tune Successful appear If a problem occurs during Tune Aborted Auto Tuning execution Reason see section 6 2 AUTO TUNING FAULTS AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS If no problems are encountered Proceed to section 2 5 TEST RUN USING DIGITAL OPERATOR 2 5 2 2b POWER ON AND PRELIMINARY CHECKS FLUX VECTOR CONTROL Ensure motor is disconnected from load To assure safety disconnect the coupling or belt which connects the motor with the machine so that motor operation is isolated prior to test operation Verify the encoder to be used meets the following criteria Line driver type 8830 88C30 output pulse levels of 5 12V and quadrature A B B Power supply for the encoder from the PG X2 card is capable of 200mA 12VDC or 200mA 5VDC Do not use both of these power supplies simultaneously Verify that the encoder PPR pulses per revolution and expected motor speed do not exceed the bandwidth of the PG X2 card using the following formula 300 000 Hz gt 1 2 x Max Speed in RPM 60 x PPR of encoder NOTE Speed in RPM 120 x frequency number of motor poles Example Encoder PPR
192. he same as Example 2 above but uses Example 3 pushbuttons instead Page v 4 20 mA This method is the same as Example 2 but the reference Example 4 comes from a remote 4 20 mA source such as a PLC Page vi 3 wire Remote Speed This method is similar to Example 3 but utilizes a remote Potentiometer mounted speed control potentiometer Page vii 0 10V DC This method is similar to 2 but allows switching between 2 wire with several an analog reference and three digital preset references Example 6 digital presets Page viii For a more detailed explanation of sequence and reference consult Page ix of this document 7 Control Terminal Wiring Remove power and wait for the charge light to go out before making control terminal connections Control wiring should be sized 16 to 20 AWG Control wiring should be shielded with the shield wire connected to terminal 12 G and the other end of the shield left Control Terminals open As shown at right the control terminals are arranged in two rows The bottom row contains terminals 1 thru 8 and 21 thru 23 The top row contains terminals 11 thru 17 25 thru 27 amp 33 a 8 Control Method This document assumes that the drive will be left the open loop vector control method For a further explanation of control method or to change the control method consult Section 2 2 9 Auto Tuning automatically programs drive parameter
193. hichever is larger Closed Closed HOLD 5 68 5 32 MULTI FUNCTION INPUT TERMINALS Term 3 8 Continued COMMAND L l DOWN COMMAND FWD RUN UPPER LIMIT SPEED LOWER LIMIT SPEED OUTPUT FREQUENCY D H D H D Uu D SPEEDATSET i ME NS NEN MEE NAME FREquENcY _ L MULTI FUNCTION OUTPUT SIGNAL U UP Accel status D DOWN Decel status H HOLD constant speed status U1 At Upper Limit Speed D1 At Lower Limit Speed Up Down Frequency Setting Timing H Data 1 Trim Control Increase Data 1D Trim Control Decrease d4 02 Trim Control Level Factory setting 1 0 Range O to 100 The value of d4 02 is a percentage of the maximum output frequency E1 04 When the trim control increase input is closed the value of d4 02 gets added to the analog frequency reference When the trim control decrease input is closed the value of d4 02 gets subtracted from the analog frequency reference 5 69 5 33 MULTI FUNCTION OUTPUT TERMINALS Term 9 amp 10 25 27 H2 01 Contact Output external CPD SISI MULTI FUNCTION terminals 9 amp 10 515 65 CONTACT OUTPUT H2 02 Open Collector Output 250Vac 1A OR LESS external terminals 25 amp 27 2 FACTORY SETTING 2 03 Open Collector Output IS FOR SIGNAL external terminals 26 amp 27 DURING OPERATION MULTI A conta
194. iali3 Open Closed _ Digital value stored in parameter d1 03 Table 6 Programming Required For Remote 2 wire Sequence amp Multiple References Display Text Description This parameter can be found under the Initialize menu A1 03 Init Parameters 2220 CAUTION Setting this value will reset all parameters to their No Initialize original factory settings all previous adjustments will be lost When the drive completes the reset this parameter returns to 0 No Initialize 2 01 Set Sets the frequency reference when switch SW1 is open and d1 03 X XX HZ Set switch SW2 is closed Sets the frequency reference when switches SW1 amp SW2 are d1 04 X XX HZ Set closed Jog Reference Sets the frequency reference when switch SW3 is closed The d1 09 X XX HZ Set JOG frequency reference input overrides all other frequency references The position of SW1 and SW2 are irrelevant NOTE After the above adjustments have been made the DRIVE SEQ REF and STOP LEDs will be illuminated viii Definitions Sequence refers to how the drive is started stopped and told which direction to run When the sequence comes from the digital operator local the drive is started and stopped using the RUN and STOP keys on the digital operator and direction is given via the FWD REV key Sequence can also come from the drive s control terminal
195. ical overload protection an overload relay should be installed interlocked with the drive as shown It should be the manual reset type to prevent automatic restart following a motor fault and subsequent contact reclosure after cool down 3 Insulated twisted shielded wire is required 2 conductor 18 GA Belden 8760 or equivalent 3 conductor 18 GA Belden 8770 of equivalent Connect shield ONLY AT DRIVE END Stub and isolate other end 4 Digital Operator is standard on every drive Remote operators as shown may not be required 5 Customer to connect terminal to earth ground 100 Q or less 230V 10 Q or less 460V and 600V 6 Wire only one of the inputs as an Auto Reference If H3 09 is set to 1F terminals 13 and 14 added for the internal frequency reference 7 If the Dynamic Braking DB option is used wire per Appendix 6 instructions 8 An optional DC reactor may be added for harmonic attenuation if needed see separate instruction sheet for wiring 9 If application does not allow reverse operation b 1 04 Reverse Run Prohibit should be set to 1 Reverse Run Disabled and the Forward Reverse input can be eliminated 10 If supplying the drive with DC voltage instead of AC remove jumpers from terminals 1 and 2 and connect a separate 10 AC supply to 41 and 2 instead 11 Use 41 R and 2 S for single phase input Note that for drives up through GPD515C A064 B034 C032 CI
196. ight to go out 2 Connect the common of the scope to terminal 2 of TA1 3 Connect one channel of the scope to terminal 4 of TA1 If the scope is two channel connect the second channel to terminal 5 of TA1 4 Set the scope for 5V div 50ms div normal trigger and rising edge trigger 5 Apply power to the drive but do NOT apply a run command 6 Turn the motor shaft by hand As Figure 6 1 shows there should be pulses on both channels 5096 duty cycle and they should be the inverse of each other separated by 180 electrical degrees 7 Disconnect the two scope channels and reconnect them to terminals 6 and 7 of TA1 6 29 GPD 515 G5 PULSE GENERATOR OUTPUT PG X2 terminal Encoder pin TEST POINTS See Note 1 TAI 4 Hu TA1 5 H TAI 6 B ov 90 TAI 7 T NOTE 1 Encoder output voltage should be at or near the encoder power supply voltage Figure 6 1 PG X2 Card Inputs Test Points 8 Turn the motor shaft by hand As Figure 6 1 shows there should be pulses on both channels 5096 duty cycle and they should be the inverse of each other separated by 180 electrical degrees 9 If one or both channels do not have the correct pulses present i e missing pulses incorrect duty cycle improper voltage etc go to procedure C 6 30 10 Checking the Pulses at a VCM Motor Remove power from L1 L2 amp L3 and wait for the CHARGE
197. indings 9 2 1 24 Control Circuit TEMNA S rts 1 17 Terminal 13 14 Input Voltage Monitor Items Wiring atten Control Method Monitor Item Control Method Related Parameters Control Method Selection CPU ID No Monitor Critical Frequency Rejection Current DC Injection Braking Current Meter Analog Monitor Current Motor Rated FLA D DATA ENTER Key 4 1 4 3 DC Bus Voltage Monitor Item A1 27 Deactivation Time Power Loss Ride thru 5 50 Deceleration Stall Prevention Selection During 5 86 Time ha s tert ais 5 3 Deadband Prohibited Frequency 5 13 Delay Time Excessive Speed Deviation Detection Derivative Time Detection Frequency Output Signal Detection Speed Output Signal Diagnostics see Troubleshooting Digital Motor Operated Pot 5 45 Digital Operator ss 4 1 Changing the Language on 2 19 1 1 Display Selection 5 17 Men Tees 2 tiit 44 Mode Selection 4 9 Monitor Selection At Power up 5 19 Test Run Using 2 24 DIMENSIONS
198. ion sheet 2Y25 402 13 Only effective with DO 08 option card see instruction sheet 2Y25 350 14 Only effective with PO 36F option card see instruction sheet 2Y25 298 XV Current Ratings amp Horsepower Range NEW DRIVE OLD DRIVE CURRENT NOMINAL HORSEPOWER MODEL NO MODEL NO RATING AMPS 150 OL CIMR G5M GPD515C 20P41F 20P71F 21P51F 22P21F 23P71F 25P51F 27P51F 20111F 20151F 20181F 20221F 20300F 20370F 20550F 20750F 0 75 40P41F 1 amp 2 40P71F 3 41P51F 5 43P71F 7 5 44PO1F 10 45P51F 15 47P51F 20 40111F 25 40151F 30 40181F 40 40221F 50 40301F 60 40371F 75 40451F 100 40551F 125 40750F 150 41100F 200 amp 250 41600F 300 41850F 350 42200F 400 amp 500 43000F 51P51F 52P21F 53P71F 55P51F 57P51F 50111F 50151F 50181F 50221F 50301F 50371F 50451F 50551F 50751F 50900F 51100F 51600F xvii Do not touch circuit components until main input power has been turned off and CHARGE lamp is extinguished The capacitors are still charged and can be quite dangerous Do not connect or disconnect wires and connectors while power is applied to the circuit CAUTION Know your application before using either Initialization function of A1 03 This parameter must be set to 0 for Drive mode operation 1110 User Default Parameter Initialization 2220 z Factory 2 Wire Control Initializati
199. isabled D Feedback D Feed forward Reference PID D Feedback Reference PID D Feed Forward PID Proportional Gain PID Integral Time PID Integral Limit 0 1 sec 0 1 PID Differential Time PID Output Limit PID Offset Adjustment 0 01 0 1 0 01 PID Primary Delay Time Constant o 0 Not Inverted Inverted PID Output Selection 1 ACCESS LEVEL SETTING See Note 3 RANGE EF Od g 0 1 0 5 320 See Note 2 100 PE 5 32 D SENE 5 32 FACTORY SETTING PARA R See Note 2 0 0 300 0 0 0 300 0 0 00 25 00 7 B UT Hi UT UT 100 0 0 0 A 5 36 100 0 Table A1 2 Drive bX XX Parameters Continued PARAMETER NUMBER FUNCTION NAME PID Output Reverse Selection Feedback Loss Detection Selection PID Feedback Loss Detection Level PID Feedback Loss Detection Delay Time PID Dwell Frequency at Start Dwell Time at Start Frequency Dwell Time at Stop b6 02 b6 03 b6 04 b7 01 PID Output Gain ACCESS LEVEL INCRE See Note 3 MENT SETTING RANGE REF 0 1 2 3 0 0 25 0 1 0 5 36D 0 0 400 0 A A A i T i 0 1 0 0 10 0 0 0 A A A A 5 14 sec FACTORY SETTING PARA DESCRIPTION 0 1 0 1 If PID output tries to go negative it will be limited to 0
200. isconnected from load To assure safety disconnect the coupling or belt which connects the motor with the machine so that motor operation is isolated prior to test operation Verify the encoder to be used meets the following criteria Line driver type 8830 88C30 output pulse levels of 5 12V and quadrature A B B Power supply for the encoder from the PG X2 card is capable of 200mA 12VDC or 200mA 5VDC Do not use both of these power supplies simultaneously Verify that the encoder PPR pulses per revolution and expected motor speed do not exceed the bandwidth of the PG X2 card using the following formula 300 000 Hz gt 1 2 x Max Speed in RPM 60 x PPR of encoder NOTE Speed in RPM 120 x frequency of motor poles Example Encoder PPR 1024 Maximum speed 1750 RPM 300 000 Hz gt 1 2 x 1750 60 x 1024 300 000 Hz gt 35 840 Hz Acceptable DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY Apply input power to the drive If the display is not in English go to section 2 3 CHANGING THE LANGUAGE ON THE DIGITAL OPERATOR Set the control method of the Press hen 5 drive to V f w PG Feedback MENU e Set A1 02 to 1 Initialize A Press then twice Control Method N ENTER Open Loop Vector P Press then set drive to V F w PG 2 DATA Fdbk using A1 02 1 h ENTER V F w PG Fdbk Z W
201. isplay Units Parameter Address Display Selection LOCAL REMOTE Key Selection STOP Key Function During Remote Run User Parameter Default Value kVA Selection Drive Model No Digital Operator Motor Operated Pot Operation Selection When Digital Operator is Disconnected Elapsed Operating Hour Timer Set Frequency reference Output frequency Output current Selected monitor Parameter number MODBUS address 0 Disabled Enabled 0 Disabled Enabled 0 Disabled Set default 2 Clear all Drive accepts frequency Drive accepts frequency Disabled operation Enabled motor coasts to command after ENTER is pressed command immediately continues stop and fault is displayed A1 25 1 4 Table A1 9 Drive oX XX Parameters Continued PARAMETER FUNCTION INCRE SETTING FACTORY ACCESS LEVEL para DESCRIPTION eee Note NUMBER NAME MENT RANGE SETTING 02 08 Elapsed 0 Timer active whenever 1 0 1 0 5 26 Operating power is applied to drive Hour Timer Timer active whenever Selection drive is in run mode Initial Mode Japanese Spec 1 0 2 1 Selection American Spec European Spec 1 Not initialized Factory setting differs depending on the drive capacity 2 Capability to view and set specific parameters is dependent upon the Access Level A1 01 and Control Method A1 02 0 V f 1 V f w PG 2 Open Loop Vector 3
202. ive will behave the same as illustrated in Example 1 Table 3 Programming Required For Remote 2 wire Sequence amp Local Reference This parameter can be found under the Initialize menu A1 03 Init Parameters No Initialize 2220 original factory settings all previous adjustments will be lost When the drive completes the reset this parameter returns to 0 No Initialize Motor Rated FLA Sets the motor full load amps E2 01 X XXA Set U1 01 Frequency Ref User Sets the desired frequency reference Settable by pressing U1 01 XX XX HZ Set MENU DATA ENTER then DATA ENTER again Use the arrow keys to set the desired value then press DATA ENTER CAUTION Setting this value will reset all parameters to their b1 01 Reference Source Sets the frequency reference to come from the digital operator Operator Display will read Reference Source Operator NOTE After the above adjustments have been made the DRIVE SEQ and STOP LEDs will be illuminated Example 3 Remote Sequence 3 Wire amp Local Reference Digital Operator 515 65 su Control Wiring Schematic 3 STOP SW1 Fonward OReverse i Shield Drain Wire To Terminal 12 This configuration is best when a person rather than an external controller PLC relay etc controls the drive OPERATION e The frequency reference is programmed into parameter 01 01 See Table 4 for det
203. l This manual is equally applicable to drives labelled GPD 515 or G5 1 2 RECEIVING The drive is thoroughly tested at the factory After unpacking verify the part numbers with the purchase order invoice Any damages or shortages evident when the equipment is received must be reported immediately to the commercial carrier who transported the equipment Assistance if required is available from your sales representative If the drive will be stored after receiving keep it in its original packaging and store according to storage temperature specifications in Appendix 2 1 3 PHYSICAL INSTALLATION Location of the drive is important to achieve proper performance and normal operating life The unit should be installed in an area where it will be protected from Direct sunlight rain or moisture e Corrosive gases or liquids e Vibration airborne dust or metallic particles When preparing to mount the drive lift it by its base never by the front cover For effective cooling as well as proper maintenance the drive must be installed on a flat non flammable vertical surface wall or panel using four mounting screws There MUST bea MINIMUM 4 7 in clearance above and below the drive to allow air flow over the heat sink fins A minimum 1 2 in clearance is required on each side on the drive A GPD 515 G5 in a free standing floor mount cabinet must be positioned with enough clear ance for opening the door of the cabinet this will ensure
204. l 23 Multi function Monitor 2 Gain Terminal 23 Multi function Monitor 2 Bias Terminal 23 Multi function 0 0to 10 VDC Analog Monitor 1 10 VDC Signal Level Selection Term 21 amp 23 Serial Comm Station Address Serial Comm 0 1200 baud Baud Rate 1 2400 baud 2 4800 baud 3 9600 baud 4 19 2 kbaud Serial Comm 0 No parity Parity Select 1 Even parity 2 Odd parity Stopping 0 Ramp to stop Method After 1 Coast to stop Serial Comm 2 Fast stop 3 Alarm only 1 Factory settings in the parentheses are values obtained at a 3 wire initialization 2 Capability to view and set specific parameters is dependent upon the Access Level 1 01 and Control Method A1 02 0 V f 1 V f w PG 2 Open Loop Vector 3 Flux Vector the drive is programmed for Each column represents the Access Level for a given Control Method Q Quick start B Basic A Advanced not available A1 20 Table A1 8 Drive LX XX Parameters PARAMETER FUNCTION INCRE SETTING FACTOR EESSIEEMEE PARA REF Note 4 NUMBER NAME DESCRIPTION MENT RANGE setting See Note 4 L1 01 Motor 0 Disabled 1 0 1 1 Overload 1 Enabled Coast to Stop Protection Selection L1 02 Motor Overload Protection Time Constant L2 01 Momentary Disabled Power Loss Power loss ride thru Detection CPU power active Selection L2 02 Momentary See Note 1 Power Loss Ride thru Time L2 03 Momentary 3 See N
205. l plate The filter should be mounted as close to the drive as practical The cable must be kept as short as possible and the metal plate should be securely grounded The ground of the line filter and the drive must be bonded to the metal plate with as much bare metal contact as possible For main circuit input cables a screened cable is recommended within the panel and is also suggested for external connections The screen of the cable should be connected to a solid ground For the motor cables a screened cable max 20 m must be used and the screen of the motor cable should be connected to ground at both ends by a short connection again using as much bare metal contact as possible For more detailed explanation refer to document EZZ006543 Installation Guidelines For EMC Directive using Yaskawa AC Drive Products Table 1 2 1 and Figure 1 2A show the line filter list for EMC standards and the installation wiring of the drive and line filter Table 1 2 1 Line Filters for Drive New Drive Model Old Drive Model Line Filter Number Number Part Number Rated Mass Dimensions in mm CIMR G5M GPD 515C 05P00325 Current A kg L x W x D 40P41F B001 40P71F B003 0106 8 1 8 320x 143x46 41P51F 004 43P71F 008 0103 20 1 8 320x 143x46 44P01F B011 45P51F B014 7 1 B021 0104 30 3 0 350x 213x51 40111F B027 40151F B034 0105 60 5 3 435 268 x 56 40181F B041 40221F B052 01
206. lection Terminal Serial communication Option PCB EWS b1 02 Operation Digital Operator Method Terminal Selection Serial communication Option PCB EWS b1 03 Stopping Ramp to stop 0 3 Method Coast to stop See Note 1 Selection DC injection to stop Coast with timer b1 04 Reverse Enable reverse operation Operation Disable reverse operation Prohibit Zero Speed Run at frequency reference Operation Stop level Run at min freq E1 09 determined Run at zero speed by E1 09 b1 06 Logic Input 0 2ms 2 scans Scan Rate 1 5ms 2 scans b1 07 Local Remote 0 Cycle external Run Run Selection 1 Accept external Run Selection during program mode During 1 Run command enabled Program during program mode DC Injection Braking Start Frequency DC Injection Braking Current DC Injection 0 00 10 00 Braking Time at Start DC Injection 0 00 10 00 Braking Time 100 is no load current value 0 A A 5 10B Compensation at Min frequency E1 09 At Start A1 2 PARAMETER NUMBER b5 07 b5 08 Table A1 2 Drive bX XX Parameters Continued FUNCTION NAME INCRE MENT DESCRIPTION Speed Search 0 Disabled 1 Selection 1 Enabled Speed Search Deactivation Current Level Speed Search Deceleration Time Timer Function ON Delay Time Timer Function OFF Delay Time PID Control Mode Selection 0 1 sec 0 1 sec 0 1 D
207. lete See paragraph 5 49 C 34 36 Not Used 37 During operation Closed Drive is operating except during base block or injection braking Not Used NOTES 1 Column headings refer to set value of 1 02 Control Method 0 V f 1 V f w PG 2 Open loop vector 3 Flux vector A Data 2 5 13 16 Frequency or Speed Detection Output Signals L4 01 Speed Coincidence Detection Level Factory setting 0 0 Range 0 0 to 400 0 Hz 14 02 Speed Coincidence Detection Width Factory setting 2 0 Range 0 0 to 20 0 Hz L4 03 Speed Coincidence Detection Factory setting 0 0 Level 4 Range 400 0 to 4400 0 Hz 14 04 Speed Coincidence Detection Factory setting 2 0 Width Range 0 0 to 20 0 Hz These speed coincidence parameters are used to control contact output at terminals 9 amp 10 or one of the open collector outputs at terminals 25 amp 26 with respect to terminal 27 when selected by H1 01 thru H1 03 Both 14 01 and L4 02 are insensitive to motor direction The output contact will close or the open collector output will go low when the acceleration or deceleration is completed or output frequency or speed is within the detection width for the selected output function See the timing diagrams on the following pages 5 73 5 33 MULTI FUNCTION OUTPUT TERMINALS Term 9 amp 10 25 27 Continued Frequency detection 1 low 2 01 4 L4 0
208. light to go out Take apart the military style connector at the motor Connect the common of the scope to pin F Connect one channel of the scope to pin A If the scope is two channel connect the second channel to pin H Set the scope for 5V div 50ms div normal trigger and rising edge trigger Apply power to the drive but do NOT apply a run command Turn the motor shaft by hand As Figure 6 1 shows there should be pulses on both channels 5096 duty cycle and they should be the inverse of each other separated by 180 electrical degrees Disconnect the two scope channels and reconnect them to pins B and l Turn the motor shaft by hand As Figure 6 1 shows there should be pulses on both channels 5096 duty cycle and they should be the inverse of each other separated by 180 electrical degrees If no pulses can be seen on any of the four pins A B H amp l check the power supply between pins D and F If it is not at or near 12VDC check the power supply back at the PG X2 card on TA1 terminals 1 amp 2 If the power supply is not good at TA1 replace the PG X2 card 6 31 6 32 Appendix 1 LISTING OF PARAMETERS The GPD 515 G5 control circuits use various parameters to select functions and character istics of the drive For methods of changing of parameter settings see Section 4 The following tables list all parameters in numerical order For each parameter reference paragraph s in Section 2
209. lses not requred for most applications Figure 1 5 PG X2 Card Input Output Connections 1 25 Section 2 INITIAL START UP LOCAL CONTROL 2 1 PRE POWER CHECKS Verify wires are properly connected and no erroneous grounds exist e Remove all debris from the drive enclosure Check for loose wire clippings Verify all mechanical connections inside the drive are tight Verify motor is not connected to load Apply input power only after the front cover is in place DO NOT remove the front cover or Digital Operator while input power is on For 460V GPD515C B041 thru B096 CIMR G5M40P41F thru 40451F Verify that the drive power voltage select connector located at lower left corner inside drive chassis see Figure 2 1 is positioned correctly for the input power line voltage Voltage is preset to 460V at the factory Reposition if required to match nominal line voltage 23CN 24CN 25CN 26CN 22CN FU2 CII 380V 400 415V 440V 460V Figure 2 1a Power Voltage Selection in 460V drive If For 600V GPD515C C027 thru C200 CIMR G5M50181F thru 51600F Verify that the drive power voltage select connector located at lower left corner inside drive chassis see Figure 2 1b is positioned correctly for the input power line voltage Voltage is preset to 600V at the factory Reposition if required to match nominal line voltage Figure 2 1b Power Voltage Selection in 600V Drive 2 1
210. motor rated torque Table A1 10 Drive UX XX Parameters Continued MONITOR ITEM DESCRIPTION During zero speed During reverse run During reset signal input During speed agree Drive operation ready Minor fault Major fault Elapsed Operation Software No EXAMPLE 01114 Flash ID No Control Circuit Terminal 13 Input Voltage Control Circuit Terminal 14 Input Voltage Control Circuit Terminal 16 Input Voltage Motor Secondary Current Iq Motor Exciting Current Output Frequency After Soft start Automatic Speed Regulator Input Automatic Analog monitor output level becomes Speed 10V max output frequency with V F Regulator control Output A1 28 DISPLAY ANALOG MONITOR ACCESS LEVEL ILLI MEL CT Note E UNIT ILLI MEL CT LEVEL F Fe 10V 10V or 10V 20mA I 10V motor rated primary current 10V motor rated primary current 10V max output freq E1 04 10V max output freq 10V motor rated primary current Table 1 10 Drive UX XX Parameters Continued PARAMETER DISPLAY ANALOG MONITOR ACCESS LEVEL MONITOR ITEM DESCRIPTION See Note 3 NUMBER UNIT OUTPUT LEVEL 1 2 8 Speed Deviation 0 01 10V max A A Regulator Input output freq E1 04 PID Feedback 0 01 10V max A A A A Amount output freq E1 04 01 25 DI 16H Input Displays an input value according to the AJAJAJA 4 Status setting of F3 01 Ou
211. n if requested For further information about on site training and courses specific to your installation and application visit our website at www drives com Please send training information on Name Position Title Company Address H City State Zip Phone Fax Representative if known FAX this completed form to 847 887 7185 D 2 5 0 TM 4515 Section 1 RECEIVING AND INSTALLATION 1 1 GENERAL The GPD 515 G5 hereafter referred to as the drive is a general purpose sine coded pulse width modulated AC motor drive which generates an adjustable voltage frequency three phase output for complete speed control of most conventional squirrel cage induction motors Automatic stall prevention and voltage boost prevents nuisance tripping during load or line side transient conditions The drive will not induce any voltage line notching distortion back to the utility line and maintains a displacement power factor of not less than 0 98 throughout its speed range When properly installed operated and maintained the drive will provide a lifetime of service lt is mandatory that the person who operates inspects or maintains this equipment thoroughly read and understand this manual before proceeding This manual primarily describes the GPD 515 G5 but contains basic information for the operator control station as wel
212. n the drive detects a lightly loaded motor the output voltage will automatically be reduced 5 26 5 46 ENERGY SAVING OPERATION Continued b8 04 Automatic Energy Saving Factory setting 0 7 Control Gain Range 0 0 to 10 0 Factory setting becomes 1 0 when A1 02 3 b8 05 Automatic Energy Saving Factory setting 0 50 Control Time Constant Range 0 00 to 10 0 sec Factory setting becomes 0 01 when A1 02 3 These parameters are only available when in the open loop vector or flux vector control methods A1 02 2 or 3 Parameters b8 04 and b 8 05 adjust the energy savings voltage regulator Increasing the gain 58 04 and or decreasing the time constant b8 0 5 will increase the responsiveness of the energy savings function If the response is set too fast the drive may become unstable If the response is set too slow the drive may respond incorrectly when the motor load is re applied H1 01 thru H1 06 Multi function Data 63 Energy Saving Inputs Term 3 thru 8 Operation A multi function input must be used to command energy saving operation EXTERNAL GPD 515 G5 CONTACTS When the external Energy Saving Operation command is closed at set frequency the energy MULTI saving operation shown below is enabled In the gt FUNCTION energy saving operation the output voltage is the INPUT value of the energy saving gain b8 01 factory set to 80 multiplied by the V constant
213. nal RUN and STOP signals REMOTE REF Lights when the drive is programmed to operate by an external frequency reference signal RUN Off when drive is in stopped condition lights steadily when Run signal is active blinks after Stop signal has been received and drive output is ramping down See Figure 4 2 LOCAL REMOTE Lights steadily at initial power up blinks after Run signal becomes active but frequency reference is zero off when drive output is controlling motor speed See Figure 4 2 B KEYPAD KEYS FUNCTION Pressing this key toggles between the Local Digital Operator and Remote Termin als modes of operation Active only when the drive is in stopped condition JOG IN DRIVE MODE Pressing and holding this key will initiate Jog function drive output goes to programmed Jog Frequency d1 09 to check motor operation or to position machine When key is released output returns to zero and motor stops If the motor is already running pressing this key will have no effect NOTE Disabled if the drive is programmed to use an external JOG input IN DRIVE MODE Each press of this key will toggle between Forward and Reverse motor run direction The selected direction is indicated by the FWD or REV lamp being lit If the selection is made while the drive is stopped it determines the direction the motor will run when started If the selection is changed during running the drive will ramp the mot
214. nary Checks Initial Start up Power Supply erinin Power Voltage Selection in AGOV 2 1 Pre Operation Considerations 2 27 Preset Speeds see Multi step Speeds Programmable Features Prohibited Frequency 1 Prohibited Frequency 2 i Prohibited Frequency 3 Prohibited Frequency 4 Prohibited Frequency Deadband Proportional Gain PID Protection Overcurrent Instantaneous A2 3 Overheat Heatsink A2 3 Overtorque Overvoltage E Thermal Overload 5 90 Undervoltage u retine A2 3 PWM Frequency see Carrier Frequency R Rated Current 2 20 5 90 Ratings u ie Xvii A2 1 1 1 Reference Selection Local Remote 5 39 REMOTE Indicator Lamps 4 1 4 2 Reset Codes RESET Key Resistance Motor Line to Line 1 13 REV Indicator Lamp Reverse Run Prohibit 1 2 Ride thru Momentary Power Loss 5 51 Deactivation Time 5 51 Right Arrow Key 4 1 4 3 Rotation PG orn 5 24 RUN Indicator Lamp
215. nce 7 5 23 5 25 B Frequency Reference 8 5 23 5 25 B Jog Frequency Reference 5 23 5 25 B AO 08 AO 12 Channel 1 Gain Option Instr Sheet AO 08 AO 12 Channel 2 Gain Option Instr Sheet Auto Speed Reference Signal Gain Term 13 Auto Speed Reference Signal Bias Term 13 Multi function Analog Input 1 Gain Term 16 Multi function Analog Input 1 Bias Term 16 Multi function Analog Input 2 Gain Term 14 Multi function Analog Input 2 Bias Term 14 Multi function Analog Monitor 1 Gain Term 21 Multi function Analog Monitor 1 Bias Term 21 Multi function Analog Monitor 2 Gain Term 23 Multi function Analog Monitor 2 Bias Term 23 Monitor Selection Monitor Selection After Power up A1 32 Appendix 2 SPECIFICATIONS Table A2 1 Standard Specifications SECTION A Input Voltage Related Specifications 208 230V Class drive Voltage Phase 200 208 220 230 VAC 10 15 Frequency 50 60 Hz 5 Voltage 0 230V proportional to input voltage Frequency 0 400 Hz V Hz pattern selectable Input Power Output Power NEW DRIVE MODEL NO CIMR G5M 20P41F 20P71F OLD DRIVE MODEL NO GPD515C 100 CONT OUTPUT AMPS RECOMMENDED MCCB RATING AMPS RECOMMENDED INPUT FUSING AMPS 21P51F 22P21F 23P71F 25P51F 27P51F 20111F 20151F 20181F 20221F 20300F 20370F 20550F 20750F Input Pow
216. ndition until Forward Run command or Reverse Run command is again applied e When external Base Block command is active a blinking BB will be displayed on the Digital Operator RUN RUN Freq Cmd Freq Cmd 0 0 Base Block SR EE Base Block V out V out 0 0 20 lt 20msec gt P lt t L2 04 setting A Base Block With Run Active B Base Block After Stop Com C Data9 External Base Block by N C Contact Base block operation is the same as described above except that the Base Block contact must be open to be recognized 5 63 5 32 MULTI FUNCTION INPUT TERMINALS Term 3 8 Continued D Data 61 Speed Search From Max Frequency Data 6 2 Speed Search From Set Frequency Data 6 4 Speed Search From Output Frequency A multi function input terminal is utilized to activate speed search When the external speed search command is closed the base is blocked for the min base block time L2 03 then the speed search is made The operation depends on the set value IMPORTANT Set values 6 1 6 2 amp 6 4 CANNOT be selected in combination When 61 is set the speed search begins with the maximum frequency When 62 is set the speed search begins with the frequency command that has been set after the search command was received When 64 is set the speed search begins with the last output frequency before the speed search command was received RUN SIGNAL gt
217. nds STOP b2 04 x 10 RUN CMD DC INJECTION BRAKING OUTPUT TIME b2 04 FREQUENCY 0 10 100 0 5 sec lt DC BRAKING TIME OUTPUT FREQUENCY Connie AT TIME OF STOP COMMAND Full Range DC Injection Braking Stop Sequence 5 10 DC INJECTION BRAKING Continued B b2 01 DC Inj Braking Start Frequency Factory Setting 0 5 Range 0 1 to 10 0 Hz b2 02 DC Injection Braking Current Factory setting 5 0 of Drive Rated Current Range 0 100 b2 03 DC Injection Time at Start Factory setting 0 00 Range 0 00 to 10 00 seconds b2 04 DC Injection Time at Stop Factory setting 0 00 Range 0 00 to 10 00 seconds DC injection can be used to stop a motor whose rotational direction is uncertain at start up For this operation application of DC injection braking current is controlled by a multi function input see paragraph 5 8 D With ramp to stop enabled b1 03 0 after a STOP command is received the drive controls motor deceleration according to the Decel Time setting until output frequency reaches the DC Injection Braking Start Frequency b2 01 setting Then the drive output is turned off and DC injection current is applied to the motor The effective DC injection time and current should be set to provide adequate stopping without excessive motor heating The DC injection voltage is determined by the DC injection braking current and motor impedance RUN CO
218. nputs Data 1 6 Motor 2 Select Term 3 thru 8 This function allows the drive to control two different motors at different times When a multi function input is set to a data of 16 two different sets of motor parameters can be selected with a contact closure Multi Function Input Control Method Setting V f Pattern Motor Term Parameter Parameters Parameters Open Motor 1 A1 02 E1 04 thru E1 13 E2 01 thru E2 09 Closed Motor 2 E3 01 E4 01 thru E4 07 E5 01 thru E5 06 The table above illustrates which parameters are used when motor 1 or motor 2 is selected The drive needs to be in the stop condition before the multi function input is opened or closed otherwise a Motor Running warning will be displayed H2 01 thru H2 03 Multi function Outputs Data 1C Motor 2 Selected Term 9 amp 10 25 26 amp 27 When multi function output terminal is programmed to a data of 1 that output will close whenever motor 2 is selected As shown in the example below a multi function input selects between motor 1 and motor 2 The multi function output will only change states when the drive is in the stopped condition in order to prevent internal drive damage Incoming Power Motor 1 serio Motor 2 Selected H2 01 1C Indicates components not supplied 5 105 5 46 USER PARAMETERS A2 01 thru A2 32 User Select Parameters Data Programmable see
219. o Table A3 1 One or more parameter values are not within the allowable setting range H1 01 thru H1 06 multi function input 2 or more parameters are set to the same data other than F and FF See paragraph 5 32 Frequency reference and or run source is set for option card b1 01 3 and or b1 02 3 but no option card is connected Control method set to Flux Vector or V F with PG and no PG X2 card is installed Both multi function analog inputs H3 05 and H3 09 have been programmed for the same data except 1F OR an AI 14B option card is connected the drive is programmed for 3 channel individual 2 01 0 and a multi function input is programmed for Option Inverter Selection H1 01 to H1 06 2 A parameter has been changed that is not available in the present Control Method Example H1 08 72 Zero Servo Command is set while the drive is in Flux Vector Control 1 02 3 then the Control Method is changed to Open Loop Vector 1 02 2 Occurs when the custom V f pattern does not meet the following criteria E1 04 gt E1 06 gt E1 07 gt E1 09 Occurs when the carrier frequency parameters are set as follows C6 01 gt 5 kHz and C6 02 lt 5 kHz C6 03 gt 6 and C6 01 lt C6 02 Digital Operator has been disconnected from drive while in Run mode 6 4 Table 6 1 Fault Indication and Details Continued DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY DESCRIPTION OS Motor overspee
220. on Maintained RUN Contact 8330 z Factory 3 Wire Control Initialization Momentary START STOP Contact Entering any Initialization code resets all parameters and automatically returns A1 03 setting to 0 If the GPD 515 is connected for 3 Wire control and this param eter is set to 2220 2 Wire Control Initialization the motor may run in reverse direction WITHOUT A RUN COMMAND APPLIED Equipment damage or personal injury may result CAUTION When drive is programmed for auto restart L5 02 1 thru 10 the motor may restart unexpectedly personal injury may result Data subject to change without notice xviii IMPORTANT Wiring should be performed only by qualified personnel Always ground the drive using ground terminal See paragraph 1 4 3 Grounding Verify that the rated voltage of the drive matches the voltage of the incoming power Never connect main circuit output terminals T1 T2 and T3 to AC main circuit power supply All parameters have been factory set Do not change their settings unnecessarily Do not perform a or withstand voltage test on any part of the drive Equipment uses semi conductors and is vulnerable to high voltage The Control PCB employs CMOS ICs which are easily damaged by static electricity Use prop er electrostatic discharge ESD procedures when handling the Control PCB Any modification of the product by the user is not the responsibility of Yaskawa an
221. on input terminal can be utilized to control DC injection braking When used DC GPD 515 G5 injection current will be applied until the input is removed provided that the drive output 8 DC INJ BRK frequency is below the DC Braking Start COMMAND Frequency b2 01 EXAMPLE 1 06 60 Contact input at Terminal 8 is the DC Injection Braking Command STOP RUN COMMAND me LL scc DC INJECTION a es Se eee BRAKING COMMAND i RAMP TO STOP DC INJ BRK START X OUTPUT FREQUENCY FREQUENCY b2 01 DC Braking Sequence 5 16 5 11 DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY SELECTION 01 03 Display Scaling Factory setting 0 Range 0 to 39999 This parameter determines the scaling of the Digital Operator display for both Output Frequency and all Frequency References DATA DISPLAY 0 Output frequency in increments of 0 01 Hz factory setting 1 Output frequency in increments of 0 01 96 120xF im x 2 to 39 Motor synchronous speed P no of motor in increments of 1 RPM poles 39999 max P no of motor poles F Frequency Ns motor synchronous speed NOTE If motor synchronous speed exceeds 39999 RPM display holds at 39999 Line speed or other parameter Setting must be 5 digits X X X X X Display value at maximum frequency E1 04 include leading zeroes if necessary Location of decimal point 0 XXXX 1 XXX X 2 XX XX X XX X See CAUTION on next p
222. oost after V f conversion Accel decel time coefficient Accel decel time varied by analog input DC injection braking current adjust DC injection braking current varied by analog input 10V drive rated current internal setting b2 02 ineffective Overtorque detection level Internal overtorque detection level C6 02 disabled Stall prevention level during running Stall prevention level L3 06 100 level varied by analog input Frequency reference lower limit Frequency reference lower limit is set by analog input Either d2 02 setting value or analog input whichever is greater becomes effective Setting prohibited frequency 4 Analog input sets a fourth prohibited frequency in addition to those set by d3 01 thru d3 03 PID feedback Provides feedback signal for use with PID control b5 01 PID Set Point Provides a setpoint signal for use with PID control Frequency reference no longer acts as PID setpoint Frequency Reference Bias 2 FBIAS2 Additional frequency reference bias input Total bias Internal bias H3 03 FBIAS FBIAS2 FBIAS2 is based on Fmax E1 04 Not Used FWD torque limit 10V 10096 of motor rated torque forward direction Quadrant 1 See Note 3 REV torque limit 10V 100 of motor rated torque reverse direction Quadrant 3 See Note 3 Regenerative torque limit TLG 10V 100 of motor rated tor
223. operation FWD motoring REV motoring FWD regen and REV regen The torque limit functions as a torque current reference limit Torque limit is active in both speed mode and torque mode EXAMPLE L7 01 Forward Torque Limit 150 L7 02 Reverse Torque Limit 150 L7 03 Forward Regenerative Torque Limit L7 04 Reverse Regenerative Torque Limit 20 20 FWD Regen Torque Lim 20 REV Regen Torque Lim 209 FWD RUN REV RUN H1 06 7 Accel Decel Time Selection 1 SPEED FEEDBACK Sfb A SPEED REFERENCE Sref During regeneration the regeneration torque limits have been exceeded thus the actual speed Sfb doesn t follow the speed reference Sref This example also demonstrates the accel decel selection 1 H1 06 data 7 5 101 5 45 TORQUELIMIT Continued B H3 05 Multi function Analog Input 1 Selection Data 10 FWD Torque Limit Term 16 The multi function analog input at terminal 16 may be configured to allow analog control of the torque limit for both FWD amp REV modes However the analog reference controls both FWD torque limit amp REV regen torque limit H3 05 10 GPD 515 G5 TORQUE LIMIT 10V MULTI FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT 1Ris a calibration pot only NOTE A minimum priority circuit is associate
224. or 13 Terminal 16 is a torque limit ONLY if speed mode is selected 45 01 0 If d5 01 1 torque mode Terminal 16 will be a torque reference Limit Data 15 FWD amp REV Torque The multi function analog input at terminal 16 may be configured to allow analog control of the torque limit for both FWD amp REV modes However the analog reference controls both FWD amp REV torque limits and the FWD amp REV regenerative torque limits H3 05 15 GPD 515 G5 TORQUE TORQUE LIMIT 1R is a calibration pot only MULTI FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT NOTE A minimum priority circuit is associated with the torque limit function which means that the lowest value torque limit setting will have priority 5 103 5 45 1 TWO MOTOR OPERATION E3 01 Control Method Selection Motor 2 Factory setting 2 Range 0 to 4 Setting Description 0 V f control 1 V f with PG feedback 2 Open loop vector 3 Flux vector Factory Settings Parameter Description 230V Ratings 460V Ratings 600V Ratings 4 01 Maximum Output Frequency Motor 2 60 0 Hz 60 0 Hz 60 0 Hz E4 02 Maximum Voltage Motor 2 230 0 V 460 0 V 575 0 V E4 03 Base Frequency Motor 2 60 0 Hz 60 0 Hz 60 0 Hz E4 04 Mid Output Frequency Motor 2 3 0 Hz 3 0 Hz 3 0 Hz E4 05 Mid Output Voltage Motor 2 12 6 V 25 3 V 36 6 V E4 06 Min Output Frequency Motor 2 0 5 Hz 0 5 Hz 0
225. or 5 are listed if applicable where the features of the drive affected by that parameter are described Table A1 1 Drive AX XX Parameters ACCESS LEVEL N INCRE ETTIN FACTORY PARAMETER FUNCTIO DESCRIPTION 5 G CTO EIE 2 NUMBER NAME MENT RANGE SETTING English 0 Japanese See Note 1 German French Italian Spanish Portuguese Operation only User program E Quick start Basic Advanced PARA Language Selection V f control V f with PG feedback Open loop vector Flux vector Control Method Selection O N O OQ N O GOO N O Initialize No initialize Parameters User initialize 2 wire initialize 3 wire initialize available in User Program Access Level 1 Settings of these parameters will not be initialized by programming A1 03 to 1110 2220 or 3330 2 Capability to view and set specific parameters is dependent upon the Access Level 1 01 and Control Method A1 02 0 V f 1 V f w PG 2 Open Loop Vector 3 Flux Vector the drive is programmed for Each column represents the Access Level for a given Control Method Q Quick start B Basic A Advanced not available A1 1 Table A1 2 Drive bX XX Parameters PARAMETER FUNCTION INCRE SETTING FACTORY ACCESS LEVEL panA DESCRIPTION See Note 3 NUMBER NAME MENT RANGE SETTING REF Reference Digital Operator 0 4 1 Q Q Q Q 5 25 Se
226. or shaft is rotated check encoder wiring and connections The pulses from the encoder can also be checked see section 6 6 CHECKING ENCODER PULSES If the polarity is wrong switch the channels on the input to the PG X2 card on terminal block TA1 swap wires at terminals 4 amp 6 and swap wires at terminals 5 amp 7 Motor Speed U1 05 2 38HZ Motor Speed U1 05 1 47 HZ 2 17 2 2d continued DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY Check the motor rotation using Press then DATA Frequency Ref the JOG function MENT ENTER 01 01 0 00 HZ NOTE The frequency reference for this operation comes If either or both of the SEQ and REF lights are from d1 09 and is on press LOCAL factory set to 6 Hz REMOTE WARNING THE NEXT KEY PRESS WILL CAUSE THE MOTOR TO MOVE TAKE APPRO PRIATE PRECAUTIONS Press amp hold Jo Frequency Ref The motor should ramp up to U1 01 6 00 HZ speed and rotation should be counter clockwise if the FWD light is on Rotation should be RUN light will illuminate clockwise if the REV light is on If rotation is incorrect reverse Release any two motor leads then JOG repeat the motor rotation check Proceed to section 2 5 TEST RUN USING DIGITAL OPERATOR 2 18 2 3 CHANGING THE LANGUAGE ON THE DIGITAL OPERATOR DESCRIPTION Power ON KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY Brin
227. or to zero speed and then ramp it up to set speed in the opposite i e newly selected direction IN DRIVE MODE If the drive is not programmed to operate by external RUN and STOP signals as indicated by REMOTE SEQ lamp being lit pressing this key will produce a Run command to initiate drive output to the motor However output frequency will be zero if the frequency reference is zero at the time this key is pressed IN DRIVE MODE Pressing this key will produce a Stop command The drive will decelerate the motor in the programmed stopping manner then drive output will be disconnected from the motor 4 2 LABEL FUNCTION Table 4 1 Digital Operator Controls Continued B KEYPAD KEYS Continued IN DRIVE MODE Pressing this key will display the top level of the menu tree for selecting and reading parameters The drive will change to Program mode IN PROGRAM MODE Pressing this key will display the top level of the menu tree for returning to the Drive mode Pressing the MENU amp DATA ENTER keys in succession will change to Drive mode and display the frequency reference setting Each time this key is pressed the display returns to the previous level in the menu tree or to the status prior to pressing DATA ENTER IN DRIVE MODE OR PROGRAM MODE When a parameter number is being displayed pressing this key will display the parameter s set value which is presently in memory IN PROGRAM MODE ONLY After the
228. oss Ride thru Auto Restart Frequency Reference Loss Detection Miscellaneous Protective Functions DRIVE CONTROLS INPUT Multi function Analog Inputs Term 16 14 Frequency Reference Bias and Gain Multi function Input Terminals Term 3 8 External Fault Terminals DRIVE OUTPUT Multi function Output Terminals Term 9 amp 10 25 27 Analog Monitor Output Multi function Term 21 23 MONITOR DISPLAY Digital Operator Display Selection Display Monitor at Power up Selection List of Features Defined By Parameters Continued PARAGRAPH PARAMETER S REFERENCE d3 01 thru 04 C6 01 02 03 b2 01 02 03 H1 01 thru 06 L2 03 04 C7 01 02 H1 01 thru 06 L2 01 02 L5 01 02 L4 05 8 01 02 H3 05 09 H3 03 07 11 H3 02 06 10 H1 01 thru 06 H1 01 thru 06 2 01 02 03 4 01 thru 07 5 2 5 2 ACCEL DECEL TIME C1 01 Accel Time 1 1 06 Decel Time Factory setting each 10 0 C1 02 Decel Time 1 C1 07 Accel Time 4 Range each 0 0 to 6000 0 C1 03 Accel Time2 C1 08 Decel Time 4 seconds C1 04 Decel Time2 C1 09 Fast Stop Note see para 5 2 E C1 05 Accel Time 3 Decel Time The drive incorporates four sets of individually programmable acceleration and deceleration times B H1 01 thru H1 06 Multi Data 7 Accel Decel Time Selection 1 function Inputs Term 3 thru 8 Data 1A Accel Decel Time Selection 2 By
229. ote 1 Power Loss Minimum Base Block Time o L2 04 Momentary See Note 1 Power Loss Recovery Ramp Time Undervoltage mes m Detection 300 420 380 Level 460V ratings 460V ratings 431 603 546 600V ratings 600V ratings L2 06 KEB Frequency L3 01 Stall 0 Disabled Prevention 1 General purpose Selection 2 Intelligent See Note 2 During Accel L3 02 Stall Prevention Level During Accel L3 03 Stall Prevention Level During Accel CHP L3 04 Stall Disabled Prevention General purpose Selection Intelligent See Note 2 During Decel Stall Prevent w Resistor A1 21 Table A1 8 Drive LX XX Parameters Continued PARAMETER FUNCTION INCRE SETTING FACTORY ACCESS LEVEL para DESCRIPTION See Note 4 NUMBER NAME RANGE S E Stall 0 Disabled Prevention 1 Decel time 1 Selection 2 Decel time 2 During Running Stall Prevention Level During Running Speed 0 0 400 0 Frequency Speed Coincidence Width Speed Coincidence Frequency Speed Coincidence Width Frequency Reference Run at 80 of frequency Loss reference Detection Selection Number of Auto Restart Attempts Auto Restart No fault relay Operation Fault relay active MEE 1601 Todus 0 Disabled 1 o4 o 54 amp Disabled Detection Detected during speed Selection 1 agree and operation continues after detection Dete
230. otor the correct value is 1024 Press then twice Main Menu Press DATA _ then 4 times 4 ENTER Z Options x D Press DATA 3 times PG Pulses Rev D ENTER 00600 XK A Set the correct PPR using gt RESET gt PG Pulses Rev 01024 N LLLA Write value to memory by pressing DATA ENTER E N Entry Accepted briefly then PG Pulses Rev h 1 01 1024 2 2b continued DESCRIPTION Display motor speed KEY SEQUENCE Press then DATA ain Lg then DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY Function U1 Monitor Press pATA 4 times ENTER Motor Speed U1 05 0 00 HZ Rotate the motor shaft counter clockwise by hand as viewed from the load end of the motor Asthe shaft is turned counter clockwise a low positive speed should be indicated Asthe shaft is turned clockwise a low negative speed should be indicated fthe speed doesn t change when the motor shaft is rotated check encoder wiring and connections The pulses from the encoder can also be checked see section 6 6 CHECKING ENCODER PULSES fthe polarity is wrong switch the channels on the input to the PG X2 card on terminal block TA1 swap wires at terminals 4 amp 6 and swap wires at terminals 5 amp 7 Motor Speed b U1 05 2 38HZ 2 Motor Speed E U1
231. otor is being commanded to run Lights when the GPD 515 G5 is in Drive operation mode Increase parameter number or value of blinking digit Switch between LOCAL and REMOTE operation modes Initiates Jog function u Selects forward or reverse operation Run the motor LED lights when drive is controlling motor speed DRIVE FWD REV REMOTE SEQ REF Frequency Ref U1 01 0 00 Hz DIGITAL OPERATOR JVOP 130 DATA _ JOG AJ ENTER dl Figure 4 1 Digital Operator _ 2 line 16 character alphanumeric LCD display shows selected operation status fault code or parameter data Displays the main menu for mode selection Returns to previous status or menu level _ Displays data to be LOCAL rd ag oe changed and enters new data Decrease parameter number or value of blinking digit Resets a drive fault or selects digit of a set value to be changed The selected digit will blink Stop the motor LED lights when drive is in stopped condition 4 1 DRIVE Table 4 1 Digital Operator Controls A INDICATOR LAMPS FUNCTION Lights when the drive is in the Drive mode of operation FWD Lights when Forward motor run has been selected REV Lights when Reverse motor run has been selected REMOTE SEQ Lights when the drive is programmed to operate from exter
232. ound terminal 100 ohms or less 1 7 Main Circuit Configuration Block Diagrams 230V DCL Option 1 L1 R CIMR G5M20P41F to 27P51F TET I GPD515C A003 to A033 a 9 EEN Control l Supply gt Circuit RCC E Cooling Fan A011 to A033 only em dem id ry 2 DCL 3 Option 1 CIMR G5M20111F to 20151F GPD515C A049 to A064 CIMR G5M20181F 20221F GPD515C A080 A096 Control When using DC input as main circuit gt circuit power connect 230Vac to control power transformer terminals 4 r and 4 s Internal CIMR G5M20300F to 20750F GPD515C A130 to A300 12271 Control Supply gt Circuit When using DC input as main circuit power connect 230Vac to control power transformer terminals 4 and s Q x Cooling Fan Internal Cooling Fan Cooling Fan Main Circuit Configuration Block Diagrams 460V CIMR G5M40P41F to 40151F GPD515C B001 to B034 Control Circuit Internal Cooling Fan CIMR G5M40551F to 41600F GPD515C B128 to B302 When using DC input as main circuit power connect 460Vac to control power transformer terminals 44 r and t 400 5400 27 Control Circuit RCC
233. pam FEET C8 30 Carrier M Fc 2 kHz Frequency Fc C6 01 During Auto 2 Fc 5 kHz Tuning 1 Factory setting differs depending on the control method 1 02 2 Setting range and factory setting differ depending on drive capacity and the control method 3 Capability to view and set specific parameters is dependent upon the Access Level A1 01 and Control Method A1 02 0 V f 1 V f w PG 2 Open Loop Vector 3 Flux Vector the drive is programmed for Each column represents the Access Level for a given Control Method Q Quick start B Basic A Advanced not available PARAMETER NUMBER d1 05 d1 07 0 Disabled 1 0 1 0 A A 521 1 Enabled 5 32 G FUNCTION NAME Frequency Reference 1 Frequency Reference 2 Frequency Reference 3 Frequency Reference 4 Frequency Reference 5 Frequency Reference 6 Frequency Reference 7 Frequency Reference 8 Jog Frequency Reference Frequency Reference Upper Limit Frequency Reference Lower Limit Critical Frequency Rejection 1 Critical Frequency Rejection 2 Critical Frequency Rejection 3 Critical Frequency Rejection Width Frequency Reference Hold Function Selection Table A1 4 Drive dX XX Parameters DESCRIPTION Mee FACTORY MENT RANGE SEES 0 1 Hz 0 00 400 0 is iid
234. pect to time If the reference decreases by 90 in more than 0 4 seconds the drive will decelerate to the set reference if the reference decreases by 90 in less than 0 4 seconds the drive will continue to operate at 80 of the output frequency To regain control of output frequency either exceed the set reference 8096 of reference or initiate a STOP command If Auto Reference is less than Fmax E1 04 x 05 this function is not performed FWD RUN COMMAND AUTO REFERENCE foe Y drive OUTPUT FREQUENCY Timing Chart Note This function applies only to frequency references at terminal 13 or 14 Frequency reference loss detection does not function at terminal 16 5 21 FREQUENCY REFERENCE RETENTION d4 01 Frequency Reference Retention Factory setting 0 Range O or 1 This parameter can be used to retain the held frequency reference in U1 01 when power is removed Set d4 01 1 if this is desired when using Up Down Sample Hold commands as a multi function contact input Dewnplon Not retained Held reference retained in Frequency Reference 1 U1 01 5 33 5 22 FREQUENCY REFERENCE UPPER amp LOWER LIMITS d2 01 Frequency Reference Upper Limit Factory setting 100 0 Range 0 0 to 110 0 d2 02 Frequency Reference Lower Limit Factory setting 0 0 Range 0 0 to 109 0 These two parameters set the range for the frequ
235. pose 4 for high starting torque 4 for fans and pumps 3 for constant horsepower 1 Custom Pattern defined by parameter settings Selectable Functions Multi step speed operation 9 steps max S curve accel decel zero speed control servo lock arbitrary torque detection etc Motor Overload Protection Electronic thermal overload relay Instantaneous Overcurrent Motor coasts to a stop at approximately 200 rated current Fuse Blown Protection Motor coasts to a stop by blown fuse Overload Motor coasts a stop after 60 sec at 150 of rated output current Protective Functions Overvoltage Motor coasts to a stop if drive DC bus voltage exceeds 400 VDC 230V unit or 800VDC 460V unit or 1050VDC 600V unit Undervoltage Motor coasts to a stop if drive DC bus voltage drops to 190 VDC or below 230V unit 380 VDC or below 460V unit 546VDC or below 600V unit Momentary Power Failure Factory setting provides for motor to coast to a stop after momentary power failure of more than 15 ms Can be reprogrammed to allow continuous operation ride through during power failure of up to 2 seconds or longer see Note 2 Heatsink Overheat Thermistor table continued on next page A2 3 Table A2 1 Standard Specifications Continued Stall Prevention Stall prevention at acceleration deceleration and constant Protective speed operation Functions continued Ground Fault Provided by electronic cir
236. programming data 7 into one of the multi function parameters H1 01 thru H1 06 the corresponding multi function input terminal 3 thru 8 becomes the Time Selection 1 input When the input terminal i e external contact is open Time 1 C1 01 C1 02 is selected When the input terminal is closed Time 2 C1 03 C1 04 is selected By programming data 1A into another of the multi function parameters the corresponding multi function input terminal becomes the Time Selection 2 input When the input terminal is open Time 1 or 2 is selected based on the setting of the Time Selection 1 input When the input is closed Time 3 C1 05 C1 06 or Time 4 C1 07 C1 08 is selected based on the status of the Time Selection 1 input TIME SELECTION 1 GPD 515 G5 O O TIME SELECTION 2 Accel Decel Accel Decel Selection 2 Selection 1 Accel Time Decel Time H1 06 1A H1 05 07 Open Open Open Closed Closed Open Closed Closed 5 2 ACCEL DECEL TIME Continued B Continued Data A Accel Decel Hold Speed HOLD Command By programming data A into one of the multifunction input parameters H1 01 thru 1 06 one of the multi function input terminals 3 thru 8 becomes a HOLD command input As long as the HOLD command is present accel and decel are in a prohibit state and the output speed is held at the level it was at the time the HOLD command was input When the HOLD command is removed while the s
237. put Frequency Frequency at DC Injection Braking Start b2 01 Factory setting 0 5 Hz 9 DC Injection Braking Time at Stop b2 04 Factory setting 0 5 s Run Command ON OFF B Data1 Coast to Stop Upon removal of the FWD REV Run command the motor coasts to rest Output Frequency _ Drive output is shut OFF when stop command is input lt Run Command 5 88 5 40 STOPPING METHOD Continued C Data2 Full range DC Injection Stop When a STOP command is issued there is a 0 5 second time delay before a DC injection current is applied to two phases of the motor s stator winding The duration of DC braking is a time period proportional to b2 04 at 10 output frequency and the level of output frequency at the time the STOP command is issued Braking torque is 50 70 of full load motor torque EXAMPLE b2 04 0 5 sec at 10 output 100 10 Braking time at Fmax 100 output frequency x 0 5 5 sec STOP b2 04 x 10 RUN CMD DC IN JECTION BRAKING OUTPUT TIME b2 04 FREQUENCY 0 10 100 0 5 sec gt COASTING lt DC BRAKING TIME gt OUTPUT FREQUENCY AT TIME OF STOP COMMAND Full Range DC Injection Braking Stop Sequence D Data 3 Coast to Stop With Timer When programmed for coast to stop with timer a Run command is ignored if issued during the time the motor would normally be decelerating C
238. que forward amp reverse regeneration Quadrants 2 amp 4 See Note 3 5 53 5 30 MULTI FUNCTION ANALOG INPUTS Term 14 amp 16 Continued FUNCTION DESCRIPTION Torque reference in 10V 100 of motor rated torque forward amp reverse Torque Control Quadrants 1 2 3 amp 4 See Note 3 Torque limit in Speed Control AVAILABILITY See Note 2 Torque compensation See paragraph 5 43 Torque limit Not Used When programmed in H3 05 terminal 16 input has no effect When programmed in H3 09 terminal 14 input is added to the terminal 13 frequency reference NOTES 1 For a bidirectional pot input instead of 0 10V set 04 1 for terminal 16 or H3 08 1 for terminal 14 and connect the low negative side of the pot to terminal 33 If using a 10 to 10V input connect the positive side to terminal 16 or 14 and the negative side to terminal 17 2 Column headings refer to set value of 1 02 Control Method 0 V f 1 V f w PG 2 Open Loop Vector 3 Flux Vector Available indicates Not Available X in column indicates 3 Quadrant 1 is forward motor rotation torque in forward direction Quadrant 2 is forward motor rotation torque in reverse direction regeneration Quadrant 3 is reverse motor rotation torque in reverse direction Quadrant 4 is reverse motor rotation torque in forward direction regeneration
239. r Speed Detection Output Signals 5 73 Phase Loss Detection Input 5 77 Phase Loss Detection Output 5 77 PI Control cesta kos PD Me 5 78 Reset Codes 2 Wire 3 Wire Initialization 5 83 Slip Compensation 2 eR 5 84 Stall PreventiOn i n e HU EHE RE HR DE raS 5 86 Stopping Method cei ta poi M hib ee desde biogr 5 88 Thermal Overload Protection rr 5 90 Torque Compensation 5 93 Torque Control Command r rr 5 95 Torque Deloctlolt 5 98 Torque 5 101 Two Motor Operation acce occa etie epo He PT 5 104 User Parameters Gnd eui 5 106 Pattern Standard 5 106 V f Pattern Custom a totes ends 5 108 Zero Servo Control E NAT 5 110 Zero Speed Control impete pupa 5 112 FAULT INDICATION amp TROUBLESHOOTING 6 1 General 6 1 Auto Tuning Faults and Corrective Actions 6 6 DISPISVING Faults ETIN E 6 7 Troubleshooting Flowcharts
240. r shows Frequency Ref U1 01 0 00 Hz DRIVE SEQ REF amp STOP LEDs are on Press the LOCAL REMOTE button The SEQ amp REF LEDs should go off and the FWD LED should go on Push the JOG key noting direction of motor rotation If it is incorrect remove power wait for charge light to go out then switch wires between terminals T1 and T2 Replace the front cover and apply input power 5 Digital Operator Parameters that start with an A example A1 03 are found under the Initialize menu Parameters that start with b thru L example b1 01 are found under the Programming menu Before the drive will accept a RUN command the DRIVE LED must be on Press the MENU key then the DATA ENTER key to turn the DRIVE LED on For more specific information on the digital operator see Section 4 6 Choose a configuration from Table 1 below Each example listed below contains a control wiring diagram operation explanation and all necessary programming The drive can be controlled in many more ways than is described in these examples Table 1 Drive Configuration Examples Sequence Reference Example Source Source Description Page Run Stop Motor Speed This method requires no control wiring connections to the Example 1 drive It is most often used during startup of the drive Page iii With this method the drive can be started and stopped Example 2 using an external remote signal Page iv This method is t
241. raph 5 24 amp 5 25 B 7 Accel decel time Open Accel decelby C1 01 C1 02 X X X X selection 1 Closed Accel decelby C1 03 C1 04 See paragraph 5 2 B 8 External base block Closed Shuts off drive output X X X X N O contact input speed reference is held See Data description following this table 9 External base block Open Shuts off drive output X X X X N C contact input speed reference is held See Data description following this table A Accel decel ramp hold Closed Hold X X X X speed hold command See paragraph 5 2 B B External overheat alarm Closed oH2 blinks on the Digital X X X X signal and operation continues minor fault C Multi function analog input Open Analog inputs terms 14 amp 16 are X X X X selection disabled Closed Analog inputs terms 14 amp 16 are enabled D Speed control disable Open Speed control enabled X X Closed Speed control disabled E ASR integral reset IRST Closed Integral reset X iIx See paragraph 5 7 C F Terminal Not Used Drive does not react to input X X X X 5 59 MULTI FUNCTION INPUT TERMINALS Term 3 8 Table 5 2 FUNCTION Up function Down function DESCRIPTION See Data description following this table Continued H1 01 thru H1 06 Data Settings Continued AVAILABILITY See Note 1 0 1 2 Forward jog Jog2 Reverse jog Jog2 See paragraph 5 24 3 X X X X Fault Reset Rese
242. rcuit leads The shield sheath MUST be connected at the drive end ONLY terminal 12 The other end should be dressed neatly and left unconnected floating See Figure 1 2B e Signal leads and feedback leads PG must be separated from control leads main circuit leads and any other power cables to prevent erroneous operation caused by electrical noise Lead length should NOT EXCEED 164 feet BO meters Wire sizes should be determined considering the voltage drop All AC relays contactors and solenoids should have RC surge supressors installed across their coils All DC relays contactors and solenoids should have diodes installed across their coils SHIELD SHEATH OUTER JACKET TO GPD 515 TO SIGNAL EXTERNAL TERMINALS E CIRCUIT TO SHIELD SHEATH TERMINAL TERM 12 WRAP BOTH ENDS OF SHEATH WITH INSULATING TAPE DO NOT CRIMP CONNECT CONNECTION Figure 1 2B Shielded Sheath Termination Table 1 3 Terminal Functions and Signals of Control Circuit TERMINAL FUNCTIONS 2 WIRE CONTROL Forward Run Stop signal See NOTE 1 DESCRIPTION SIGNAL LEVELS Run at closed stop at open See NOTE 2 3 WIRE CONTROL Run signal 2 WIRE CONTROL Reverse Run Stop signal See NOTE 1 Run at closed See NOTE 2 Run at closed stop at open See NOTE 2 3 WIRE CONTROL Stop signal External fault input Stop at open See NOTE 2 Fault at closed see NOTES 2 amp 3 When t
243. reduced during the energy saving operation Vit TORQUE CONVERSION COMPENSATION n VOLTAGE COMMAND CLOSE A SET FREQUENCY AND ENERGY SAVING ENERGY ENABLED SAVING GAIN Output Voltage During Energy Saving Operation b8 02 Energy Saving Frequency Factory setting 0 0 Range O to 400 Hz This parameter is only available in the V f or w PG control methods A1 02 or 1 The energy saving function will only activate if all of the following conditions are met a multi function input is activated which is set to energy savings data 6 3 output frequency is above the Energy Saving Frequency b 8 02 and the drive is up to its set speed output frequency frequency reference B Energy Saving Open Loop Vector amp Factory setting 0 Flux Vector Control Methods Range 0 or 1 b8 03 Automatic Energy Saving Selection Setting Description 0 Disabled Energy saving mode will not be activated under light loads 1 Enabled The energy saving mode will automatically be activated under light loads This parameter is only available when in the open loop vector or flux vector control methods A1 02 2 or 3 When b8 03 is set to a 1 a multi function contact input is not required to activate energy saving mode This function is separate and should not be confused with parameters b8 01 and b 8 02 Whe
244. reference d1 09 Table 2 Programming required for Local mode Display Text Boni lae AEA e i Operator Operator E2 01 X XXA Set U1 01 Frequency Ref User Sets the desired frequency reference Settable by pressing U1 01 XX XX HZ MENU DATA ENTER then DATA ENTER again Use the arrow keys to set the desired value then press DATA ENTER NOTE Programming steps listed above assume no prior adjustments to the drive have been made Example 2 Remote Sequence 2 Wire amp Local Reference Digital Operator K1 j Eorward Run GPD 515 G5 Control Wiring Schematic K2 Reverse Run E D 4 ser 1 01 0 00 Hz 2 sv 2 ES a Shield Drain Wire i To Terminal 12 This configuration is used when the sequence comes from a remote source such as a relay or a PLC It can also be used with a maintained switch when it is desirable to have the drive restart on restoration of power It should not be used where safety of attending personnel might be threatened by a restart OPERATION e frequency reference is programmed into parameter U1 01 See Table for details e Close K1 to Run Forward at frequency set in 01 01 e Close K2 to Run Reverse at frequency set in U1 01 e f both K1 amp K2 are closed the drive stops and displays the error message EF External Fault e If the LOCAL REMOTE key is pressed the dr
245. rite value to memory by pressing DATA Entry Accepted J ENTER briefly then Control Method V F w PG Fdbk 2 2d continued DESCRIPTION Set parameter access level to Advanced This allows all parameters to be viewed and modified KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY E Press then Main Menu MEN Z Initialize M P 7 Press DATA then Access Level ENTER A Quick Start V Press DATA _ then set drive to Advanced 6 1 01 4 ENTER Using Advanced Level Write value to memory by pressing DATA Entry Accepted ENTER briefly then Access Level Advanced Level Set PG Pulses Rev to the correct value NOTE Fora Yaskawa vector motor the correct value is 1024 Press then twice Main Menu ME Z Programming i 4 SN Press DATA then 4 times Group F ENTER Options Ne Press DATA 3 times PG Pulses Rev h ENTER 00600 8 F Set the correct PPR using PG Pulses Rev Zw W 2 01024 RESET Write value to memory by pressing DATA Entry Accepted ENTER briefly then PG Pulses Rev L 1 01 1024 2 15 2 2d continued DESCRIPTION Select the drive input voltage then select an appropriate V F pattern Refer to section 5 38 V F PATTERN STANDARD or 5 39 V F PATTERN CUSTOM NOTE A standard V F pattern for a 60 HZ motor is p
246. rive front cover 3 Use a voltmeter to verify that voltage is disconnected from incoming power terminals HEAT SINK Heat Sink Mount Resistor Installation ED Es 1 Remove the drive from its mounting for access to the rear of the heat sink 2 Attach the Heat Sink Mount Resistor on the back of the drive s heat sink as shown in Figure A6 1 3 Reinstall the drive in its mounting position 4 Connect the leads from the Heat Sink Figure A6 1 Attaching Heat Sink Mount Resistor Mount Resistor to drive terminals on Heat Sink according to Figure A6 2 5 Proceed to ADJUSTMENTS on page A6 7 GPD 515 G5 HEAT SINK MOUNT RESISTOR Figure A6 2 Lead Connections For Heat Sink Mount Resistor A6 3 Remote Mount Resistor Unit Installation for GPD515C A003 thru A033 CIMR G5M20P41F thru 27P51F B001 thru B034 40P41F thru 40151F C003 thru C032 51P51F thru 50221F IMPORTANT Since the Remote Mount Resistor Unit generates heat during dynamic braking operation install it in a location away from other equipment 1 Attach the Remote Mount Resistor Unit maintaining a minimum 1 97 inch 50 mm clearance on each side and a minimum 7 87 inch 200 mm clearance on top 2 Remove the Remote Mount Resistor Unit cover access Terminas BP 12 its terminal block Connect Lead Size AWG the Remote Mount Resistor Lead Type 600V ethylene propylene Unit to the drive and to rubber ins
247. rive will run in the forward direction If switch SW is closed the drive runs in the reverse direction Switch SW 1 be operated with the drive running at any speed e Frequency reference is proportional to the signal level at Terminal 16 OV 0 Hz 5V 30 Hz amp 10V 60 Hz e LOCAL REMOTE key is pressed the run amp stop commands will change over to the digital operator but the frequency reference will still come from manual speed pot The jumper installed between terminals 6 and 11 forces the reference to come from terminal 16 regardless of the Local Remote setting Table 6 Programming Required For Remote 3 wire Sequence amp Manual Speed Pot Reference Description This parameter can be found under the Initialize menu CAUTION Setting this value will reset all parameters to their original factory settings all previous adjustments will be lost When the drive completes the reset this parameter returns to 0 No Initialize E2 01 Motor Rated FLA User Sets the motor full load amps E2 01 X XXA Set NOTE After the above adjustments have been made the DRIVE FWD SEQ REF and STOP LEDs will be illuminated A1 03 Init Parameters 3330 No Initialize After the jumper wire and potentiometers are installed and the programming is complete the trim pot needs to be calibrated Press MENU then DATA ENTER and verify that the SEQ and REF LEDs are illuminated Turn th
248. rse Torque Compensation At Start Compensation At Start Time Constant 0 00 2 50 0 0 200 0 200 0 0 0 FACTORY SETTING ACCESS LEVEL See Note 3 PARAMETER NUMBER C5 01 C5 02 C5 03 C5 04 C5 05 C5 06 C5 07 Table A1 3 Drive CX XX Parameters Continued FUNCTION NAME DESCRIPTION ASR Proportional Gain 1 ASR Integral Time 1 ASR Proportional Gain 2 ASR Integral Time 2 ASR Limit ASR Primary Delay Time ASR Switching Frequency ASR Integral Limit Carrier Frequency Upper Limit Carrier Frequency Lower Limit Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Hunting Prevention Selection Hunting Prevention Gain INCRE MENT 0 001 sec 0 01 0 001 sec SETTING RANGE 0 00 300 00 0 000 10 000 0 00 300 00 0 000 10 000 ACCESS LEVEL PARA See Note 3 REF 8 i See Note 1 5 7 See Note 1 NU 5 7 FACTORY SETTING See Note 1 ume 9 REEL 0 001 0 000 0 500 0 004 A 57 sec 0 0 A 5 7 0 0 400 0 0 4 15 0 See Note 2 0 4 15 0 See Note 2 00 99 See Note 2 0 00 2 50 A1 8 See Note 2 10 0 See Note 2 00 See Note 2 Table A1 3 Drive CX XX Parameters Continued PARAMETER FUNCTION INCRE SETTING FACTORY ACCESS LEVEL papa DESCRIPTION E Note E NUMBER NAME MENT RANGE SETTING MN em enm T epe YC
249. s remote using either two wire or three wire control The sequence inputs to the drive do NOT require any outside voltages to activate them Instead contact closures either from switches relay contacts or open collector circuits activate the sequence inputs Two wire sequence utilizes a maintained switch or relay contact It is used on applications where it is desirable to have the drive restart on restoration of power It should not be used where safety of attending personnel might be threatened by a restart This method is generally restricted to unattended fans amp pumps or where another controller is entrusted with the decision to restart Direction is controlled by maintaining either a forward run or a reverse run command Three wire sequence utilizes momentary buttons or switches This control scheme emulates the traditional 3 wire motor starter control A momentary closure of a normally open run switch latches the drive in the RUN mode STOP switch must be closed or the drive will not accept the momentary RUN command A momentary opening of the normally closed STOP switch unlatches RUN mode bringing the drive to a stop The three wire sequence is used where it would be dangerous for the drive to restart after a power outage This method requires an intentional restart as the RUN command is unlatched immediately on loss of power Direction is determined by another maintained contact closure closed reverse
250. s defined by E1 05 08and 10 NOTE If energy saving operation is enabled before accel time is complete output V Hz is not affected until set frequency is reached then output voltage is reduced by energy saving gain b 8 01 setting RUN COMMAND ENERGY SAVING COMMAND 4 Z V of E1 05 08 amp 10 x Energy Saving Gain b8 01 OUTPUT VOLTAGE Energy Saving Run Timing 5 27 5 17 EXTERNAL FAULT INPUTS H1 01 thru H1 06 Multi function Data 20 2F External Fault Inputs Term 3 thru 8 The multi function input terminals can be used to define various modes of external faults When the External Faults 1 4 are inputted to EF8 are displayed on the Digital Operator steady for a major fault situation blinking for a minor fault situation The second digit of the H1 01 thru H1 06 setting is entered in hexadecimal values which defines what type of external fault contact is used and how the drive will react to the fault input Terminal Always Input Note 1 Detected 4 Factory Set Ni oja 1 N O normally open contact N C normally closed contact 25 Mode 0 Ramp to Stop decel time per C 1 02 Mode 1 Coast Stop Mode 2 Emergency Stop decel time per C 1 09 Mode 3 Continuous operation minor fault EXAMPLE EXTERNAL To program External Fault 3 Terminal 3 FAULT GPD 515 for a N C
251. s in order to best match the drive to the motor This procedure is not required but should be done when more accurate speed regulation is needed Consult Section 2 2a or 2 2b for details Example 1 Sequence amp Reference From The Digital Operator 13 GPD 515 G5 Control Wiring Schematic 17 U1 01 0 00 Hz 12 T 2 gt n No Control Wiring Necessary When the drive is set up with the sequence and the reference coming from the digital operator it is in Local control Local control is often used during startup to verify motor operation rotation etc The drive can be temporarily placed in Local control simply by pressing the LOCAL REMOTE key When the drive is in Local control the SEQ and REF LEDs are off If power is removed and then restored the drive will come up in the Remote mode SEQ and REF LEDs are on The drive can be programmed so that even if power is lost the drive will come up in the local mode see Table 2 below OPERATION The frequency reference is programmed into parameter U1 01 See Table 2 for details e The drive can be started by pressing the RUN key on the digital operator e drive can be stopped by pressing the STOP key on the digital operator direction of the motor can be changed regardless of motor speed by pressing the FWD REV key Pressing the JOG key when the drive is stopped will cause the motor to run at the jog frequency
252. s set to flux vector A1 02 3 a C3 06 setting of 1 will improve torque linearity at and above base speed 5 84 5 38 SLIP COMPENSATION Continued C3 01 Slip Compensation is used to increase motor speed to account for slip this is accomplished by boosting output frequency with a corresponding boost in output voltage Sets the slip compensation gain in increments of 0 1 When the gain is 1 0 the output frequency is increased by 196 of the E1 06 setting at rated current A setting of 0 0 results in no slip compensation C3 02 amp C3 03 affect this gain as shown in the block diagram C3 04 determines whether the slip compensation gain will be enabled or disabled during regeneration SOFT STARTER INTERNAL SFS gt FREQUENCY REFERENCE 400 Hz Delay C3 02 Limit E1 04 CURRENT E1 06 DETECTOR E1 06 1 04 Output Frequency NOTE When Fref is less than E1 09 setting this function is disabled Slip Compensation Block Diagram EXAMPLE 45 90 Hz actual output Desired frequency is 45 Hz 2 frequency Motor slip 2 at full load 45 Hz command boost C3 01 2 0 Kf corresponding Actual output frequency at voltage boost full load 45x1 02 45 90 Hz 5 85 5 39 STALL PREVENTION A L3 04 Stall Prevention Selection During Decel Factory setting 1 L3 0
253. s terminals 61 amp DB Unit terminals 63 amp Power for heat sink fan 1 to 2 230 VAC Ground terminal 100 ohms or less SECTION B 460V FUNCTION 40P41F 40151F 40181F 40451F 40551F 43000F TERMINAL CIMR G5M Old Model No 001 B034 B041 B096 B128 B605 Three phase Main circuit input power supply 380 400 415 460V at 50 60 Hz Three phase AC output to motor OV to max input voltage level DB Resistor terminals B1 amp B2 DC Reactor terminals 1 amp 2 DC Bus terminals 61 amp DB Unit terminals 63 amp 1 r Power for heat sink fan Power for heat sink fan 2 1to 2 230 VAC 1 to 2 200 230 Vac 2 200 2200 1 to 2 400 460 Vac 2 400 2400 Ground terminal indicates that terminals are not present 1 6 Table 1 2 Terminal Functions and Voltages of Main Circuit SECTION C 600V FUNCTION New Model No 181F 50221F 1 51 F Old Model No GPD515C C003 C022 C027 C032 C041 C200 Three phase Main circuit input power supply 500 575 600V at 50 Hz 60HZ Three phase AC output to motor OV to max input voltage level DB Resistor terminals B1 amp B2 DC Reactor terminals 91 amp 62 DB Units terminals 91 C041 to C200 only DC Bus terminals 61 amp DC Bus terminals 61 amp Power for heat sink fan 1 to 2 600 VAC Gr
254. splay the third from the last fault that occurred DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY See Note 1 Fault Message 3 DC Bus Undervolt Display the fourth from the last fault that occurred Fault Message 4 None NOTE If less than four faults have occurred since the drive was initialized None will appear on the Digital Operator Display the operating hours when the last fault occurred Elapsed Time 1 U3 05 57H Display the operating hours when the second from the last fault occurred Elapsed Time 2 U3 06 41H Display the operating hours when the third from the last fault occurred Elapsed Time 3 U3 07 5H Display the operating hours when the fourth from the last fault occurred NOTES Elapsed Time 4 U3 08 OH 1 Actual displays will differ depending on the recorded fault and the operating conditions 6 9 6 4 TROUBLESHOOTING FLOWCHARTS If the drive malfunctions locate the cause and take corrective action by following the flowcharts given in this section A TROUBLESHOOTING MOTOR SYMPTOMS Motor Does Not ROTATE TArt Chart 6 1 Motor Stalls D ring AGC8 eralt of uuu sssssasnsas nnie Chart 6 2 Motor Does Not Rotate at Set Speed a Chart 6 3 Chart 6 4 TROUBLESHOOTING FOR FAULT CONDITIONS ruo luem
255. sufficient air space for cooling Make sure air entering the drive is below 113 F 45 C for protected chassis drives or below 104 F 40 C for NEMA 1 drives by adding a fan or other cooling device if needed See environmental specifications in Appendix 2 1 1 1 4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION All basic interconnections using the Digital Operator are shown in Figures 1 3 and 1 4 1 4 1 Main Circuit Input Output Complete wire interconnections according to Table 1 2 Figure 1 3 and Figure 1 4 Be sure to observe the following Use 600V vinyl sheathed wire or equivalent Wire size and type should be determined by local electrical codes Avoid routing power wiring near equipment sensitive to electrical noise Avoid running input and output wiring in the same conduit NEVER connect AC main power to output terminals T1 U T2 V and T3 W NEVER allow wire leads to contact metal surfaces Short circuit may result NEVER connect power factor correction capacitors to the drive output Consult Yaskawa when connecting noise filters to the drive output WIRE SIZING MUST BE SUITABLE FOR CLASS CIRCUITS When connecting motor to drive s output terminals include a separate ground wire Attach ground wire solidly to motor frame and to drive s ground terminal When using armored or shielded cable for connection between drive and motor solidly connect armor or shield to motor frame and to drive s ground terminal Motor lead leng
256. system response to fast load or reference changes and to reduce overshoot upon startup To eliminate the differential function entirely set this parameter to 0 00 seconds b5 06 PID Output Limit Factory setting 100 0 Range 0 0 to 100 0 Parameter b 5 06 can be used to set the maximum effect the PID controller will have on the system It also will limit the PID output when it is either positive or negative NOTE When the PID output limit is reached the integrator will hold and not change in value until the PID output is less than the PID output limit b5 07 PID Offset Adjustment Factory setting 0 0 Range 100 0 to 100 0 This parameter will add a fixed percentage to the PID output It can be used to tune out small system offsets NOTE This parameter is set as a percentage of maximum output frequency E1 04 These parameters are factory set for optimum results for most applications and generally do not need to be changed 5 80 5 36 PID CONTROL Continued b5 08 Output Lag Filter Time Factory setting 0 00 Range 0 00 to 10 00 seconds This parameter adds a filter to the PID output to keep it from changing too quickly The higher the setting the slower the PID output will change b5 09 PID Output Selection Factory setting 0 Range Oor 1 Setting Description The output of the PID controller will decrease when there is an
257. t No 5P50 Part No CIMR G5M GPD515C 0162 0163 0164 0165 1217 1201 0483 0484 0485 0491 0492 0487 0488 5103047 51P51F 52P21F 53P71F 55P51F 57P51F 50111F 50151F 50181F 50221F 50301F 50371F 50451F 50551F 50751F 50900F ST600F 51600F C200 No Diode in these Drive Model Nos diodes are contained in Power Module New Drive Old Drive Power PCB Gate Drive PCB Model No Model No Part No ETP615 Part No 615___ 65 GPD515C 880 890 900 900 910 E RE mE C004 1 55P51F C010 1 50111F C017 1 1 C027 C032 C041 50451F C062 50751F C099 50900F C130 51100F C172 51600F New Drive Old Drive Cooling Fan DC Bus Fuse Model No Model No Part No 5P16 Part No CIMR G5M GPD515C 57 0058 0059 FU2067 50208016 50208017 FU2068 50205052 50205053 50205054 50208018 50208019 50208020 51P51F 52P21F 53P71F 55P51F 57P51F 50111F 50151F 50181F 50221F 50301F 50371F 50451F 50551F 50751F 50900F 51100F 51600F DQ PSF N N N PY N N IMPORTANT Numbers represent total quantity used in one Drive To determine adequate inventory of spare parts Yaskawa suggests using listed value for quantities 2 and below
258. t V f pattern L2 05 Undervoltage Detection Level Factory setting 190 230V ratings 380 460V ratings Range 150 to 210 VDC 230V ratings 300 to 420 VDC 460V ratings The setting of this parameter determines the DC bus undervoltage trip point When the voltage level on the DC bus drops below this value a UV undervoltage fault will occur 5 51 5 29 MOMENTARY POWER LOSS RIDE THRU Continued UNDERVOLTAGE DETECTION SET FREQUENCY OUTPUT FREQUENCY OUTPUT VOLTAGE OUTPUT CURRENT Minimum Baseblock Time Power Loss Ride thru Time Voltage Recovery Time Speed Search Current Speed Search Decel Time V f Reduction During Speed Search Momentary Power Loss Ride thru With Speed Search 5 52 5 30 MULTI FUNCTION ANALOG INPUTS Term 14 amp 16 H3 05 Multi function Analog Input 1 Selection Term 16 H3 09 Multi function Analog Input 2 Selection Term 14 Programming H3 05 or H3 09 per the chart below configures terminal 16 or 14 for analog control The figures following the chart show how each setting configures the analog input FUNCTION Manual reference DESCRIPTION External reference input AVAILABILITY See Note 2 Frequency reference gain FGAIN Total gain Internal gain H3 02 x FGAIN Frequency reference bias FBIAS Total bias Internal bias H3 03 FBIAS FBIAS is based on Fmax E1 04 VBIAS Voltage b
259. t value of C6 01 Set C6 03 0 and set the same value in both C6 01 and C6 02 b For synchronous mode only with proportional section Set C6 03 12 24 36 or 48 These setting values establish carrier frequencies of 12f 24f 36f or 48f respectively where f output frequency c In Vector Control mode ONLY 6 01 is effective CARRIER FREQUENCY UPPER LIMIT NEN 3 C6 01 10 0 kHz 10 0 kHz C6 01 5 0 kHz 6 01 lt 5 0 kHz C6 01 CARRIER FREQUENCY Fout x C6 03 x K OUTPUT FREQUENCY NOTE Fault code oPE11 is displayed if either of the following conditions is detected 1 6 03 gt 6 6 02 gt 6 01 2 6 01 gt 5 0 kHz C6 02 lt 5 0 kHz 5 9 CRITICAL FREQUENCY REJECTION A d3 01 Prohibited Frequency 1 Factory setting each 0 0 d3 02 Prohibited Frequency 2 Range each 0 0 to 400 0 Hz d3 03 Prohibited Frequency 3 These parameters allow programming of up to three prohibited frequency points for eliminating problems with resonant vibration of the motor machine This feature does not actually eliminate the selected frequency values but will accelerate and decelerate the motor through the prohibited bandwidth B d3 04 Prohibited Frequency Deadband Factory setting 1 0 Range 0 0 to 20 0 Hz This parameter determines the width of the deadband around each selected prohibited frequency point The factory setting is 1
260. tained If not contact MagneTek for assistance 11 Reinstall and secure covers on the Braking Transistor Units Remote Mount Resistor Units and the drive CAUTION During normal operation the Braking Transistor Unit and the Remote Mount Resistor Unit enclosures must be kept closed since high voltage is applied to the dynamic braking circuit A6 8 Accel Decel Time 5 3 Setting Dn toes 5 5 Acceleration Stall Prevention Level During 5 86 Stall Prevention Limit During Stall Prevention Selection During sasa Time iss sa a Analog Inputs Multi function Term 14 amp 16 s 5 58 Analog Monitor Output Multi function Term 21 23 sss 5 57 Blas s 5 57 soon 5 57 Signal Level Selection 5 57 Output Selection 5 57 At Set Frequency Output Signal 5 73 Automatic Speed Regulator ASR 5 9 ASR Integral Reset ve 5 59 Integral Time 1 5 9 Integral Time 2 4485 11 Proportional Gain 1 5 9 Proportional Gain 2 5 11 Output Lag Time a 5 11 Auto Restart Fault Contact Status During 5 8 No of 5 7 Auto
261. tall prevention during running enabled uses Decel time 2 C1 04 L3 06 Stall Prevention Level During Running This parameter determines the actual drive output current level while operating MOTOR at set speed frequency Set in percent CURRENT of drive rated output current see Appendix 2 A setting of 200 will L3 06 disable stall prevention during running setting During running at set speed if the output current exceeds the value set in L3 06 the drive will begin to decelerate When the output current goes below the value set in L3 06 acceleration begins up to the set frequency OUTPUT FREQ 5 87 Factory setting 160 Range 30 to 200 5 40 STOPPING METHOD b1 03 Stopping Method Selection Factory setting 0 Range 0 to 3 Selects the stopping method suitable for the application setting Deceleration ramp to stop Coast to stop Full range DC injection to stop Coast to stop with timer A Data 0 Deceleration to Stop Upon removal of the FWD REV Run command the motor decelerates at Output Frequency the deceleration rate determined by the time set in Decel Time 1 C1 02 and DC injection braking is applied immediately before stop If the decel time is too short or the load inertia is too large an overvoltage OV fault may occur on a stop command the decel time must be increased Decel Time 1 i Min Out
262. ted 5 The Up function data 10 and the Down function data 11 have not both been selected 6 The Trim Control Increase Data 1C AND Trim Control Decrease Data 1D Functions have not both been selected Table 5 2 lists the possible data setting values for these parameters with the function and a brief description for each one For a few of the data settings a more detailed description is given on the following pages for others the description is given in other PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES paragraphs 5 58 5 32 MULTI FUNCTION INPUT TERMINALS Term 3 8 Continued Table 5 2 H1 01 thru H1 06 Data Settings AVAILABILITY FUNCTION DESCRIPTION See Note 1 0 1 2 3 0 Forward Reverse selection Redefines terminals to X X X X for 3 wire control 1 Run 2 Stop corresponding terminal 3 8 FWD REV select 1 Local Remote selection Open Operates according to setting of X X X X b1 01andb1 02 Closed Operates from keys of the Digital Operator See Data description following this table 2 Option drive reference Open Operates from Digital Operator and or X X X X selection external terminals Closed Operates from installed option 3 Multi step reference X X X X select 1 4 Multi step reference See paragraph 5 25 B X X X X select 2 5 Multi step reference X X X X select 3 6 Jog frequency reference Closed Jog selected X X X X See parag
263. tered into non volatile RAM The drive also retains the operating conditions when the fault occurred These conditions can only be displayed when the drive is in the Drive mode DRIVE light is on Table 6 2 Displaying Fault Conditions DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE See Note 1 If a major fault has just The DRIVE and STOP lights are occurred but the drive illuminated and the FWD REV has not been reset SEQ amp REF lights are flashing proceed directly to Step A External Fault 3 If the drive has been reset Press then the conditions at the last MENU _DATA _ fault can still be displayed ENTER then 4 times Function 02 Z Fault Trace Press DATA Current Fault ENTER None Proceed to Step A Step A Display the frequency reference Press Last Fault N that was present when the fault occurred A L External Fault 3 Press A 4 Frequency Ref U2 03 10 00 Hz Display the output frequency Press a Output Freq that was present when the NA fault occurred TUU HR J Table 6 2 Displaying Fault Conditions Continued DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY See Note 1 Continue pressing to cycle through all of the condition displays These include output current A output voltage DC bus voltage kWatts input terminal status output terminal status operation status and elapsed time DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE N
264. th should NOT EXCEED 164 feet 50 meters and motor wiring should be run in a separate conduit from other power wiring If lead length must exceed this distance reduce carrier frequency see paragraph 5 8 and consult factory for proper installation procedures Use UL listed closed loop connectors or CSA certified ring connectors sized for the selected wire gauge Install connectors using the correct crimp tool recommended by the connector manufacturer WIRE SIZE TERMINAL CLOSED LOOP CLAMPING TORQUE AWG mm SCREW CONNECTOR STEEL COPPER Ib in N m Ib in N m 20 0 5 M3 5 125 35 7 8 0 9 7 0 0 8 18 0 75 M4 125 4 13 0 15 104 12 16 1 25 M4 125 4 13 0 15 404 12 M4 2 4 13 0 15 10 4 12 14 2 M5 2 5 26 1 20 9 3 1 24 M4 35 4 13 0 15 104 12 12 3 5 M5 35 5 26 1 20 9 3 1 24 M4 85 4 13 0 15 104 12 10 5 5 M5 55 5 26 1 20 9 3 1 24 M5 8 5 26 1 20 9 3 1 2 4 8 8 M6 8 6 40 9 34 8 4 8 4 1 6 14 M6 14 6 40 9 348 48 4 1 4 22 M8 22 8 1000 826 117 107 M8 38 8 1000 826 117 107 2 38 M10 38 10 1826 1565 214 184 1 0 60 M10 60 10 1826 1565 214 184 3 0 80 M10 80 10 1826 1565 214 184 M10 100 10 1826 1565 214 184 4 0 100 M12 100 12 313 0 191 3 367 23 1 MCM300 150 M12 150 12 3130 1913 367 234 400 200 M12 200 12 3130 1913 367 234 M12 325 12 3130 1913 367 234 MCM650 325 M16 325 16 3130 1913 367 234 Table 1 1 Typical Wire Sizing For Main Circuit
265. these parameters will not be initialized by programming A 1 03 to 1110 2220 or 3330 A1 14 PARAMETER NUMBER NAME Constant Operation Selection at PG Open Circuit Operation Selection at Overspeed Operation Selection at Speed Deviation PG Division Rate PG During Accel Decel Selection Overspeed Detection Level Overspeed Detection Delay Time Excessive Speed Deviation Detection Level Excessive Speed Deviation Detection Delay Time FUNCTION Encoder PG PG Rotation 0 Counter clockwise 1 Clockwise Pulse Monitor Integral Value Number of PG Gear Teeth 1 Number of PG Gear Teeth 2 PGo Detect Time Table A1 6 Drive FX XX Parameters INCRE DESCRIPTION MENT 0 Ramp to stop 1 Coast to stop 2 Fast stop 3 Alarm only 0 Ramp to stop 1 Coast to stop 2 Fast stop 3 Alarm only 0 Ramp to stop 1 Coast to stop 2 Fast stop 3 Alarm only Effective only with control circuit board PG B2 0 Disabled 1 Enable O o a4 o um A1 15 SETTING RANGE 1 0 3 FACTORY SETTING See Note 1 ACCESS LEVEL See Note 2 PARA REF Table A1 6 Drive FX XX Parameters Continued PARAMETER FUNCTION INCRE SETTING FACTORY ACCESS LEVEL para DESCRIPTION See Note 2 NUMBER NAME MENT RANGE serme LE Al 14 Bi polar 3 channel individual Separate or Uni polar 3 channel addition Option
266. thod A1 02 3 One of two methods may be used to run the drive in torque control A1 Torque control can be set by programming parameter d5 01 d5 01 Torque Control Selection Factory setting 0 Control Method 0 Speed Control 1 Torque Control OR A2 Torque control can be set by programming a multi function input terminal for Speed Torque Control Selection Data 7 1 The drive will be in torque control when the corresponding input terminal is closed This selection can be delayed by programming d5 06 for a delay time H1 01 thru H1 06 Multi function Input Data 7 1 Speed Torque Term 3 thru 8 Control Selection d5 06 Speed Torque Control Selection Timer Factory setting 0 Range O to 100 ms B Regardless of which way torque control is selected the torque reference will be input to the drive at terminals 16 amp 17 Multi function analog input H3 05 Multi function Analog Input Data 13 Torque Term 16 Reference The scaling with factory defaults for gain amp bias is 10V on terminal 16 10096 of the motor rated torque 5 95 5 43 TORQUE CONTROL COMMAND Continued C d5 03 Speed Limit Selection Factory setting 1 Range 1 or2 d5 04 Speed Limit Factory setting 0 Range 120 to 120 When setting the drive for torque control a speed limit is required This speed limit can come from either a programmed value 45 04
267. tical surface A Braking Transistor Unit requires a minimum 1 18 inches 30 mm clearance on each side and a minimum 3 94 inches 100 mm clearance top and bottom Attach the Remote Mount Resistor Unit maintaining a minimum 1 97 inches 50 mm clearance on each side and a minimum 7 87 inches 200 mm clearance on top 2 In each Braking Transistor Unit set the nominal line voltage jumper plug to the correct setting for the installation this is factory set at the 230V 460V 575V position To access jumper plugs remove plexiglass cover 3 If multiple Braking Transistor Units are being installed the unit closest to the drive should have the SLAVE MASTER jumper plug on its PCB set to the MASTER position factory setting all others must have this jumper plug moved to the SLAVE position 4 If a single Braking Transistor Unit and Remote Mount Resistor Unit are being installed connect them to the drive and external control circuitry according to the chart below and Figure A6 4 If two or more Braking Transistor Units and Remote Mount Resistor Units are being installed connect them to the drive and to external circuitry according to the chart below and Figure A6 5 LEAD SIZE LEAD TERMINAL UNIT TERMINALS AWG TYPE SCREWS Power leads for the Remote Mount Resistor Unit generate high levels of electrical noise these signal leads must be grouped separately A6 5 11 R T1 0 12 5 GPD 515 G5 CONTROL PCB BRAKING TRAN
268. to the correct Control Method under the Initialize menu A1 02 10 Reset the drive from the Initialize menu using the Init Parameters function A1 03 Entering 2220 will reset the drive for 2 wire control Entering 9330 will reset the drive for 3 wire control NOTE After a successful initialization the Init Parameters display will return to No Initialize 11 Program all parameter settings with the data that was recorded in step 1 A4 1 New Drive Old Drive Model No Model No Power Module Part 5 30 Transistor Module Part No 5P30 Diode Module Part No 5 50 0155 0156 0176 0177 0477 0478 0479 0490 0480 0481 20 41 20P71F No Diode Module in these 21P51F Drive Model No s diodes are 22P21F contained in Power Module 23P71F 25P51F 27P51F 20111F 20151F 20181F 20221F 20300F 20370F 20550F 20750F New Drive Old Drive Model No Power Part No 5 90 Gate Drive Part No 5 90 Control PCB CIMR G5M GPD515C 0430 0410 0414 0415 0416 0417 Part No 5P90 0535 20P41F 20P71F 21P51F 22P21F 23P71F 25P51F 27P51F 20111F 20151F 20181F 20221F 20300F 20370F 20550F 20750F New Drive Old Drive Model No Model No Cooling Fan Part No 5 16 DC Bus Fuse Part No 5P17
269. tput Voltage AV 10V 230V A A Reference Vq 10V 460V 10V 575V Output Voltage 0 1 V 10V 230V A A Reference Vd 10V 460V 10V 575V U1 28 CPU ID No EXAMPLE 00110 AJAJAJA 4 U1 32 ACR q Axis 0 1 A A 4 Output U1 33 ACR d Axis 0 1 A A 4 Output U1 34 OPE Detected AJAJAJA 4 U1 35 Zero Servo Only available with Zero Servo 1 pulse A 4 Pulse Count function in Flux Vector control PID Input Displays PID Error 0 01 10V 100 AJAJAJA Setpoint minus Feedback U1 37 PID Output Displays PID Output 0 01 10V 100 A A A A 10096 E1 04 CACA Ea Frequency At time of most recent fault Reference S LS 1 o Output At time of most recent fault Frequency 02 05 Output Current At time of most recent fault A1 29 Table 1 10 Drive UX XX Parameters Continued PARAMETER DISPLAY ANALOG MONITOR ACCESS LEVEL MONITOR ITEM DESCRIPTION ise Note i NUMBER UNIT OUTPUT LEVEL erm 71 Fefee wv s s s IE 02 09 Output kWatts At time At time of most recent fault most recent fault 0 1 KW 1 kW w epp Torque _ time of most recent fault 0 1 Reference Input Terminal At time of most recent fault Status 11111111 i LLLI n Control circuit terminal Control circuit terminal Control circuit terminal Control circuit terminal Control circuit terminal Control circuit terminal Control circuit terminal
270. tput level set by this parameter When the Digital Operator is used Jog can only be initiated from the stopped condition When the drive is running the JOG key will have no effect on drive output When an external Jog signal is present it will override the existing operation mode and the drive will ramp to the level set by this parameter EXAMPLES OPERATION FROM DIGITAL OPERATOR Press and Release Hold JOG JOG FREQ CMD d1 09 JOG REF vA Press Press and Release Press RUN Hold JOG JOG STOP FREQ CMD di 09 JOG REF 0 5 36 5 24 JOG REFERENCE Continued EXAMPLES OPERATION BY REMOTE SIGNAL INPUT RUN amp JOG1 Joa x L y FREQ CMD d1 09 JOG REF a 0 RUN JOG1 a _ FREQ CMD d1 09 JOG REF 0 JOG2 2 WIRE CONFIGURATION b1 02 1 Remote Control FWD COMMAND EXTERNAL FWD OR REV JOG2 x FREQ CMD di 09 JOG REF 0 5 37 5 24 JOG REFERENCE Continued EXAMPLES JOG2 3 WIRE CONFIGURATION b1 02 1 Remote Control RUN COMMAND EXTERNAL JOG2 FWD OR REV FREQ CMD d1 09 JOG REF 0 Momentary contact When JOG2 command is released a STOP command is issued NOTES 1 Use of external Jog input is selected by setting data 6 12 or 13 in one of the parameters H1 01 thru H1 06 e
271. ts Braking CIMR G5M GPD515C Each Each row Height Width Depth 20P41F 50185430 1 200 150 220 7 16 20P71F 50185430 1 200 150 220 7 16 21P51F 50185431 1 100 150 125 7 16 1 11 1 1 1 Input 22P21F 50185432 150 120 7 16 23P71F 1 40P71F B003 50185531 150 120 7 16 1 73 0 51 Table A6 2 Dynamic Brakin 2 i ing Cycle 230V Braking Transistor Unit Remote Mount Resistor Unit New Dri Old Dri Minimum Dimensions Resist P A Dimensions Rated Model No No Part No Qty Connectable Inches Part No Ohms Watts ana Inches Input CIMR G5M GPD515C 46803331 Resistance 5 41 Each Each T 4 5 Each Ohms Height Width Depth Each Each Torque Height Width Depth 20 41 20P71F 21P51F 22P21F 23P71F 25P51F 27P51F 20111F 20151F 20181F 20221F 20300F 20370F 20550F 20750F A6 1 Rated Input 600V Drive New Drive Model No CIMR G5M 40P41F 40P71F Old Drive Model No GPD515C Part No 46S03331 Table A6 3 Dvnamic Brakinq 10 Duty Cvcle 460V Braking Transistor Module Minimum Connectable Resistance Each Ohms Dimensions Inches Height Length Remote Mount Resistor Unit Resistance Ohms Each Approx Braking Torque Dimensions Inches Height Length Depth 41P51F 43P71F 44P01F
272. ts a fault only if RUN command is not present X Fast Stop N O Open No Effect Closed Ramp to stop by Fast Stop Decel Time C1 09 Motor 2 Select Switches between two different sets of motor parameters Open Use parameter A 1 02 E1 Parameter amp E2 Parameters Closed Use parameter E3 01 E4 Parameters amp E5 Parameters Fast Stop N C No Effect Ramp to stop by Fast Stop Decel Time C1 09 Closed Open Timer function ON or OFF delay See Data description following this table PID control disable Closed PID control is disabled setpoint becomes frequency reference Accel decel time selection 2 Open Accel decel by C1 01thru C1 04 Closed Accel decel by C1 05 thru C 1 08 See paragraph 5 2 B Program lockout Open Programming from Digital Operator is disabled Closed Programming from Digital Operator is enabled Trim control increase Closed Increase analog frequency reference by d4 02 value See Data description following this table Trim control decrease Closed Decrease analog frequency reference by d4 02 value See Data description following this table Analog reference sample hold Open Hold frequency reference Closed Sample frequency reference See Data description following this table Frequency reference selection Open Freq ref from term 13 Closed Freq ref from term 14 5 60
273. tting 1 0 Range Oto 16383 pulses H2 01 thru H2 03 Multi function Output Data 3 3 Zero Servo Term 9 amp 10 25 26 Completed See paragraph 5 33 The function of b9 02 is to set the number of pulses used for the multi function output terminals During zero servo the multi function output will be closed ON until the number set into b9 02 has been completed After the number of pulses have been completed the multi function output changes to the open OFF state 5 111 5 50 ZERO SPEED CONTROL NOTE This function can only be used in Flux Vector control method A1 02 3 A b1 05 Zero Speed Operation Factory setting 0 Range 0 to 3 The setting of this parameter determines which Zero Speed mode is enabled see figures on following pages Bede Run at Frequency Reference STOP Run at Minimum Frequency Run at Zero RPM E1 09 Minimum Output Frequency Factory setting 0 0 Range 0 0 to 400 0 Hz Note If control method is anything other than Flux Vector A1 02 3 the Factory Setting is 0 5 This parameter sets the speed reference level at which Zero Speed mode operation will activate in accordance with the selection programmed in b1 05 see figures on following pages SOFT START S CURVE SPEED FEEDBACK ASR OUTPUT WITH ANALOG INPUT
274. tting until an output of 60 0 Hz or other desired max output frequency is obtained NOTE Follow the same adjustment procedure for other desired frequency setpoints 5 29 5 18 FREQUENCY REFERENCE BIAS GAIN Continued ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE continued C For inverse acting frequency reference 1 Begin with H3 02 amp H3 03 settings as shown below 2 Fine tune as indicated in A or B above GPD 515 G5 Frequency reference inputs terminals 13 amp 17 0 10 VDC terminals 14 amp 17 4 20 mA 0 10V 20K Q FREQUENCY REFERENCE 14 4 20 mA 250 H3 02 H3 03 H3 02 H3 03 100 0 0 0 100 0 0 0 0 0 100 0 0 0 100 0 096 096 4mA 20mA INPUT VOLTAGE TERM 13 INPUT CURRENT TERM 14 5 30 5 19 FREQUENCY REFERENCE INPUT SIGNALS AUTO MANUAL H3 01 Auto Speed Reference Signal Factory setting 0 Level Selection Term 13 Range 0 or 1 To change the control circuit terminal 13 input level program H3 01 Setting Terminal 13 Input Level 0 0 to 10 V 1 10 to 10 V H3 04 Multi function Analog Input 1 Signal Factory setting 0 Level Selection Term 16 Range O or 1 To change the control circuit terminal 16 input level program H3 04 Terminal 16 Input Level 0 0 to 10 V 1 10 to 10 V H3 08 Multi function Analog Input 2 Signal Factory setting 2 Level Selection Term 14 Range 0 2 To change the control circuit
275. ulated or equivalent external control circuitry according to the chart at right and Figure A6 3 Power leads for the Remote Mount Resistor Unit generate high levels of electrical noise these signal leads must be grouped separately Terminal Screw M4 3 Reinstall and secure Remote Mount Resistor 2 5 GPD515 G5 ry Unit cover and L3 T T3 W drive front cover L1 4 Proceed to ADJUSTMENTS on page A6 8 REMOTE MOUNT RESISTOR 3 PART OF USER SUPPLIED UNIT EXTERNAL CIRCUIT POWER THRX ON 1M pte FAULT CONTACT Figure A6 3 Wiring Remote Mount Resistor Unit to Drive GPD515C A003 thru A033 CIMR G5M20P41F thru 27P51F B001 thru B034 40P41F thru 40151F and 003 thru C032 51P51F thru 50221F A6 4 Braking Transistor Unit s and Remote Mount Resistor Unit s Installation for GPD515C A049 CIMR G5M20111F and above B041 40181F and above C041 50301F and above IMPORTANT Since the Remote Mount Resistor Unit generates heat during dynamic braking operation install it in a location away from other equipment Select mounting locations for the Braking Transistor Unit s and Remote Mount Resistor Unit s so that wiring between the drive and the Master Braking Transistor Unit and between each Braking Transistor Unit and its associated Remote Mount Resistor Unit is less than 33 feet 10 m 1 Mount the Braking Transistor Unit s on a ver
276. ult Parameter Initialization 2220 z Factory 2 Wire Control Initialization Maintained RUN Contact 8330 z Factory 3 Wire Control Initialization Momentary START STOP Contact Entering either Initialization code resets all parameters to factory settings except for A1 00 A1 02 02 04 amp E1 03 and automatically returns A1 03 setting 0 No Initialization If the GPD 515 is connected for 3 Wire control and this parameter is set to 2220 2 Wire Control Initialization the motor may run in reverse direction WITHOUT A RUN COMMAND APPLIED Equipment damage or personal injury may result When 02 03 1 the existing parameter settings become default user settings and the 1110 initialization option appears in A1 03 When 02 03 is not set to 1 this option is not available Anytime the A1 03 parameter is set to 1110 all parameter settings that have been changed return to the default user settings only 50 parameters be stored as default settings This is NOT a Factory Initialization 5 83 5 38 SLIP COMPENSATION C3 01 Slip Compensation Gain Factory setting 0 0 Range 0 0 to 2 5 Note Factory setting changes to 1 0 for Flux Vector and Open Loop Vector control methods C3 02 Slip Compensation Primary Delay Factory setting 2000 Time Range 0 to 10000 ms Note Factory setting changes to 200 for Flux Vector and Open Loop Vector control methods
277. urrent signal 4 20mA Set H3 09 to data B and H3 08 to data 2 e Voltage signal 0 10 VDC Set H3 05 to data B and H3 04 to data 0 Voltage signal 10 to 10 VDC Set H3 05 to data B and H3 04 to data 1 5 79 5 36 PID CONTROL Continued D PID Settings b5 02 Proportional Gain Factory setting 1 00 Range 0 00 to 10 00 Proportional gain is the value by which the error signal is multiplied to generate a new PID controller output A higher setting will result in a more responsive system A lower setting will result in a more stable system b5 03 Integral Time Factory setting 1 0 Range 0 0 to 360 0 seconds This parameter determines how fast the PID controller will seek to eliminate any steady state error The smaller the setting the faster the error will be eliminated To eliminate the integral function entirely set this parameter to 0 0 seconds A lower setting will result in a more responsive system A higher setting will result in a more stable system b5 04 Integral Value Limit Factory setting 100 0 Range 0 0 to 100 0 This parameter will limit the effect that the integrator can have It works whether the PID controller output is positive or negative It can also be used to prevent integrator wind up b5 05 Derivative Time Factory setting 0 00 Range 0 0 to 10 00 seconds This parameter can be adjusted to increase
278. utput transistors are disabled for a period of time determined by the setting of L2 03 The L2 03 setting should represent the time required for the motor residual voltage to go to zero When the momentary power loss time exceeds the minimum base block time the speed search operation is started immediately after power recovery WHEN MIN BASEBLOCK TIME IS LONGER THAN MOMENTARY POWER LOSS TIME MOMENTARY POWER LOSS TIME MIN BASEBLOCK TIME DRIVE BASEBLOCK TIME WHEN MIN BASEBLOCK TIME IS SHORTER THAN MOMENTARY POWER LOSS TIME MOMENTARY POWER LOSS TIME MIN BASEBLOCK TIME DRIVE BASEBLOCK TIME 5 32 MULTI FUNCTION INPUT TERMINALS Term 3 8 Continued E Data 18 Timer Input Function H2 01 Multi function Output Terminals 9 amp 10 Data 1 2 Timer Function H2 02 Multi function Output Terminals 25 amp 27 H2 03 Multi function Output Terminals 26 amp 27 b4 01 On delay Timer Factory setting 0 0 Range 0 0 to 300 0 sec b4 02 Off delay Timer Factory setting 0 0 Range 0 0 to 300 0 sec When the timer function input is closed for longer than On delay Timer b4 01 the timer function output closes When the timer input is open for longer than Off delay Timer b4 02 the timer function output opens sl liani Dn D ON fon fon Input Function i I Multi function Contact Output Timer Function
279. vel is an adjustable value which can be set in parameter F1 10 b7 02 Droop Control Delay Time Factory setting 0 05 Range 0 03 to 2 00 seconds The setting of this parameter determines the drive s droop response time to a load change NOTE Only available in the Flux Vector Control Method A1 02 3 5 19 5 14 DWELL b6 01 Dwell Frequency at Start Factory setting 0 0 Range 0 0 to 400 0 Hz b6 02 Dwell Time at Start Factory setting 0 0 Range 0 0 to 10 0 seconds b6 03 Dwell Frequency at Stop Factory setting 0 0 Range 0 0 to 400 0 Hz b6 04 Dwell Time at Stop Factory setting 0 0 Range 0 0 to 10 0 seconds This function allows the drive to temporarily suspend acceleration or deceleration and remain at a desired output frequency for a specified length of time After receiving a run command the drive accelerates to the designated dwell start frequency b6 01 The output is then held at that frequency for the duration of the dwell time at start 66 02 After that length of time the drive continues to accelerate to the set frequency When the run command is removed the drive decelerates to the designated dwell stop frequency b6 03 The output is then held at that frequency for the duration of the dwell time at stop b6 04 After that length of time the drive continues to decelerate until the output frequency is zero SET FREQUENCY OUTPUT
280. w analog control of the overtorque detection level When this function is programmed into H3 05 the internal overtorque detection level L6 02 is disabled OVERTORQUE DETECTION LEVEL OVERTORQUE DETECTION LEVEL OV E H2 01 Multi function Output Term 9 amp 10 H2 02 Multi function Output Term 25 27 H2 03 Multi function Output Term 26 27 gt 10V VOLTAGE REFERENCE Data B Overtorque Detection A contact or two open collector outputs can be programmed to change states during an overtorque detection condition 5 99 5 44 TORQUE DETECTION Continued EXAMPLE OF OVERTORQUE DETECTION L6 01 setting 2 Detect during run energize multi function output display alarm L6 02 setting 110 Level at which torque detection is sensed L6 03 setting 1 0 s Time delay before overtorque event occurs H2 01 setting B Torque Detection 1 multi function output normally open 110 TORQUE 100 REFERENCE RUN SIGNAL CONTACT OUTPUT TORQUE DETECTION 1 TERM 9 amp 10 Torque Detection Timing Diagram 5 100 5 45 TORQUELIMIT A L7 01 Forward Torque Limit L7 02 Reverse Torque Limit L7 03 Forward Regenerative Torque Limit L7 04 Reverse Regenerative Torque Limit Factory setting each 200 Range each O to 300 These parameters provide the ability to limit the amount of torque produced by the motor in all four quadrants of
281. y Enabled Continues At all times except during stopping or DC injection braking Enabled Coast to stop Only at set frequency Enabled Coast to stop At all times except during stopping or DC injection braking For overtorque detection during accel decel set to 2 4 For continuous operation after overtorque detection set to 1 or 2 During detection the Digital Operator displays and OL3 alarm blinking To stop the drive at an overtorque detection fault set to 3 or 4 At detection the Digital Operator displays an OL3 fault B 16 02 Overtorque Detection Level 1 Factory setting each 150 L6 05 Overtorque Detection Level 2 Range each 0 to 300 96 These are the reference points for determining that an overtorque condition exists Set as a percent of drive rated current see Appendix 2 C 16 03 Overtorque Detection Time 1 Factory setting each 0 1 L6 06 Overtorque Detection Time 2 Range each 0 0 to 10 0 seconds Determines how long an overtorque condition must exist before another event will occur e g coast to stop multi function output change of state or warning or fault display 5 98 5 44 TORQUE DETECTION Continued D H3 05 Multi function Analog Input Term 16 Data 7 External Overtorque Detection Level Adjustment The multi function analog input at terminal 16 may be configured to allo
282. ystem is still in Run condition accel or decel will again become active to allow output to reach set speed If Stop is initiated while the HOLD command is present the prohibit state is cancelled and the system enters stop operation FWDRUNSLL Lo Lo r SPEED REF gt j OUTPUT SPEED HOLD Function Timing C C1 09 Fast Stop Decel Time Factory setting 10 0 Range 0 0 to 6000 0 seconds H1 01 thru H1 06 Multi function Inputs Data 15 Fast Stop Term 3 thru 8 The Fast Stop Decel Time is used instead of the selected Decel Time C1 02 04 06 or 08 if 1 It has been selected as the decel time for a specific fault 5 04 18 03 or 2 One ofthe multi function inputs has been programmed for Fast Stop and the corresponding input is closed 5 2 ACCEL DECEL TIME Continued D H3 05 Multi Function Analog Data 5 Accel Decel Time Input Term 16 Coefficient The multi function analog input at terminal 16 may be configured to allow analog control or the Accel Decel time The input voltage in the range of 1 to 10V determines the coefficient by which the Accel Decel time is reduced Accel Decel Time ACCEL TT DECEL Cosiiciem COEFFICIENT Actual Accel Decel Time EXAMPLE Accel Decel Time 10 sec Voltage Ref at Term 16 5V Actual Accel _ 10sec 2sec COEFFICIENT Decel Time 5 coefficient 5 C1 01 or C1 0

GPD 515/G5 Drive Technical Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents